Home

00 Cover & Table of Contents - Advanced Test Equipment Rentals

1. 266 9 2 LMLAnalysls cce tr Ee ee ERE edet 268 9 3 PING T68SE eiie ecce ede 271 9 4 PING RESPONSE zie a ri beet eg rental 274 10 0 275 10 1 System Configuration 275 10 1 1 System Profiles sssssssssssseess 276 10 1 1 1 Enter a New System Profile 276 10 1 1 2 Invoke a Stored System Profile 277 10 1 1 3 View an Existing Profile 277 10 1 1 4 Activate the Default Profile 277 10 1 1 5 Delete a Profile 277 10 1 1 6 Modify an Existing 277 10 1 2 General Configuration 278 10 1 3 Erase NV RAM nennen 281 10 1 4 Full Self Test 281 10 1 5 Version Option 282 10 2 Measurement Configuration 283 10 3 Error Injection 285 10 3 1 Programming a Burst of 10 Errors 286 10 3 2 Programming a 1e 06 Bit Error Rate 287 10 4 Other Parameters 28
2. 180 68 1 Configuration rei gestern 181 6 8 2 MSU Monitor 183 0 8 2 4 183 6 8 2 1 1 filtering fields 185 6 8 2 1 2 Filtering fields 0 187 6 8 2 1 3 Filtering fields for SCOP 189 6 8 2 1 4 Layer 3 Filtering fields for SNM 193 Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions con t 6 8 2 1 5 Layer 3 Filtering items for SNT 194 6 8 2 1 6 Layer 2 Filtering items 195 6 8 2 2 Start Traco nt Fett teres 196 6 8 2 3 View Print Tracer eese 197 0 9 39 SU AnalySls usc Rete e HEB e et RR 204 6 9 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT Menus SW191 206 6 9 1 GSM Monitor 207 6 9 2 VOICE TRAU XMT eene 209 6 9 3 TOk BERT Mee ee ed ydus 211 6 10 Switched 56 Testing 187 213 6 10 1 Test Configuration sse 214 6 10 2 SW56 Call Setup esses 216 6 10 3 Measurement Results 218 6 10 4 TELEOS Call Monitor 219 7 0 VF Channel ACCESS 220 7 1
3. No Class Value Cause Name 1 000 0001 Unallocated number 2 000 0010 No route to specified transit network ooo 0011 No route to destination 6 ooo Channel Unacceptable 7 000 0111 Call awarded amp being delivered in a established channel 16 001 0000 Normal Call Clearing 17 001 0001 User Busy 18 001 0010 No user responding 19 001 0011 No answer from user user alerted 21 001 Call Rejected 22 001 0110 Number changed 26 001 1010 Non selected user clearing 27 001 1011 Destination out of order 28 001 1100 Invalid number format address incomplete 29 001 1101 Facility Rejected 30 001 1110 Response to STATUS ENQUIRY 31 001 1111 Normal unspecified Class Resource Unavailable ___Cause No Class Value Cause Name 34 010 0010 No circuit channel available 38 010 0110 Network out of order 41 010 1001 Temporary Failure 42 010 1010 Switching equipment congestion 43 010 1011 Access information discarded 44 010 1100 Requested circuit Not Available 47 010 1111 Resources unavailable unspecified Class Service or Option Not Available Cause Cause Class Value Cause Name No 50 011 0010 Requested facility not subscribed 57 011 1001 Bearer capability not authorized 54 011
4. Last Frame 12 or 24 SF 12 ESF 24 Figure 224 DS1 Frame Structure T1 framing is simpler than DS3 framing In T1 there are 192 data bits and 1 framing bit With framing the first bit of the frame is easily found Most T1s are arranged with 24 channels of data with one byte 8 bits transmitted per channel per frame Channel 1 is the first 8 bits after the frame bit channel 2 is the second 8 bits after the framing bit and so on 8000 frames per second are transmitted Each channel provides 64 kbps bandwidth Refer to Figure 224 There are 3 kinds of standardized T1 framing in use today SF ESF and SLC 96 The simplest is SF Super Frame which consists of 12 T1 frames grouped together The 12 framing bits are transmitted in a recognizable pattern such that the super frame is organized into frame number 1 frame number 2 and so on ESF Extended Super Frame groups 24 SF frames together Of the 24 framing bits only 6 are used to establish the frame position i e which frame is number 1 which frame is number 2 and so on ESF uses another 6 framing bits for a CRC 6 Cyclic Redundancy Check code 6 and uses another 12 framing bits for the FDL Facility Data Link The CRC 6 bits are the remainder from a division of the bits of the previous frame by a sixth order polynomial and if the two figures are not identical then the monitoring device can assume that a transmission error h
5. 102 4 5 Correcting a Mistake in the Pattern 103 4 6 Editing a User Test 103 4 7 Deleting a User Test Pattern 103 5 0 Measurement 104 5 1 Measurement Result Screens 107 5 1 1 Measurement Results Summary Screens 108 5 1 2 Line BPV 5 113 5 1 3 Signal Screen 115 4 SunSet T10 Rev B Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions con t 5 1 4 Frame SCreenu iones ice teu re n 118 5 1 5 ESF CRC 6 Screen esse 121 5 1 6 Logical Screen eee PR eee 123 5 1 7 Frequency 125 5 2 Datacom Measurement Results 127 5 3 T1 MUX Mode Measurement Results 129 6 0 Other Measurements 130 6 1 View Received 130 6 2 Propagation Delay 133 6 3 Quick Test and 135 6 4 Bridge Tap 140 6 5 Pulse Mask Analysis SW190
6. PRINTING COLUMNS USER FONT 2 BACK UP oN CHARACTER 3 SELECT NORMAL 4 ZERO NORMAL 5 6 INTERNATIONAL 7 OFF CHARACTER SET Enaush DIP SWITCH 3 POSITION DATA LENGTH PARITY 2 ON SETTING PARITY 3 ON CONDITION 4 ON BUSY CONTROL H WBUSY e 5 E 6 ON BAUD RATE 7 Pp on se omne SELECT 9600 bps c c ee an er sp Table 1 Switch Settings for SS118B C amp D Printers SS118 Thermal Printer Switch Settings SERIAL 4 PARALLEL CR gt CR LF 80 COL Es 40 COL gt olmo E gt 7 gt amp BIT BN z Ea PARITY ODD s gt 1200 2400 4 BAUD RATE 0 lt sunnise TeLecom Figure 13 Switch Settings for SS118 Printer SunSet T10 49 Rev 3 2 3 Printing to a Parallel Printer Centronix DIN RS232 Male Male m Cable Parallel Cable N To T10 To Printer i Parallel Port Serial Port Black Box Serial m Parallel E Converter Figure 14 Printing to a Parallel Printer In addition to printing out results on the SS118 series printer any parallel printer can be used HP or Epson Refer to Figure 14 and use the following proc
7. 37 3 2 Printing from the Serial Port 38 3 2 1 Serial Port Settings 38 3 2 2 Configuring for 38 3 2 3 Printing to a Parallel 41 4 0 Additional Controls ssssssseeee 42 5 0 Remote Control 100 43 Chapter 3 Menu 47 1 05 IntrOQUetlOr iic eed petet ene eder ees 48 2 0 Test Configuration Menu seeeem 48 2 1 T1SINGL Test Mode ssssseeen 49 2 2 T1DUAL Test 56 2 3 T1 MUX Test Configuration 65 2 4 Datacom Operation Menus 69 2 4 1 Datacom Test Configuration 69 Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions con t 3 0 LPBK amp Span 72 3 1 CSU amp NI Control 73 3 1 1 Basic Loopback Procedure 75 3 1 2 Select a User Loopback Code 75 3 1 8 View a User Loopback Code 76 3 1 4 Program a User Loopback Code 76 3 1 5 Correcting a Mis
8. Figure 183 Typical SLC 96 System Configuration SLC 96 systems are used to carry subscriber telephone ser vice as well as a variety of special services The systems pro vide pair gain by multiplexing up to 96 metallic loops onto 4 T1 lines These systems have a remote terminal located near the customer and a central office terminal located in the central of fice The central office terminal may have a DS1 or analog metal Ch 4 Applications 349 lic test mode to the switch Conversely newer switches may be built with a TR TSY 000008 test mode SLC 96 test mode stan dard so that there is no need for a central office SLC 96 terminal SLC 96 systems have three modes of operation Modelis where all 4 digroups are used each channel of each digroup is reserved exclusively for a given customer Modellis where only 2 digroups are used for all 96 channels the SLC 96 system keeps track of which channels are allo cated to which customers through the C bits in the SLC data link Mode Ill the system serves only special service lines This mode uses only two digroups because only 48 channel units can be plugged into the terminals The A digroup transmits the system s data link through the SLC 96 framing format The data link contains alarm protection switching far end looping and other maintenance information The B and D digroups use D4 framing These digroups are not used in modes Il and 1 The C digroup also uses S
9. CSU 24 M13 M13 lt gt Figure 233 DS1 ESF PRM Errors Both of these alarms indicate that the received errors are at the end of the line that is generating these messages If seeing no errors on the other direction of the monitored line then the problem exists between the test set and the end generating the FEBE or PRM error messages If the other side shows BPVs CRC 6 frame or other errors then the problem exists between the test set and the end of the circuit that is not generating the FEBE or PRM error messages If both DS3 FEBEs and DS1 PRM errors are seen while moni toring a DS1 circuit from a DS3 access point Then the problem exists before the end of the DS3 If seeing ESF PRM errors but FEBEs are not seen on a C bit parity framed DS3 while monitoring a DS1 then the problem ex ists between the side of the circuit generating the ESF PRMs and the end of the DS3 mux Figure 233 shows a typical example of a network fault leading to this indication 452 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 8 0 SS7 Technology Overview SS7 CCS7 Signaling System Number 7 is a common chan nel signaling system conceived to provide services such as inter processor transaction for call remote control maintenance net work management signaling This is a reliable means for informa tion transfer in the correct sequence without loss or duplication A number of applications are supported by SS7 PSTN Public Switching Telephone Ne
10. L STAT DISC Figure 80 Backup D Channel Status Screen The SunSet T10 automatically configures to 464B D D upon entering the Backup D Channel Test In this state the information is transferred on 46 B channels on both Lines 1 and 2 One D channel controls transmission the other acts as a backup and is activated when the first D channel is no longer in service Notes The SunSetT10 must be in T1 DUAL mode to use the Backup D Channel Test Emulation Mode must be set to TE to access the Backup D Channel Test This feature checks the backup D channel service It shows the status for both Lines 1 and 2 In Figure 80 the F keys provide three options CALL F3 accesses the Call Setup screen which allows a call to be placed DISC F2 disconnects and releases the line When satisfied with the call after it has connected with the switch press the DISC F key L STAT F1 Pressing this F key displays the status for both Line 1 and Line 2 There are two F keys available in the L STAT screen see Figure 81 e DROP L1 F1 DROP L2 F2 These F keys temporary dis connect the selected line When disconnected the F key toggles to EST L1 or EST L2 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 169 21 10 05 LINE 1 D CHANNEL INTERFACE In Service LINE 2 D CHANNEL INTERFACE Stand By DROP L1 DROP L2 Figure 81 L STAT Screen The following fields are displayed for each line
11. Figure 11 Printer Cable Pin Assignments 38 SunSet T10 49 Rev To use the SS122C Null Modem Adaptor with other brands of printers refer to Figure 12 PIN TO PIN 25 DB25MALE 25 MALE Figure 12 SS122C Null Modem Pin Assignments To begin printing follow this procedure 1 Connect the Sunrise Telecom DIN 8 to RS232C Printer Cable 55115 to the serial port at the top of the SunSet T10 2 If using a Sunrise Telecom printer skip this step Otherwise connectthe Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter SS122C to the free end ofthe Printer Cable Note thatthe adapter ends are labeled Test Set Cord and Printer Terminal 3 Confirm that the SunSet T10 s serial port settings match those ofthe printer Refer to the instructions that came with the printer on how to check or change the switch settings If using the Sunrise Telecom thermal printer referto Table 1 forthe correct switch settings If using the SS118 printer refer to Figure 13 Ch 2 Product Description 39 DIP SWITCH 1 DP SWITCH PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETERS SETTING OFF INPUT SERIAL POSITION PRINTING SPEED HICH AUTO LOADING ON AUTO LINE FEED SETTING ON COMMAND OFF me ON PRINTING 100 8 DENSITY ENABLE Oo DIP SWITCH 2 DIP SWITCH PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETERS SETTING POSITION
12. Terminal Access Fractional T1 Termianal Equipment FRAC Video Router MUX Bridge other FT1 Channel Format Term Access Points N FT1 channels 24 N idel channels Monitor Access Points N FT1 channels 24 N active channels from other circuits Figure 181 Fractional T1 Circuit Fractional T1 circuits are circuits with data rates of Nx56 kbps or Nx64 kbps where N can be from 1 24 channels N channels of the T1 line are dedicated to the fractional T1 circuit The remain ing channels of the T1 line are filled with either an idle code or other revenue traffic A fractional T1 circuit typically starts out at the customer premises at a fractional T1 CSU Refer to Figure 181 The pur pose of this CSU is to convert the signal into a standard T1 signal suitable for transmission on the telephone company network The CSU may also multiplex other fractional signals into an aggregate fractional signal within the T1 The CSU is configured to place the data into either an Nx56 or Nx64 kbps format Nx56 utilizes the first 7 bits in each channel and allows the customer to transmit an unlimited number of ze roes even when the T1 line is optioned for AMI coding The CSU places a 1 in the eighth bit to ensure 12 596 ones density even when the customer is transmitting all zeroes Ch 4 Applications 345 Nx64 is like Nx56 except the CSU inserts no ones This for mat is generally used when the T1 line is con
13. 141 6 6 DDS Measurements 5 188 143 6 6 1 Configuration amp Send Pattern 144 6 6 2 Loop Back Access 146 6 6 3 Measurement 148 6 6 4 Send Receive DDS Control Codes 149 6 7 ISDN Primary Rate Menus 5 186 151 6 7 1 ISDN Configuration 152 6 7 2 Start Link Call Setup 155 6 7 2 1 Sequential Call 5 186 157 6 7 2 2 Sequential BERT 160 6 7 2 3 Placing a Call sss 163 6 7 2 4 Viewing Call Information 166 6 7 2 5 Performing a BERT 167 6 7 2 6 Receiving a 168 6 7 3 Backup D Channel Test 169 6 7 4 SetupFilter 172 6 7 5 Start aCe iudei emen deett 173 6 7 6 View Print 174 6 7 7 Other Parameters 177 6 8 557 Analysis Option 5 189
14. AB No tip gnd No ringing 1 d Ringing 0 iie d 0 Loop open 1 Loop closure zm M No ring gnd o Ring gnd Foreign Exchange Offic Exchange Office End FXO Loop Start mode VF inputto FXO TRMT RCV FXO output No ringing 01 Ts Ringing o 0 Loop open L vU Loop closure gt Foreign Exchange Subscriber FXS grd start mode VF input to FXS 7RMT MT a FXSVFoutpu FXS VF output Loop open no ring gnd A ar 4 t Ring gnd 00 1 No tip gnd Loop closure or ring gnd 11 0 Tip gnd i 1 Notip gnd no ring bi 0 Tip gnd no ringing Loop open Tip gnd ringing Loop closure L u I Tip gnd no ringing Foreign Exchange Subscriber End FXS loop start mode mode VF input to FXS TRMT RCV FXS VF output AB AB Loop open 01 i Loop closure p l 1 No ringing Loop open 01 0 Ringing Loop closure 11 ___Noringing _ No ringing Pulse Link Repeater PLR VF input to PLR TRMT RCV X PLRE amp Moutpu AB AB E lead open 00 ij E lead grd or loop M lead grd or open ol M lead batt or loo Input to RD rwr RDouput A B No ring to t r simp x 11 os 20Hzringtrsimpx o0 1 Noringtotrpair
15. FILTER TYPE engmum NUMBER ED CALLE Figure 82 D Channel Filter Setup Screen There are four parameters for filtering ISDN messages After selecting the particular parameter enter the numeric value in the NUMBER field The parameters are CALLREF F1 Call reference number identifies which active call a message belongs to The call reference number is established with setup message and is used on all following messages for that call This value should be entered in decimal format CALLED F2 Called Number is the destination number of the transaction This value should be entered in octet format CALLER F3 Caller number is the originating number of the transaction This value should be entered in octet format NONE F4 This provides no filtering elements This allows the SunSet T10 to capture all ISDN messages If either CALL REF CALLER or CALLED was selected select NUMBER and enter the desired number using the SHIFT key and number keys on the keypad If a mistake is made while entering press the SHIFT key on the keypad and select the in correct number Then press the SHIFT key again and enter the correct number Note that any entered numbers to the right will be erased with this typeover 172 SunSet T10 Rev 6 7 5 Start Tracer 21 10 05 R No 387 ENT No 83 ED MESSAGE 1 02 33 54 04 F ESSAGE No 1 ER DATA 64 cC LER4 EMPTY TYPE NE 1
16. FO 00 00 02 07 00 82 00 E 85 37 21 10 05 ESG NO 1 ANSI 00 10 48 77 Figure 94 ANSI SCCP Message Hex View The following information displayed in Figure 94 Messagenumber inthis example the number of the message is 1 Receive line in this example the line receiving the message is line 2 Thedateandtime ofthe message asreceived Inthis example the date is 01 10 02 and the time is 00 10 48 77 Service Indicator Field in this example it is SCCP DPC Destination Point Code shown in decimal Themessage is displayed in hexadecimal form Three F keys are available in this screen PAGE UP F1 This F key allows viewing other pages of data by showing the previous message In Figure 94 pressing the PAGE UP F key displays the last message PAGE DN F2 This F key allows viewing other pages of data by showing the next message In Figure 94 pressing the PAGE DN F key displays message 2 DECODE F3 Decodes the hexadecimal form and displays the de coded message contents Figure 95 shows a decoded message 198 SunSet T10 Rev 21 10 05 RCV MESG NO 1 ANSI LINE 2 01 10 02 00 10 48 77 MSU SCCP BSN 7F 1 FSN 42 1 SI 3 SSF 0 SLS 01 PC 194 000 000 OPC 139 024 000 type 06h DT1 REF 03 00 00 EAS 82 El C7 04 00 00 00 00 gt gt Figure 95 ANSI SCCP Message Decode View The following items a
17. Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select the time slot value from which you will drop signals via Line 2 Tx 2 As the transmit time slot is changed the receive time slot automatically changes However you can manually change the receive time slot if necessary INSERT TYPE Options TALK F1 TONE F2 QUIET F3 Select the desired insert type TALK Use to talk on the transmit signal The SunSet T1O will transmit speech from the microphone located at the bottom of the SunSet T10 TONE Use to insert a tone on the transmit signal 222 SunSet T10 Rev QUIET This places a quiet termination on the transmit signal Note If selecting TONE use the next two settings to set the tone frequency and level TONE FREQ Hz Options 50 2 3950 Hz If selecting TONE as the INSERT TYPE then select the tone frequency here Change the frequency in two ways Pressthe F key corresponding to the desired frequency five frequencies are available 404 1004 1804 2713 or 2804 Hz Use the SHIFT and number keys on the keypad to enter the desired value Select any value from 50 3950 Hz If entering in afrequency with the keypad numbers the ENTER key on the keypad will need to be pressed Alternatively move the cursor off the TONE FREQ line to start sending the new tone TONE LVEL dBm Options 60 to 3 dBm If selecting TONE as the INSERT TYPE then select the tone level here To change the tone level 1 Pressthe
18. f N OPULSES SF OYEL IDLE POWER O B8ZS O ESF OAIS Q LOW BATT ERRORS SLC 96 OPAT SYNC co OPULSES SF OBIT ERROR 1 2 B8ZS ESF OYEL IDLE oS oo M SunSet T10 ERRORS OSLC 96 O AIS 12 34 41 VIEW RECEIVED DATA PAGE 01 T S BINARY HEX ASCII 01 11011111 DF UE 02 11000010 C4 03 01000010 42 B B 04 00011110 1E 05 01100101 65 06 00101110 2E t 07 11010100 D4 08 11000101 C5 C PAGE UP PAGE DN RESUME STORE Fi F2 F4 SUNRISE TELECOM F1 F2 F3 F4 A B D RESYNC LIGHT GRAPHIC ERR INJ E 1 2 3 AUTO VOLUP X VOLDN HISTORY F 4 5 6 lt A gt SHIFT T ESCAPE 9 ENTER e POWER PRN SCRN 0 ES Y Figure 7 SunSet T10 Front View Ch 2 Product Description 27 1 0 Keypad Functions F1 F2 F3 F4 A B B HESYNC LIGHT GRAPHIC ERR INJ 1 2 AUTO VOLUP VOLDN_ HISTORY 4 5 6 P161 7 8 9 SHIFT ESCAPE M ENTER POWER PRN SCRN Figure 8 SunSet T10 Keypad SunSet T10 keys can have two distinct meanings The White Label above the key indicates what function will be performed if the key is pressed by itself i e ERR INJ or HISTORY The Orange Label below the key indicates
19. 10 1 1 4 Activate the Default Profile This procedure will return the SunSet T10O s settings to its original default settings 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and push the DEFAULT F4 F key 2 Pressthe ENTER key onthe keypad The screen will return to SYSTEM CONFIG and the SunSet T10 s configuration will revert to the defaults 10 1 1 5 Delete a Profile 1 Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and select the desired profile 2 Press the DELETE F2 F key 10 1 1 6 Modify an Existing Profile 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and select the desired profile 2 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to invoke this profile 3 Move to the other desired menus within the SunSet T10 to change the setup items 4 Enter SYSTEM PROFILES and press the STORE F2 F key 5 Givethe profile anew name Note that the new profile can have the same name as the old profile The profiles are stored as file numbers 6 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to SYSTEM PROFILES 7 Selectthe old version of the profile and press the DELETE F2 F key 8 Selectthe new profile and pressthe ENTER key on the keypad Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 277 10 1 2 General Configuration 13 28 00 GENERAL CONFIG Y M D 00 11 21 H M S 13 28 00 DATE TIME BACK LIGHT PRINTER BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY E
20. 1112222 TYPE 4 N ESTART Figure 83 Start Tracer Screen for ISDN Start Tracer begins the tracing of ISDN messages in accor dance with the filtering parameters in Setup Filter The following items appear in this screen BUFFR No Total number of messages stored in the buffer CURRENT No Current message number The following items can appear in this screen RECEIVED MESSAGE always includes received message date and time stamp It can include SETUP MESSAGE CREF num ber BEARER type and other call related items Three F keys are available in this screen RESTART F1 This will empty the existing buffer and restart the tracing process PAUSE RESUME F2 PAUSE stops the tracing process but does not empty the buffer No tracing is performed while the SunSet T10 is in pause RESUME will continue the tracing DECODE HEX DECODE will decode the ISDN messages in detail HEX will display the messages in hexadecimal format Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 173 6 7 6 View Print Tracer View Print Tracer allows viewing and printing of specific data captured by the SunSet T10 Refer to Figure 84 21 10 05 VIEW PRINT TRACE TOTAL RECORD 74 VIEW FROM VIEW TO 74 CLR ALL PRINT Figure 84 ISDN View Print Tracer Screen Three function keys are available within this screen CLR ALL F1 This erases the contents of the v
21. CONTINU Continuous is the default setting Use the LIGHT key on the keypad to turn the light on and off PRINTER The default settings work with the printer supplied by Sunrise Telecom To use the SunSet T10 with another printer the BAUD RATE PARITY STOP BIT BITS CHAR and CR LF INSRT set tings may need to be changed Sunrise Telecom does not warrant the operation of the SunSet T10 with any printers not supplied by Sunrise Telecom BAUD RATE Options 1200 F1 2400 F2 9600 F3 19 2K F4 The baud rate indicates the number of changes in tone per second Default is 9600 which is for remote control operations 1200 and 2400 will not support remote control features PARITY Options NONE F1 EVEN F2 ODD F3 Parity is a method of checking the accuracy of transmitted or stored data Parity is the sum total of all bits as either odd or even A parity value is documented by adding an extra bit known as a parity bit to the data This bit will be set to either Oor 1 depending on what value is needed to pass the parity test Forexample if there is odd parity andthe datais 10101010 the parity bit is 1 The total number is including the parity bit equals 5 an odd number The receiving element checks the parity bit and indicates an error if the total number of ones does not add up to the correct total Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 279 ODD In odd parity the total number of ones including the added parity bit
22. DTE Select DTE if the SunSet T10 emulates data terminal equip ment and will plug into DCE equipment DCE Select DCE if the SunSet T10 emulates data circuit equip ment and will plug into DTE equipment Options if TYPE is RS232 DTE SYN F1 DCE SYN F2 DTE ASY F3 DCE ASY F4 RS232 supports both synchronous and asynchronous trans mission DTE SYN Select if the SunSet T10 emulates data terminal equip ment synchronous and will plug into DCE SYN equipment DCE SYN Select if the SunSet T10 emulates data circuit equip ment synchronous and will plug into DTE SYN equipment DTE ASY Select if the SunSet T10 emulates data terminal equip ment asynchronous and will plug into DCE ASY equipment DCE ASY Select if the SunSet T10 emulates data circuit equip ment asynchronous and will plug into DTE ASY equipment TEST RATE Options 300 F1 600 F2 1200 F3 2400 more F1 4800 more F2 9600 more F3 14 4k more F1 19 2k more F2 38 4k more F3 48k more F1 Nx56k more F2 Nx64k more F3 Choose the desired test rate for the Datacom circuit testing For Nx56k and Nx64k select channels 1 24 by pressing the corresponding F key until the desired channel is selected Note for RS232 there is only one 64K or 56K channel REF CLOCK Options INTERN F1 RECEIVE F2 The reference clock allows selecting the SunSet T10 s inter nal clock or external timing received at the multiport for the trans
23. E UP Figure 178 Ten Bit Pattern The SunSet T10 s display is useful for analyzing live circuit data It also displays binary data hexadecimal and ASCII trans lations Use this to decode T1 network control codes that are in use and to verify the contents of DDS channels Sixty screens of data are stored at once This allows scroll ing through the information and observing changes over time The number of screens can also reveal whether a T1 network pattern is interleaved with the framing bit or is overwritten by the framing bit Use this procedure 1 4 5 If BRIDGE or DSXMON access modes are used this test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic If TERM used the test mustbe performed out of service Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and specify DSXMON or BRIDGE mode if the circuit is carrying live traffic Specify the other settings as desired To have frame alignment on the received signal be sure to set the correct framing Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figures 169 DSXMON or 170 Bridge Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge the blinking LEDs Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to access the MAIN MENU Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA Ch 4 Applications 329 6 Review the displayed live data When the codes of interest appear press the PAUSE F3 F key to trap the 60 screens of data
24. Figure 234 SS7 Network In reference to Figure 234 the following list identifies the link nomenclature A link Access links that connect switching offices to the STPs B link Bridge links that connect one mated pair of STPs to the second mated pair C link Cross links that connect a mated pair of STPs to each other D link Down links that connect the RSTPs to the LSTPs E link Extended links that connect the switching offices to the STP pairs other than its home pair F link Links that connect one SP to another but neither SP is an STP 454 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 2 SS7 Protocol The first three levels of the SS7 protocol follow the OSI Open System Interconnect definition quite closely However due to the dedicated link nature of SS7 many of the upper OSI layer functionalities were deemed redundant Figure 235 illustrates the correlation Application Presentation TCAP ISUP Session Transport SCCP Network Data Link MTP Physical TUP Telephone User Part ISUP ISDN User Part MTP Message Transfer Part SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part Figure 235 SS7 and OSI Protocol Architecture MTP The MTP Message Transfer Part performs functions such as transmitting bits detecting and correcting errors and end to
25. The F key options for the available masks are T1 403 F1 CB 119 F2 PRINT F3 62411 more F1 T1 102 more F2 PRINT more F3 G 703 more F1 NO MASK more F2 and RESTART more F3 5 Press the PRINT F key to print the mask 6 Pressthe RESTART more F3 F key to do another measure ment 6 When finished press the ESCAPE key onthe keypad twice to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 141 Screen Definitions Thecenter line is the actual captured pulse Theinner and outer lines are the specified pulse mask upper and lower limits Aslongas the captured pulse falls within the inner and outer lines it passes for quality PASS or FAIL is shown on screen The following are the pulse statistics shown in the right hand margin of the display Width Pulse width in ns Rise Pulse rise time in ns Fall Pulse fall time in ns e Over S Pulse over shoot as a percentage UndrS Pulse under shoot as a percentage Level Pulse signal level in dB 142 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 6 DDS Measurements SW188 DDS Measurements enables the SunSet T10 to test and main tain DDS Digital Data System networks by performing basic DDS loopbacks and measurements The SunSet T1O s testing capa bilities include support for 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 56 and 64 kbps data rates support for interleaved and latching loopbacks of various types e providing bit error and bit err
26. DGRM This is the number of BPV degraded minutes since the beginning of the test A BPV DGRM is 60 consecutive non se verely errored seconds during which at least 92 BPVs occurred DGRM This is a percentage of BPV DGRMs that have oc curred since the beginning of the test 114 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 3 Signal Screen The SIGNAL screen presents all measurements based on the actual T1 signal Use this screen if concerned with the T1 signal Several measurements are useful in just about any appli cation Shown in Figure 48 is the LINE 1 SIGNAL screen 21 10 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM RCV QRSS XMT ORSS E 1 SIGNAL 1544000 2 93 2 92 5 85 0 2 dB VL 0 2 dB Lpp 0 2 dB SMPX O mA STOP more Figure 48 Line 1 Signal Screen Defined as follows are the measurements in Figure 48 AS Signal available seconds is the number of seconds during which signal was not lost UAS Signal unavailable seconds is the number of seconds dur ing which signal was lost UAS Signal percent unavailable seconds is the percentage of seconds during which LOS was detected since the beginning of the test Usage A quick way to see a percentage of time in which there was no signal on the line LOSS Signal loss of signal seconds is a count of the number of seconds for which signal has been lost during the test Usage This measurement can provide c
27. Length Indicator Signalling Info Octet Identify various types of messages ie ISUP SCCP Status Field Shows the Status of the link Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 237 LSSU Message Structure 458 SunSet T10 8 Rev B e Fill in Signal Unit FISU As named FISUs are used to fill in when there is no traffic on the link This keeps the link aligned Flag Flag First BIT Received Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last message received Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgement of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent Forward Indicator Bit Bit is inverted to indicate the retransmission of negative acknowledgement messages Length Indicator Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 238 FISU Message Structure Ch 5 Reference 459 8 4 ISUP Message Example ISUP messages are used to provide circuit related control in formation In general the most basic application used today for ISUP is call set up The IAM Initial Address Message is the first message sent for setting up a call Subsequently there are a num ber of other messages being exchanged to connect and eventu ally release the call Figure 238 shows the complete call process IAM Initial Address Message COT Continuity Check ACM Address Completion Message ANM Answer Message REL Release RCL Release Complete Figure 239 Typical Phone Ca
28. Press NONE F2 to view no events Press CLR ALL F3 to clear all events stored in memory To view specific events press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the desired event range with the keypad numbers Press the ENTER key on the keypad to display all of the EVENT records that have been selected NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to view each event record Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished To view results Select VIEW FROM on the RESULT RECORD line The same three function keys as above as well as the SHIFT key options are available for the RESULT range Press the ENTER key on the keypad to display all of the RESULT records that have been selected PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 to view different screens of results Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished 3 Menu Descriptions 291 10 6 Print Records PRINT RECORDS provides the ability to print the test results stored in the print buffer Select either ALL F1 to print all test records NONE F2 to print none of the test records e NEXT to select a particular test record to print out 10 7 Load Samples LOAD SAMPLES loads five sample messages in the VIEW PRINT TRACER for SS7 ISDN and MF TRACER These mes sages will automatically clear and replace all messages currently stored in these buffers 292 SunSet T10 Rev B 11 0 Data Link Control DATA LINK CONTROL applies to ESF and SLC 96 framing DATA LINK CONTROL is not
29. The eoc verification menu contains two items EOCSETUP EOCSTATISTICS 8 2 1 EOC Setup The EOC SETUP screen allows configuring the SunSet T10 for monitoring the eoc channel The eoc channel may be changed the default setting is channel 12 as specified by GR 303 CORE A filter may also be set to isolate a specific EOC datalink path 21 10 05 EL 12 ER MANUAL Figure 135 EOC Setup Screen Configure the following CHANNEL Options 1 24 Determines which DSO the SunSet T10 will monitor in EOC Statistics The default channel is 12 which follows the GR 303 CORE specification If required a different channel may be observed by using the F keys INC F1 amp DEC F2 Press the INC and DEC keys to change the value 1 10 F3 The 1 10 key adjusts the increment decrement value Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 259 FILTER ON Options NONE F1 SELECT F2 MANUAL F3 Provides filtering when monitoring the filter allows isolation of aparticular eocdatalink path between the RDT and IDT remote terminal and switch Filtering is based on the SAPI TEI values contained in the address field Chapter 5 Reference provides definitions of all SAPI TEI combinations as defined in GR 303 CORE NONE The SunSet T10 will capture all valid EOC SAPI TEI val ues based on Bellcore s GR 303 CORE specification MANUAL Manually enter the specific SAPI and TEI val
30. UA UI DISC ALL Select to capture all Layer 2 messages Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 243 Layer 3 Msg Options REJECT F1 ALL F2 ON F3 REJECT If selected the SunSet T10 does not capture or display any Layer 3 messages ALL Select to capture all Layer 3 messages ON Provides further Layer 3 filtering After selecting ON more filer choices become available as shown in Figure 125 This al lows for filtering of specific Layer 3 messages i e ones contain ing a particular call reference value Layer 3 Filter Settings The following settings are available if Layer 3 is ON Call Ref Options 1 2048 Allows the SunSet T10 to capture messages that contain a specific call reference number Acallreference number generally corresponds to the physical line termination port at the RDT and thus to a specific customer If this is the case the filter allows the SunSet T10 to capture messages belonging to a customer ALL F1 Captures all call reference numbers INC F2 amp DEC Use the INC and DEC F keys to enter a specific call reference value The SunSet T10 will now only cap ture messages containing the selected value GR 303 specifies valid call reference values from 1 2048 1 10 100 F4 This key changes the increment decrement value of the F2 and F3 keys DS1 Number Options 1 28 TheDS1 number feature allows the SunSet T10 to capture call control messages associated with a particu
31. Upon pressing FLTR ON the following screen shown in Figure 128 is displayed Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 249 17 16 56 VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 371 QUALIFIED 32 EW FROM EW TO POST FLITER IS ON CLR ALL PRINT VIEW FLTR OFE Figure 128 View Tracer with Post filter View Tracer with Post filter displays the total messages cap tured in the buffer The following information is displayed QUALIFIED Number of messages that match the filter settings specified in TMC FILTER No Match is displayed if no mes sages match the filter settings The following F keys are available within this screen F keys CLR ALL F1 PRINT F2 VIEW F3 FLTR OFF FLTR ON F4 CLR ALL Clears all messages stored in the buffer Upon press ing a warning message appears this prevents accidentally eras ing the buffer contents As the on screen instructions indicate press the ENTER key to continue or the ESCAPE key to cancel PRINT Sends the buffer contents to the serial port for printing It will send only those messages specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings The messages maybe printed to a serial printer or PC setfor terminal emulation The print out contains a time and date stamp full decode and hexadecimal for each message VIEW Displays the messages as specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings FLTR OFF FLTR ON Press FLTR OFF to disable the post filter and view all messages in
32. end routing The MTP layer is divided into three levels each of which provides a unique function Level 1 Physical Level provides the physical electrical and procedural characteristics of a SS7 link Level2 Data Link Level provides the functionality needed to do SU alignment error detection correction link synchroniza tion and flow control Level 3 Signaling Network Level provides two major sub functions signaling message handling and signaling network management Signaling message handling contains a discrimi nation function determining if a message is destined to its node a distribution function delivering a message to the appropriate user part and a routing function picking the appropriate route to a destination node The signaling network management provides the procedures neededto restore normal signaling conditions in the event of failure or link congestion Ch 5 Reference 455 SCCP The Signaling Connection Control Part provides the routing capabilities for signaling messages through the GTT Global Title Translation process Using the SCP as the main database for storing SP addresses other SPs can be freed of this task SCCP provides the functionality needed for non circuit ser vices i e transactional services for database access These ser vices are divided into two groups connection oriented and connectionless Connection oriented services provide segment ing and reassembly capabilities of th
33. 166 CREF NO 166 DIR 166 ISDN Other Parameters 47B D CONFIGURE 179 L1INTRFACE ID 178 L2 INTRFACE ID 179 L2Bkup D chnl 177 Layer 2 SAPI 178 Layer 2 TEI 178 Line 1 D chnl 177 ISDN Placing a Call B CHANNEL 164 CALL TYPE 165 CALLED No 163 CALLER No 164 Disconnecting 165 NSF CODE 164 482 SunSet T10 49 Rev ISDN Placing a Call con t NSF TYPE 164 ISDN Receiving a Call Screen ACC LOOP 168 ISDN Sequential Call test CALL TYPE 158 DIAL NUMBER 158 HOLD TIME 157 MY PHONE NUMBER 158 SELF CALL 158 ISUP messages 460 K Keypad through 9 29 A B C D E F 29 AUTO 31 Cursor arrow keys 32 ENTER 32 ERR INJ 31 ESCAPE 32 F1 F4 30 GRAPHIC 30 HISTORY 31 LIGHT 30 Orange Label 28 PRN SCRN 29 RESYNC 30 Shift 29 VOL UP amp VOL DN 31 White Label 28 L LBO 1 55 LEDs 33 AIS 35 B8ZS 34 BIT ERROR 33 ERRORS 35 ESF 35 LOW BATT 34 PAT SYNC 33 POWER 34 PULSES 34 SF 35 SLC 96 35 YEL ALM 35 Index 483 LINE 1 ESF CRC 6 AS 122 ES 122 SES 122 UAS 122 AS 122 CER 121 CRC 121 CURCER 121 ES 122 SES 122 UAS 123 Line 1 Frame Screen AS 120 UAS 121 AS 120 COFA 119 CUFBER 119 ES 120 FBE 118 FBER 119 FSLIP 118 LOFS 120 OOFS 119 UAS 121 YELS 119 Line 1 Frequency Screen WANDER 126 WANDER 126 CLKSLIP 126 FSLIP 126 MAX Hz 125 MIN Hz 126 RCV Hz 125 REFCLCK 126 Line 1 Logical Screen AS 124 ES 124 SES
34. 23 12 36 60 84 24 24 48 72 96 Table 18 Channel Numbering SLC 96 Ch 4 Applications 331 1 11 Determining Round Trip Circuit Delay 1 2 Verify that the span is not in service This test will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by your design Tx CODING as specified by your design Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 172 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge the blinking LEDs Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL For SF framing configure as follows MODE LOOP UP Do not select this item until the other settings are correct TYPE IN BAND CODE NI or CSU as appropriate For ESF framing configure as follows MODE LOOP UP Do not select this item until the other settings are correct TYPE ESF DL CODE Network NIU or LINE CSU as appropriate Select the MODE line and press the LOOP UP F1 F key A Amessage displaying LOOPING UP followed by a LOOP UP SUCCEEDED will be displayed B Press the GRAPHIC key on the keypad for a visual confirmation Refer to chapter 3 section 6 Loopback amp Span Control for additional information about loopback capabilities 332 SunSet T10
35. AA AA 55 55 55 55 80 80 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF FF FF 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 2e23 2e23 is the industry standard 2e 1 pseudo random bit se quence This signal is formed from a 23 stage shift register and is not zero constrained This pattern contains up to 22 zeroes in a row and violates standards for consecutive zeroes in AMI coded transmission 2047 2047 is the industry standard 2047 bit code used for DDS applications Ch 5 Reference 411 1 8 The industry standard 1 in 8 pattern is used for stress testing AMI and B8ZS lines The pattern is also called 1 7 in older litera ture The pattern is frame aligned f is the framing bit as shown in its binary form f0100 0000 FOX The industry standard FOX pattern is used in data communi cations applications The ASCII translation of the pattern is the Quick brown fox sentence The pattern is frame aligned to ensure proper ASCII translation of the bits Sending the pattern with signals is recommended otherwise ASCII translation is not possible The FOX pattern is as follows 2A 12 2 04 8A AA 92 C2 D2 04 42 AA F2 EA 72 04 62 F2 1A 04 52 AA B2 0A CA 04 F2 6A A2 4A 04 2A 12 A2 04 32 82 5A 9A 04 22 F2 E2 04 8C 4C CC 2C AC 6C EC 1C 9C OC BO 50 2e20 2e20 is the industry standard 2e 1 pseudo random bit se quence This signal is formed from a 20 stage shift register and is not
36. F1 F key acursor appears at L1 Rx and L2 Rx Change the received channels by pressing the F key and entering a number from 01 through 24 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 237 7 7 2 MF View Print Tracer F keys CLR ALL F1 PRINT F2 VIEW F3 This second option in the MF Tracer Menu allows for viewing and printing of specific MF ABCD bits and digits CLR ALL Clears all stored data Upon pressing CLR ALL a warning message appears to prevent accidentally erasing the buffer contents Asthe instructions indicate press ENTER to continue and erase or ESCAPE to cancel and keep the messages PRINT Allows printing of selected pages VIEW Allows viewing of selected pages of ABCD bits Shown in Figure 120 is the MF View Tracer screen Note To view or print a limited number of these pages use the SHIFT key and keypad numbers to enter the desired numbers in the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO lines E 1 96 12 02 ST2 01 000 EI 96 12 02 ST1 01 200 1 96 12 02 D 00 INIT 2 96 12 02 D 00 INIT Figure 120 MF View Tracer Screen As shown in Figure 120 the screen displays the Line 1 or 2 the digit or signaling bits and the time A date time stamp is provided for each digit and initial signaling state Use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 F keys to view the available screens 238 SunSet T10 Rev B 7 8 Signaling Analysis Supported in both T1SINGL and T1DUAL modes SIGNAL ING A
37. INSERT more F1 DELETE more F2 DETAIL Displays the details of the selected message If selecting no message push this F key to display the message composer HEX Displays the HEX form of the selected message If selecting no message push this F key to display the message HEX editor SEND Transmits the selected message Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 255 INSERT At the selected message this F Key inserts a blank line before the message DELETE Deletes the selected message from the Send Message Menu To compose a new message use the following procedure 1 Select a empty message line from the SEND MESSAGE MENU and press the DETAIL F1 F key 2 Displayed in to Figure 133 is the MESSAGE COMPOSER Screen 21 10 05 E COMPOSE E I E NON Figure 133 Message Composer 3 Four items are initially displayed LINE 1 This is the transmitting line for the message This is pre set and cannot be changed LAYER 2 TYPE Select from INFO F1 RR F2 RNR REJ more F1 SABME more F2 DM more F3 UI more F1 DISC more F2 UA more F3 Selecting any of the LAYER 2 TYPE moves the cursor to the next line except for INFO Press the INFO F key and the following screen appears Refer to Figure 134 256 SunSet T10 Rev B 21 10 05 E COMPOSE 64Kbs Circuit 64 INC 10 EC 10 1 10 Figure 134 Message Compos
38. It allows the technician to observe the line and check for problems while the customer is actually using it lfoperating the SunSet T10 in DSXMON mode while receiving a 3V signal the BPVLED will light red The SunSet T1O is plugged into an out jack In this case select TERM instead of DSXMON In some cases it may not be clear if the monitor jack provides a bridged access or a 20 dB isolated monitor access In this case try BRIDGE mode first to see if this works if it does not select DSXMON mode 58 SunSet T10 p Rev B Tx SOURCE Options THRU F1 TESTPAT F2 THRU Use THRU for full duplex drop and insert testing on an in service line In this case the signal received on the Rx jack will pass through the SunSet T10 and be transmitted out the Tx jack for Lines 1 and 2 The SunSet T1O will be inserting a signal on one or more channels on the line chosen in TX INSERT The channels and corresponding AB bits on that line that are not being used will be passed through the SunSet T10 unchanged from Rx to Tx TESTPAT Use TESTPAT for out of service bit error rate testing In this case a test pattern is transmitted on the selected TX INSERT jack ldle code is inserted on the unused channels during Nx64 NX56 or VF Channel Access testing On the line not selected the channels and A B C D bits are passed unchanged from Rx to Tx FRAMING Options UNFRAME F1 SF D4 F2 ESF F3 SLC 96 F4 Chose a specific framing typ
39. RT framing FRM transmitted code and configuration CNFG for each ofthe five stages of the test Refer to section 5 of this chapter for measurement definitions 21 10 05 ET 000 00 50 RT 000 04 10 FRM ESF TxCd AMI CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS LINE 1 SUMMARY BPVR 0 0e 09 ER 0 0e 09 RCs 0 EFS EFS Lpp REQ 1544000 Figure 60 Quick Test Summary 11 When the QUICK TEST has finished a TEST RESULTS screen appears see Figure 61 If printing was enabled and the printer is connected the results will be printed 138 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 21 10 05 Figure 61 Quick Test Results 12 Press the PAGE DN F2 F key to view the test results from each transmitted pattern These screens are similar to the screen shown in Figure 60 except for the addition ofthe PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 F keys 13 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu screen Note The results are not stored Once the ESCAPE key is pressed the results of the Quick Test are lost Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 139 6 4 Bridge Tap Detect The bridge tap detect test sends 21 different patterns through alooped up span Each pattern is transmitted one at a time for 30 seconds For perfect performance there will be 0 errors 0 errored seconds and 30 available seconds If there is a loss of signal or other unava
40. This is a percentage of line 1 logical bit unavailable sec onds since the beginning of the test DGRM This is a count of line 1 logical bit degraded minutes that have occurred since the beginning of the test A bit degraded minute is 60 non severely errored seconds during which at least 92 errors occurred 124 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 7 Frequency Screen Figure 52 shows a LINE 1 FREQUENCY screen T1SINGL and T1DUAL modes use the same screen 21 10 05 ET 000 04 23 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8Z28 CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS LINE 1 FREQUENCY 0 ME ee ee eee E POS RCV Hz 1544000 REFCLCK L2 RX MAX Hz 1544000 CLKSLIP 0 MIN Hz 1544000 WANDER 0 FSLIP 0 WANDER 0 PAGE UP E STOP more Figure 52 Frequency Screen Defined as follows are the measurements in Figure 52 RCV Hz Current frequency measured during the last second in Hertz MAX Hz Maximum frequency measured in Hertz since the be ginning of the test MIN Hz Minimum received frequency in Hertz since the begin ning of the test FSLIP This is a count of frame slips that have occurred since the beginning of the test A frame slip occurs each time the phase of the line under test has deviated from the phase of the reference clock by 193 bits This value represents the total number of frame slips 1 frame slip 21993 bit slips REFCLCK This is the reference clock When no reference sign
41. Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L1 RX TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB or as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select SEND TEST PATTERN and choose 1 8 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note 1 8 is the normal pattern to use for ISDN applications QRS may bring down the switch 4 Connect the SunSet T10 s LINE 1 and 2 Rx jacks to the DSX Monitor jacks as shown in Figure 196 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs This test maybe performed anywhere access to the T1 circuit is provided i e central office customer premises or span SelectOTHERMEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six consecutive ones together with two zeroes should be displayed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 0r11110011 If this is not seen then the D channel is not set up to handle ISDN messages 380 SunSet T10 7 Rev B Customer Premises Te PORT MULTI PORT NE Figure 196 ISDN Monitoring Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt ISDN PRIMARY RATE CONFIGURATION and select TE as the EMULATE TYPE andthen choose Q 931 STD according to the circuit Escape out to ISDN PRIMARY RATE 7 Select OTHER PARAMETERS check these settings and
42. both Rx jacks have signals plugged in XMT CLOCK defaults to the received signal from the line selected in TX INSERT in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen SMPX This is the simplex DC current flowing from L1 Rx tip and ring through the SunSet T10 to L2 Tx tip and ring Usage Use this measurement to verify proper simplex cur rent flowing on a T1 span The result should generally be 60 mA WARNING Unplug the SunSet T10 immediately if the current measurement exceeds 150 mA as this may damage the SunSet T10 s simplex current measuring circuit Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 117 5 1 4 Frame Screen The FRAME screen reports all related framing measurements of the tested line These measurements are reported regardless ofthe type of framing on the line An unframed signal will not have measurements reported in this screen Usage The FRAME screen is particularly useful for D4 sig nals where CRC 6 errors are not available Figure 49 shows the LINE 1 FRAME screen 21 10 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM RCV QRSS XMT ORSS LINE 1 FRAME FSLIP 8e 06 UFB Figure 49 Line 1 Frame Screen FBE This is a count of framing bit errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test Usage This is used for in service testing on SF D4 circuits where the customer is transmitting an unknown data stream The advantage of this measurement is that the framing stays intact
43. compared to the original message LPBKQRY Loopback Query Lpp Level peak to peak The peak to peak level of negative and positive pulses received LVL Level mbps megabits per second MON Monitor mW milliwatt 408 SunSet T10 8 Rev B NI Network Interface NOTE Network Office Terminating Equipment NV RAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory OOF Out Of Frame OOFS Out of Frame Second is a count of out of frame seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test PAT Pattern PLPBK Payload Loopback ppm parts per million PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRN SCRN Print Screen PRNT Print PRNTR Printer PWRLPQRY Power Loop Query PWCUTTH Power Cut Through QRS Quasi Random Signal is a signal is formed from a 20 stage shift register and is zero constrained for a maximum of 14 consecutive zeroes R Receive REF Reference RT Remaining Time Rx Receive SABME Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended SAPI Service Access Point Identifier SCRN Screen SES Severely Errored Second SF Super Frame SIG Signal Ch 5 Reference 409 SHLF Shelf SLC 96 Subscriber Loop Carrier 96 channel SMPX Simplex SPLT Split SW Switch SYNC Synchronized SYLS Synchronization Loss Second T Transmit T S Time Slot TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier TERM Terminated TOUT Time Out TOUTDIS Timeout Disable Tx Transmit UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment
44. is odd EVEN In even parity the total number of ones including the added parity bit is even NONE This is the default setting signifying no parity check STOP BIT Options 1 BIT F1 8 bit F2 nasynchronous transmission the stop bitis the last transmit ted character that permits the receiver to establish an idle condition before accepting another character BITS CHAR Options 7 BIT F1 8 BIT F2 This determines the number of bits per character CR LF INSRT Options CR F1 CR LF F2 Settings for printer carriage CR Selects carriage return CR LF Selects carriage return line feed which adds an extra line space after every line 280 SunSet T10 Rev B 10 1 3 Erase NV RAM ERASE NV non volatile RAM erases all the user stored in formation entered into the SunSet T10 Always perform this op eration after inserting a new software cartridge Perform this operation as a last resort if the SunSet T10 is not performing properly If this is the case initiate ERASE NV RAM only after attempting to correct the problem 1 Confirm the configuration for the application 2 Turn the SunSet T10 off wait 5 seconds and then turn the SunSet T10 back on 3 Perform a self test then repeat step 2 in this list WARNING Performing the NV RAM ERASE operation will erase all user stored information Use the following procedure to perform ERASE NV RAM 1 Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CO
45. may be easily observed Recorded in the background are the mea surements Pressing the RESUME F key will update the screen RESTART F2 Causes the SunSet T10 to restart the trace pro cess 204 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 21 10 05 SU ANALYSIS INE 2 150 1550 MSU ETRANSMISSION ide Bo ae BIB Figure 99 SU Analysis Statist Screen STATIST COUNT F4 STATIST displays FISU LSSU and MSU for both lines as well as the count of FIB and BIB retrans mission bits After pressing the STATIST F4 F key this F key toggles to COUNT pressing this F key returns to the original SU Analysis screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 205 6 9 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT Menus SW191 To enter the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menus select MAIN MENU OTHER MEASUREMENTS GSM VOICE TRAU BERT Refer to Figure 100 21 10 05 GSM VOICE TRAU B GSM MONITOR VOICE TRAU XMT 16k BERT Figure 100 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT Menu 206 SunSet T1O p Rev B 6 9 1 GSM Monitor The GSM Monitor screen allows you to View 24 time slots and 96 sub channels for lines 1 and or 2 view the activity on each subchannel dropthe 16 kbps GSM channel at a 16 kbps voice rate to the speaker Indicates Speech Frame Uplink Direction on T S 01 Subchannel 1 21 10 05 GSM LINE Press to Display Traffic on Line 1 Figure 101 GSM Monitor Screen Displayed within this screen are all
46. mit signal source INTERN When selected the SunSet T1O is the master timing source on the circuit RECEIVE When selected the SunSet T10 is the slave to the device to which it is sending signals On a synchronous circuit one end should be the master timing source and the other end should be the slave 70 SunSet T10 p Rev B Notes For X21 DTE is automatically configured for Receive and DCE for Intern therefore the reference clock for X 21 cannot be changed The REF CLOCK selection applies only to synchronous transmis sion modes If Type is RS232 mode must be either DCE SYN or DTE SYN in order to change the REF CLOCK The next three items apply only to asynchronous datacom transmission RS232 DTE ASY or RS232 DCE ASY BIT CHAR Options 6 F1 7 F2 8 F3 This selects how many bits used for each character of infor mation Both DTE and DCE should have the same number of bits per character STOP BITS Options 1 F1 2 F2 This selects how many stop bits used for each character of information PARITY Options EVEN F1 ODD F2 NONE F3 This selects the parity bits used for each character of infor mation Parity is a method of checking the accuracy of transmit ted or stored data A bit is added to the data as an accuracy check The receiving element checks the parity bit and indicates an error if the total number of ones does not add up to the correct total EVEN The total number of ones includi
47. the h at the right of this field Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 191 DEST TRXID Options OFF F1 ON F2 This field contains the Transaction ID assigned by the re sponder It consists of four octets To capture a specific Destination Transaction ID press the ON F2 F key then press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the numbers for all eight digits using the keypad Enter the Destination ID in hexadecimal form indicated by the h at the right of this field Note There is an AND OR option for the two filtering fields To access this option 1 2 3 Select the first digit of the DEST TRXID Move the cursor one spot to the left The AND F1 and the OR F2 F keys will appear The AND F1 F key allows the SunSet T10 to capture only those messages containing both Transaction IDs The OR F2 F key allows the SunSet T10 to capture any message with one of the Transaction IDs 192 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 1 4 Layer 3 Filtering Fields for SNM SLS CODE Options NONE F1 0 to F Used to select a Signaling Link Selection Code HEAD CODE Options NONE F1 00 to FF e Used to select a Heading Code Refer to Table 11 Codes SNM Heading Codes HEX Codes CBA Changeback Acknowledgment Signal 61 CBD Changeback Declaration Signal 51 Connection Not Possible Signal 48 CNS Connection Not Succe
48. the screen shown in Figure 19 is displayed Note If 1 544 was selected the Fractional T1 screen is not needed Move the cursor off TEST RATE or press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Pressing the ENTER key on the keypad while the cursor is on TEST RATE will auto matically bring up the T10 Time Slot screen T10 TIME SLOT RECEIVE 06 08 Q qus 12 14 16 BE 21 TRANSMIT BE BEA 88 o6 07 4 1 2 212 CIS 15 16 WE E 21 EE E UN SEL CLR ALL Figure 19 SunSet T10 Time Slot Screen There are two options for selecting the desired combination of Fractional T1 channels 1 Pressthe AUTO F1 F key and the SunSet T1O will autornati cally configure for all active fractional T1 channels The SunSet T10 performs this AUTO configuration by searching for the 7F or FF idle codes as selected in OTHER FEATURES gt OTHER PARAMETERS on any unused channels 2 Tomanually selectthe exactchannels to test use the following procedure A Usethe arrow keys onthe keypad to movethe flashing cursor to the desired timeslot and press the SELECT F2 F key B As the RECEIVE timeslots are selected the SunSet T10 will fill in the corresponding TRANSMIT timeslots 54 SunSet T10 p Rev B C If the TRANSMIT timeslots need to be configured differ ently use the down arrow key on the keypad to access these numbers and set up the selections manually D Ifthe
49. then entering the digits 4 Apply the appropriate supervision once the number is entered A Select one ON HOOK F1 OFF HOOK F2 or WINK F3 B If a dial tone is expected press the VOL UP key on the keypad until it can be heard C Dialthe number by pressing the ENTER key on the keypad Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 217 6 10 3 Measurement Results 21 10 05 E 000 09 51 CODE B8ZS PATT 2047 ESULTS ER 8 8e 08 0 UAS 00 000 ESTART ON HOOK OFFHOOK WINK Figure 108 Measurement Results Screen The following items appear in Figure 108 ELAP TIME Elapsed time count starts counting after entering the Switched 56 Testing screen FRME Displays the transmitted framing type CODE Displays the transmitted coding type RATE This is the test rate In Figure 108 the RATE is 56k PATT Displays the transmitted test pattern RXA B This is the received signaling bits A B format for SF D4 and SLC96 A B C D format for ESF framing TXA B Displays the transmitted signaling bits To change them 1 Press the appropriate F key ON HOOK F1 OFFHOOK F2 or WINK F3 2 The actual bits sent for each condition can be setin the SW56 TEST CONFIGURATION screen BIT Count of bit errors during the elapsed time BER Rate of bit errors during elapsed time UAS Number of unavailable seconds during elapsed time UAS Percentage of unavailable seconds during elapsed time To restart the measuremen
50. 0110 Incoming calls barred 58 011 1010 Bearer capability not presently available es 011 1111 Service or option not available unspecified Class Service or Option Not Implemented Cause No No Class Class Value Cause Nene 65 100 0001 Bearer capability not implemented 66 100 0010 Channel type not implemented 70 100 Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available 79 100 1111 Service or option not implemented unspecified Class Invalid Message Cause No Class Value Cause Name 81 101 0001 Invalid call reference value 82 101 0010 Identified channel does not exist 83 101 0011 A suspended call exists but this call identity does not 84 101 Call identity in use 85 101 0101 No call suspended 86 101 0110 Call having the requested call identity has been cleared 88 101 1000 Incompatible destination 91 101 1011 Invalid transit network selection 95 101 1111 invalid message unspecified Class Protocol Error Cause sd No Class Value Cause Name 96 110 0000 Mandatory information element is missing 97 110 0001 Message type non existent not implemented 98 110 Message not compatible with call state or message type non existent or not implemen
51. 1 amp 2 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 2 Depending on the test application the following can be done Fortalk and listen A Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS VF MEA SUREMENTS selectthe receive listen and transmit talk channels they are usually the same channel number Choose TALK for the INSERT TYPE and L1 Rx for the LISTEN SIDE When connected to the circuit talking and listening can be done on the selected channel B Adjust the volume to the desired level by pressing the volume keys on the keypad Tosend and receive a tone A Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt VF MEASUREMENTS use the NEXT F1 or PREV F2 F keys to setup the receive andtransmitchannels Selectthe rest of the menu items as follows Tx 1 T S Any Rx 2 T S Any Rx 1 T S Any INSERT TYPE TONE TONE FREQ Hz pick desired tone frequency TONE LVL dBm pick desired tone level Tx 1 A B C D pick desired action LISTEN SIDE BOTH Once connected to the circuit a tone will be transmitted on the selected channel 3 conducta hitless dual drop and insert THRU mode test on a line that is in service make sure allthe connections are made in accordance with the numbering procedure in Figure 187 f performed properly this test will disrupt service for a few hundred milliseconds 4 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs 356 SunSet T1O p R
52. 10 1 1 1 Enter a New System Profile 1 2 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and press the STORE F2 F key Assign a LABEL to the profile by using the following procedure A Press the TOGGLE F3 F key to toggle to the character grid The letter A will start to flash B Select the desired character with the arrow keys on the keypad and press the SELECT F4 F key C Repeat step 2A as necessary until compete D Pressthe TOGGLE F3 F key to leave the character grid Observe the file number under which the SunSetT10 will store the new profile This number can be changed using the following procedure A Select the FILE No line B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator and then enter the desired number using the number keys C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator when finished D Press the ENTER key on the keypad to store the System Profile 276 SunSet T10 Rev B 10 1 1 2 Invoke a Stored System Profile 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and select the desired profile 2 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to invoke the profile 10 1 1 3 View an Existing Profile 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES and select the desired profile 2 Press the VIEW F1 F key 3 Pressthe PAGE DN F2 F key to view the screens contained in the profile
53. 2 Product Description 33 nization LED turns green Once the LED turns green if pattern synchronization is lost the LED turns red When pattern synchro nization returns the LED turns green again POWER When switched on the POWER LED lights green and indi cates an adequate battery charge LOW BATT The LOW BATT LED lights red when the SunSet T1O s power battery has dropped to a low level The SunSetT10 will shut itself down approximately 10 minutes after the LOW BATT LED lights The auto shut down helps protect the battery from a damaging total discharge Plugging in the AC Battery Charger will allow use of the SunSet T10 indefinitely However to use the SunSet T10 for an extended period it is advisable to plug the AC Battery Charger in before starting a test Ifthe charger is plugged in while a measurement is in process and the battery is low the SunSet T10 may reset itself In this case the current measurement results would be lost 1 and 2 LED Groups The following LEDs provide the same functions for both Lines 1 and 2 In SINGL mode Line 2 s LEDs are off These LEDs are off in Datacom mode PULSES This LED shows whether the SunSet T10 is receiving a T1 signal or not If a signal is detected this LED is green if aloss of signal is detected the LED is red 825 This LED shows that B8ZS line coding is present on the re ceived T1 signal During severe BPV error conditions on an AMI line the B8ZS li
54. 2 for all channels indicates YELS For an ESF signal the yellow alarm is 0000000011111111 in the facility data link The T1 path terminating device will send a yellow alarm on its outgoing signal in response to loss of frame on its incoming sig Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 119 nal Thus the yellow alarm indicates that the other side of the T1 line has failed somewhere before the end of the circuit Usage YELS is the only end to end service indicator that is available for in service testing for D4 SLC 965 and some ESF circuits Use YELS to sectionize a fault For example if the signal on side A reaches the SunSet T10 without error but the signal on side B shows a YELS then side A must be failing somewhere downstream from the SunSet T10 LOFS This is the count of loss of frame seconds since the be ginning of the test LOFS occur at the onset of 3 consecutive OOFSs They count up until the onset of 10 consecutive non SESs Usage Used often on extended tests where sporadic inter mittency problems are experienced ES This is the count of frame errored seconds since the begin ning of the test during which at least one framing bit error has occurred There is no count during a frame unavailable second ES This is the percentage of frame errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test SES This is a count of frame severely errored seconds since the beginning of the test during which at least four framing bit er
55. 202 15 Cause Values 245 16 SAPI TEI Valid Combinations 260 17 Channel Numbering 330 18 Channel Numbering SLC 96 331 19 D4 Channel Bank Signaling 360 20 DLCI Length amp Possible Addresses 418 21 SAPI TEI Valid Combinations 428 22 GR 303 CORE Cause Values 429 23 Typical IAM Information Fields 460 Teltrend Line Repeater ARM DL INB 82 LOOP DN 82 LOOP UP 82 LPBKQRY 82 492 SunSet T10 49 Rev Teltrend Line Repeater con t PWCUTTH 82 PWRQRY 82 87 RPTR NO 82 SPAN CTRL 81 STATUS 81 TIME 81 TOUTDIS 82 UNARMDL 82 UNIVLDN 82 Teltrend MSS ACTION 96 LINE 96 Teltrend Office Repeater ARMDL INB 79 CLR FT1 80 DUAL LB 80 LOOP DN 80 LOOP UP 79 LPBKQRY 79 POWR DN 79 RPTR NO 80 Span 78 SPAN CTRL 79 STATUS 78 TIME 78 TOUTDIS 79 UNARMDL 79 UNBLOCK 80 UNIVLDN 79 TEST RATE 1 544M 53 Nx56K 53 Nx64K 54 Tx SOURCE NORMAL 52 THRU 52 U UAS 111 115 V VF Measurements Dial SPRVIS Setup BREAK 228 BKWRD SPRVISN 228 DIAL PERIOD 226 DIAL PULSE 10pps 228 Index 493 VF Measurements Dial SPRVIS Setup con t E amp M 227 EQUIPMENT 227 FXO 227 FXS 227 G START 227 IDLE 228 INTERDIGIT PRD 228 L START 227 SILENT PERIOD 227 Supervision Trunk Type 227 TONE LEVEL dbm 227 VF Measurements DTMF MF DP Analysis AUTO SCAN 232 DIAL TYPE 232 Tx SPRVN 233 VF Measurements Place Receive Calls DP 229 DTMF 229 METHOD 229 MF 229 NUMBER 230 Rx ABCD 231 Rx CHN
56. 20Hzrngtrsmpx 11 fingontrpair sg lead at grd 1 a sg lead at 48 Vdc 11 o 48Vdctosg lead sg lead at 48 Vdc 00 1 Grd sens relay to sg D4 Channel Bank Signaling part 2 of 2 Ch 4 Applications 361 2 5 Testing SUPERTRUNK VF DS 0 1 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING SF D4 or ESF based on the design of the circuit CODING AMI TxSOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select SEND TEST PATTERN and select the 1 8 pattern Warning Failure to transmit this code back to the switch while measuring the T1 signal may result in the switch automatically removing the trunks from service and failing 9 the T1 circuit Press the ENTER key onthe keypadto return tothe MAIN MENU Connectthe SunSet TlOto the T1 circuit using the appropriate cord plugged into the Line 1 Tx and Rx jacks If using the SunSet Dual Bantam to Modular Plug cord the marked side of the Dual Bantam cord should be inserted into the Line 1 Rx jack Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the flashing ERRORS LED Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS Press the STOP F key and then press the RESTART F key to restart the test Verify that the PULSES LED and the framing LED SF or ESF are green The MEASUREMENT RESULTS summary
57. 24 time slots The top row contains time slots 1 6 the second row has 7 12 and so forth Each time slot contains 4 sub channels Use this screen to moni tor the traffic on each subchannel The TRAU frames are decoded as follows e O Operations amp Maintenance 5 Speech e Abis 64 kbps Abis Signaling e Idle speech idle Unknown Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 207 To monitor speech calls with the SunSet T10 1 Select an S frame 2 Press the D amp l F2 F key the speech will be played on the SunSet T1O s speaker The following F Keys are available in this screen LINE 1 LINE 2 F1 When in T1DUAL Mode use this F key to determine the monitor line D amp I F2 Drop and insert plays the 16 speech channel on the SunSet T10 s speaker It will play the selected S frame JUMP F3 Use this F key to move the cursor from channel to channel The arrow keys on the keypad will move the cursor at one subchannel intervals PAUSE RESUME F4 PAUSE freezes the live presentation of traffic RESUME updates the screen and continues the live presentation 208 SunSet T1O p Rev B 6 9 2 VOICE TRAU XMT Use the Voice TRAU XMT feature to transmita prerecorded speech message on any subchannel observe the received C bits 21 10 05 VOICE amp TRAU XMT LINE NUMBER LINE 1 TIME SLOT 07 SUB CHANNEL 1 IDLE CODE 11111111 C LINK DIRCTN ume EA TIMI
58. 24 will not synchronize it is probably an AMI B8ZS mis match Is the CSU or other element set to stuff 1s to prevent low density This is required for AMI circuits but will cause loss of synchronization on 3 in 24 errors on QRS and no errors on all 1s circuits Is there a framing mismatch Check that the framing is the same on both sides Does the problem reappear when dropping the loopback The problem is probably with the equipment on the far side of the loopback Is a switch or PBX connected Look for frequency mismatch Are DS1 signals used throughout Sometimes a DS1 is plugged into a DS1C by mistake or other signal format incompatibility maybe present Ch 5 Reference 447 Isthere a double loopback Sometimes two or more loopbacks ofthe sametype are present where only one is expected Inthis case a double or triple loop may occur on a loopback code and the loopdown code may have to be transmitted two or more times before all the loops come down Is there a termination problem All lines should have only 1000 termination Other terminations should be high imped ance If not sure try TERM BRIDGE and MONITOR Is the level too low The received level should be at least 15 dB dsx for most equipment Is there a frequency synchronization problem Refer to the frequency synchronization discussion in this chapter Is t
59. 4 After escaping from the CONFIGURATION screen the speci fied values become the configuration for the ISDN Analysis 154 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 7 2 Start Link Call Setup Use the CALL SETUP screen to place a voice data call receive a voice data call or see more information about the call Upon entering this screen the SunSet T10 will automati cally start the Layer 2 link The SunSet T10 displays USE LINE 1 ONLY FOR CALL SETUP This is followed by the screen shown in Figure 71 In the START LINK screen an indicator appears at the top of the screen This indicator shows status of the D channel and the Layer 2 link READY indicates that the D channel is operational and the SunSet T1O can send and receive calls NOT READY indicates the SunSet T1O is not yet able to place or receive calls Note Make sure that the settings in the ISDN PRIMARY RATE CONFIGURATION and OTHER PARAMETERS screens are cor rect before entering START LINK CALL SETUP 21 10 05 1 SABME 1 UA ED MESSAGE Layer 2 mess UA SAP 0 TEI 0 Figure 71 Call Setup Screen Figure 71 displays layer 2 ISDN messages This screen will show the SEND and RECEIVED messages on the line In Figure 71 the SunSet T10 has sent an SABME and a UA message and has received a UA message on Line 1 These are Layer 2 mes sages and are defined as SABME Setasynchronous balanced mode extended UA Unnumbered acknow
60. 4 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator EQUIPMENT Options FXO F1 FXS F2 For E M Trunk Type this will be N A If selecting either Ground Start or Loop Start trunk type then select the equipment type on this line Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 227 DIAL PULSE 10pps Dial pulse is set for 10 pps and may not be changed 96 BREAK Options 4096 5096 6096 Percent break is the ratio of the break on hook interval to the total pulse cycle interval Use the F keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to select the desired percentage INTERDIGIT PRD Options 100 900 hundred intervals only Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select the interdigit period BKWRD SPRVISN In T1 Dual Mode these bits are sent in the opposite direction of the inserted talk tone For example ifinserting atone on T S 06 and Tx INSERT is set to L1 Tx Line 1 then the SunSet TIO will transmit the backward supervision bits on T S 06 of Line 2 Use this procedure to set the backward supervision bits Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear Manually enter the backward supervision bits with the keypad numbers 1 and 0 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator IDLE SPRVISN These bits are placed on idle channels Use this procedure to set the idle supervision bits Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear Manuall
61. 5 minutes before it can operate 10 Charge the SunSet T10 for at least one hour before its first use orleave the AC Battery Charger plugged in while operating the SunSet T10 Notes Whenordering software upgrades specify the serial number of the SunSet T1O into which the new cartridge will be installed e Each software cartridge is mated to a single SunSet T10 If the SunSet T10 does not start properly verify that the serial number printed on the software cartridge matches the serial number on the back of the SunSet T10 Ch 1 Initial Set up 2 0 Check Out Procedure 1 Plugin the supplied AC charger WARNING Use only the SunSet charger for the SunSet T10 Use only the printer charger for the printer Improper use of any charger may damage the SunSet T1O printer or chargers and will invalidate the warranty 2 Using a single bantam cord plug one end of the cord into the LINE 1 RX jack and the other end into the LINE 1 TX jack The SunSet T10 will receive the signal transmitted on LINE 1 3 Press the POWER key on the keypad to turn the SunSet T10 on Observe the SELF TEST Verify that it displays a NO ERRORS message 4 Observe the software logo screen that appears immediately after the SELF TEST COMPLETE message Verify the serial and version numbers To observe this screen again turn off the SunSet T10 and then turn it back on 5 Press the LIGHT key on the keypad to turn on the backlight A Adjustthe s
62. 5 seconds The unavailable second counter will continue to increase for the first 9 seconds while the error counter stays the same Then at the tenth second the unavailable sec ond counter decreases by 10 and the error counter increases by the amount of errors that were injected While unavailable seconds are being counted other measure ments such as AS BPV BPVR BIT BER FEB CRC ES SES and EFS are frozen Once unavailable seconds are no longer counted these measurements resume It may take the SunSet T10 one to three seconds to gain frame synch pattern synch coding synch and to stop declaring any severe errors when the signal transitions from an unavailable state to an available state To find out the exact number of sec onds that contained a loss of signal condition refer to the LOSS measurement result 104 SunSet T10 7 Rev B The actual Measurement Results screen and the displayed values depend upon the TEST MODE selected in the TEST CON FIGURATION screen Figures 42 and 43 show sample Measure ment Results screens for TT SINGL and T1DUAL 21 10 05 RT CONTINU TxCd B8Z28 CNFG TERM XMT ORSS ET 000 37 50 FRM ESF RCV QRSS LINE 1 SUMMARY PVR 1 2e 09 ER 1 2e 09 RC 0 1380 99 859 0 2 dB 1544000 FBE ES v EFS C UAS 3 Gl more 21510205 ET 000 07 42 FRM ESF RCV ORSS RT CONTIN XMT ORSS SUMMA
63. 7 the system starts in the off hook condition and then goes on hook off hook 7 times Rotary phones use this technique The addressing information is transmitted through a T1 line by toggling the A and B bits from the off hook state to the on hook state at a rate of 10 times per second In switched 56 services this addressing is now common MF Multi Frequency is an addressing technique used for in teroffice signaling in a telephone network It uses a group of paired frequencies to form a single address tone In addition to support ing the digits O through 9 MF offers many other control codes for specialized network applications like billing pay phones etc DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency is the common address ing method on today s phones Like MF it uses pairs of tones to send a digit Unlike MF it uses two separate groups of tones DTMF supports 16 digits O through 9 and Athrough D Ch 5 Reference 443 7 1 12 AIS and Yellow Alarms Yellow Alarm Transmission DSO pa Alarm D L Yellow Conditioning X Loss of Frame or AIS AIS Transmission DS1 Channelized d Loss AIS of gt M1 M1 gt AIS Signal s Figure 227 AIS and Yellow Alarms In DS1 AIS and yellow alarms work just as they do in DS3 An intermediate network element such as an M13 multiplex 1x1 DCS or SONET mux transmits AIS downstream when it receives a loss of signal The DS1 AIS is an all 1s unframed signal A termin
64. CAS VIEW SUPERVISION allows viewing of the signaling bits for all 24 channels for both Lines 1 and 2 The status on all channels can be observed at the same time Shown on the first line in Figure 112 are time slots 1 through 4 shown on the second line are time slots 5 through 8 etc Note SF D4 and SLC 96 framed signals will show A B bit signal ing information ESF will show A B C D signaling bit information for every six frames the least significant bit is robbed and used to transmit signaling information Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 225 7 3 Dial Supervision Setup 21 10 05 DIAL SPRVIS SETUP PERIOD 100ms ERIOD 100ms dbm 5 N A SE 10pps 60 IGIT PRD 500 PRVISN de PRVISN 10 0 amp G START L START USE Figure 113 Dial Supervision Setup The DIAL SPRVIS setup screen provides additional param eters for VF procedures In this screen the on and off time for the DTMF MF and DP digits can be varied The SunSet T1O can be set up to send appropriate signaling bits for E amp M loop start and ground start trunks with FXO or FXS line cards 1 Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt DIAL SPRVIS SETUP Configure the following settings DIAL PERIOD Options 30 ms 999 ms Dial Period specifies the period in milliseconds for DTMF and MF dialing The default value is 100 ms Toselectany value between 30 an
65. CNTR BES 307 CSS 307 ES 307 LOFC 307 SES 307 UAS 307 RxLVL 1 BRIDGE 50 DSX MON 51 TERM 50 S Send Test Pattern USER 100 Send Receive DDS Control Codes Receiving Codes 150 Transmitting Codes 149 Sequential BERT Test CH 160 ET 160 PATT 160 RATE 160 TxB amp RxB 160 Sequential BERT Test Results BER 160 BIT 160 EFS 161 ES 161 SES 161 STATUS 161 UAS 161 SLC 96 digroup 350 Mode 350 Mode Il 350 Mode Ill 350 TR TSY 000008 349 smart jack 88 Speed Dialing 337 Index 487 SS7 ANSI SCCP Message Decode View L4deco 200 SS7 Component Decode Screen CORRELATN ID 203 OPERATION CODE 203 SS7 Configuration Menu HEX INPUT 182 Line 1 Rx T S 181 Line 2 Rx T S 181 SS7 VERSION 181 TRUNK RATE 181 SS7 Filtering fields for ISUP ADDR SGNL 187 CIC CODE 187 MESG TYPE 187 SS7 Filtering fields for SCCP ADDR SGNL 190 DEST TRXID 192 MESG TYPE 189 ORIG TRXID 191 SIG PT COD 191 SLS CODE 189 SUBSYS NO 190 TCAP FILTR 191 SS7 Layer 2 Filtering items BSN BIB 195 FISU LSSU 195 FSN FIB 195 SS7 Layer 3 Filtering fields for SNM HEAD CODE 193 SLS CODE 193 SS7 Layer 3 Filtering items for SNT HEAD CODE 194 SLS CODE 194 SS7 Layer 4 Decoded TCAP Message PACKAGE TYPE 201 SS7 Messages FISU 459 LSSU 458 MSU 457 SS7 MSU Monitor Setup filter ISUP 184 LINE 1 DPC 184 LINE 1 OPC 184 SCCP 184 SI FIELD 184 488 SunSet T10 49 Rev SS7 MSU Monitor Setup filter con
66. Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 57 Note If plugging the SunSet T1O in a DSX MON jack in the TERM mode the BPV LED will probably come on Use DSXMON mode instead BRIDGE The BRIDGE monitor is similar to the DSXMON moni tor However in BRIDGE the SunSet T10 taps into a live in service terminated DS1 signal with up to a 36 dB cable loss The SunSet T10 applies isolation resistors to protect the circuit from a hit Select BRIDGE before clipping onto the live circuit This will put the isolation resistors in place and ensure that the SunSet T10 does not place a hit on the circuit Notes Whenusing BRIDGE mode on a DSXMON jack there is a 40 dB resistive loss and the SunSet T10 will likely report loss of signal In some cases it may not be clear if the monitor jack used provides a bridged access or a 20 dB isolation monitor access In this case try BRIDGE first to see if this works and then try DSXMON if it does not When using BRIDGE mode for a 3V signal from an OUT jack the BPV light will probably come on Use the TERM mode instead DSX MON Use this access mode when making a monitor mea surement The provided signal is from the MON jack of a DSX DS1 plug in card CSU or NI The DSX has isolated the MON signal from the live signal with a high impedance circuit and the transmitter is sending the selected test pattern Notes TheDSXmonitorjack protects the live signal from any possible disruptions caused by the testing process
67. Evenifthere are devices that cause excessive delay valuable data can be obtained by looking at the difference in delay time between a loopback at a known location and a loopback at the unknown location 8 When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the MAIN MENU 9 Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL gt CSU amp CONTROL and select the MODE line 10 Press the LOOP DN F2 F key to release the loopback Verify that the LOOP DOWN SUCCEEDED message is displayed 11 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad three times to return to the MAIN MENU 12 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 335 1 13 Basic Dialing Procedure This outlines the simplest dialing procedure used Select MAIN MENU VF CHANNEL ACCESS PLACE RECEIVE CALLS and selectthe dialing METHOD line Choose MF DTMF or DP Before dialing make sure that OFFHOOK F2 has been selectedfortheTX ABCD line and that a dialtone can be heard The most recently dialed phone number will be shown To dial the previous number press the ENTER key on the keypad To delete the previous number press the DELETE F2 F key until the number is completely deleted To enter a new number A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator willappear B Enter the numbers 0 through 9 A B C D E and F on the keypad For MF method and cannotbe used For DTMF dialing use the E F key for and F F
68. F3 DDS 4 more F1 DDS 6 more F3 USER more F1 0101 more F2 Select the test pattern to send If sending a USER defined test pattern use the following procedure A m Atthe SEND PATT line press the USER more F1 F key B Select USER PATT C D Use the number keys on the keypad to define the transmit Press the SHIFT key on the keypad ted 8 bit test pattern Press the SHIFT key on the keypad when the pattern is complete The pattern specified in the USER PATT line is active only if USER appears on the SEND PATT line above it 2 When finished press the ESCAPE key to return to the DDS MEASUREMENTS menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 145 6 6 2 Loop Back Access 1 From the DDS MEASUREMENTS menu select LOOPBACK ACCESS Configure the LOOPBACK ACCESS screen as required 21 10 05 P BACK ACCI LOOP UP PE BEN EV NO N A si Su 00000000 LATCH NON LAT Figure 65 DDS Loop Back Access Screen MODE Options LOOP UP F1 LOOP DN F2 Select this item last Pressing one of the F Keys here will automatically begin its respective procedure After setting all of the other items press the LOOP UP F1 F key to loop up or the LOOP DN F2 F key to loop down TYPE Options LATCH F1 NON LAT F2 NON LAT This refers to the traditional loopback testing for the CSU DSU or OCU This loopback type requires the continuous transmission of loopback control bytes in the te
69. FBE Framing Bit Error FBER Framing Bit Error Rate FDL Facility Data Link FELP Far End Loop FREQ Frequency FRM Frame In data transmission the sequence of contigu ous bits bracketed by and including beginning and ending flag sequences FSLIP Frame Slip occurs each time the phase of the line under test has deviated from the phase of reference by 193 bits FT1 Fractional is a service aimed at customers who do not need all 24 channels of a full T1 line Ch 5 Reference 407 HEX Hexadecimal is a 16 digit number system consisting of the digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F This base 16 number system often used in computers HOLDSCRN Hold Screen Hz Hertz is a unit of frequency one cycle per second INTERN Internal INV Inverted ISDN Integrated Services Digital Networkis a CCITT standard for a network that accommodates a variety of mixed digital transmission services kFt kilo 1000 Feet LBO Line Build Out LDNS Low Density Seconds is a count of the number of seconds where the n n 1 rule is broken LLPBK Line Loopback LOFS Loss of Frame Second occurs at the onset of three consecutive OOFS Out Of Frame Seconds LOG Logical LOS Loss of Signal LOSS Loss of Signal Second Loopback is a diagnostic procedure used for transmis sion devices Atest message istransmitted to the device being tested and then sent back to the originator where it is
70. GMNT DELAY 0 x500us RCV CBITS UPLINK DNLINK Figure 102 VOICE TRAU XMT Screen Upon entering the screen shown in Figure 102 the SunSet T10 begins transmitting a 16k voice message on the selected time slot and subchannel Provided in this screen are these set tings LINE NUMBER Options LINE 1 F1 LINE 2 F2 Select either Line 1 or 2 to transmit a voice message Note Line 1 is fixed if in T1SINGL test mode TIME SLOT Options 1 24 Determines the time slot used for the transmitted message INC 1 F2 increments the time slot number by one DEC 1 F3 decrements the time slot number by one Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 209 SUB CHANNEL Options 1 4 Determines the 16k subchannel used for the transmit message INC 1 F2 F key increments the subchannel number by one DEC 1 F3 F key decrements the subchannel number by one IDLE CODE Options 7F HEX F2 FF HEX F3 Select the SunSet T1O s idle code LINK DIRCTN Options UPLINK F2 DOWNLINK F3 Determine the link direction of the transmitted message Fig ure 103 illustrates the directions Uplink Refers to the uplink direction from the customer up to the network or BTS to BSC Downlink Refers to the downlink direction from the network down to the customer or BSC to BTS BTS uplink BTS Downlin Figure 103 Uplink Downlink Directions TIME ALGMNT Options Delay from 1 to 39 x 500 ms Advance 1 x 250 ms Used to adjust t
71. INTERFACE checkthatthe transmit leads RTS and DTR are turned on If not select the lead and pressthe ON F1 F key Select RL and pressthe ON F1 F key 14 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 15 Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS and verify that the RxHz line is equivalent to the test rate If RxHz is low then the clock is not being received properly from the far end modem 368 SunSet T1O p Rev B 16 Check the RCV and XMT patterns they should be the same The PAT SYNC LED should be green Ifthe items in step 15 are correct A Perform a BERT test by pressing the ERR INJ key on the keypad B Verify thatthe errors injected come back The BIT ERROR LED should be red and a bit error should be recorded in MEASUREMENT RESULTS C If this is successful then the phone line and the far end modem are operating properly Ifthe BERT testis not successful this indicates a problem with either the phone line or the far end modem A Totestthefarend modem perform a local loopback on that end following steps 6 11 of this procedure If there are no problems with this local loopback then the problem is with the phone line e If there are problems the modem is at fault Ch 4 Applications 369 3 3 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex In the T1 MUX Mode the SunSet T10 emulates a 64 kbps to 1 544 Mbps multiplexer Use this procedure to multiplex one or more 64 kbps signals onto a 1 544 Mbps signal Thi
72. MUX C Ifa faulty MUX is suspected replace it with the SunSet T10 by following the previous steps Ifthe circuit problems clear up with the SunSet T10 this verifies that the problems exist with the MUX 372 SunSet T10 p Rev 3 4 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplexer The SunSet T1O has the capability to emulate an Add Drop Multiplex Use this procedure to drop and insert 64 kbps timeslots between a datacom device and T1 lines 1 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1 DUAL TX INST L1 TX Rx DROP L2 RX RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM Tx SOURCE THRU FRAMING as provisioned Tx CODING as provisioned XMTCLK L1 RX TEST RATE 1 554M LBO 1 amp 2 as provisioned When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T1O to the two TEs terminal equipment in the order shown in Figure 192 A Plug into the OUT jack of TE 1 connect the same cord to LINE 1 Rx on the SunSet T1O B Plug a second bantam cord to the OUT jack on TE 2 connect this cord to LINE 2 Rx on the SunSet T10 C Plug the third bantam cord to LINE 1 Tx of the SunSet T1O and then plug a fourth cord into LINE 2 Tx Do not connect either of these cords to the TE yet D Verify that the SunSet T10 s LEDs for LINE 1 and LINE 2 show proper framing coding and no errors In other words there should be green LEDs for CODING FRAMING and no red LEDs E Press the GRAPHIC key
73. Menu Descriptions 167 6 7 2 6 Receiving a Call The READY indicator must be displayed to receive a call in the Start Link Call Setup screen When there is an incoming voice or data call the SunSet T10 will ring and the screen shown in Figure 79 will appear 21 10 05 CALL SETUP RECEIVE A CALL ED MESSAGE ESSAGE 549 VOICE CHANNEL 1 4083631331 TYPE 2 NPI 1 4083638000 TYPE 4 NPI 1 ACC TERM ACC LOOP Figure 79 Receiving a Call Screen To accept a call press the ACC TERM F2 F key To reject it press the REJECT F1 F key If a second call should come in while still connected to the first call the SunSet T10 will ring This call can be accepted or rejected For accepting there are two options available ACC TERM F2 Press ACC TERM to accept the call in the ter minated mode For voice calls this means that talking and listen ing on the other side of the call is possible For data calls a pattern is transmitted as selected in the ISDN CONFIGURATION screen Errors may be inserted to the other side using the ERR INJ key on the keypad ACC LOOP F3 In this mode only the incoming voice is heard For data calls one can only receive data inserting errors is not possible 168 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 7 3 Backup D Channel Test 21 10 05 BACKUP D CHNL TEST 1 SABME 2 SABME EIVED MESSAGE
74. NUMBER line and press the USER F1 F key Select a blank space and press the CREATE F1 F key 4 Thecursor should now be atthe LABEL editing position ready to accept the entry 5 Press the TOGGLE F3 F key The letter A on the character grid starts blinking 6 Use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the T character Press SELECT F4 F key The character T is now the first character of the label Select the characters E S and T by using the same procedure 7 After selecting the last T press the TOGGLE F3 F key The character grid will stop blinking 8 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator and use the keypad and press 0 then 1 9 Thelabelis now completed and TEST01 should appear nextto the LABEL line 10 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 11 Select the NUMBER line to enter the telephone number 12 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 13 Enter the phone number Press the keys on the keypad to enter this number 12345ABCD 0 14 When done press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 15 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to accept the new USER DIAL NUMBER it will be displayed on the list of USER DIAL NUMBERS 16 To edit the number select it and press the EDIT F2 F key 17 The cursor is now positioned on the first character of the LABEL Press the INSERT F1 F key to start inserting more digits at th
75. PRINT PERIOD Options TIMED F1 LAST F2 TIMED In this mode test results are printed and saved to the buffer every 1 to 99 minutes If TIMED is selected use the follow ing procedure to enter a period 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Using the keypad enter in the number between 1 and 99 minutes 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator LAST In this mode the test results are printed at the end of a timed test or a continuous test that has ended due to a RESTART PRINT EVENT Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 ENABLE Select this mode to print out an error message every second that one or more errors occur Printed with every mes sage is the date and time DISABLE Disables the event error message printing function OUT OF FRAME Options 2 4 F1 2 5 F2 Determines the condition for declaring an OOF out of frame error Use this so that all test and monitoring equipment reports an OOF under the same conditions OOF errors are recorded in the MEASUREMENT RESULTS frame screen 2 4 Counts an OOF every time there are two framing bits in error out of 4 framing bits 2 5 Counts an OOF when there are 2 framing bit errors out of every 5 framing bits 284 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 10 3 Error Injection 13 28 00 ERROR INJECTION TYPE MODE BURST COUNT 1 BPV LOGIC LOG BPV FRAME Figure 151 Er
76. Rx F1 L2 Rx F2 Rx DROP determines the line on which the SunSet T10 will receive the test signal This configures which receiver is used for measuring bit error rate 1 544Mbps frequency voice channel fre quency voice channel level or voice channel Rx A B C D For example to perform a bit error rate test on the received signal from Line 1 then select Rx DROP L1 Rx The PAT SYNC and BIT ERROR LED refer to the Rx DROP line RxLVL 1 amp 2 Options TERM F1 BRIDGE F2 DSXMON F3 Warning If uncertain as to which option to choose select BRIDGE This will protect the 1 544Mbps signal RxLVL 1 and RXLVL 2 configure the two 1 544M receivers These settings let the SunSet T10 electrically decode a 1 544 Mbps signal under a wide range of resistive or cable losses They also determine which electrical load the SunSet T10 will place on the circuit There is no effect on the transmitter In a 1 544 Mbps circuit there must be a receiver that applies the low impedance 100 termination There should never be two or more receivers applying a low impedance termination TERM Use TERM when the SunSet T10 will send and receive a T1 signal The circuit will be disrupted for testing The received signal is terminated by the SunSet T10 and is not obtained through a MONITOR jack The received signal can have up to 36 dB of cable transmission loss This is a different kind of loss than the 20 dB of resistive loss provided by a DSX MON jack
77. SEL F3 to de select a particular timeslot or CLR ALL F4 to erase allthe selectedtimeslots and start with a clear screen For RS232 you may select only one receive and transmit timeslot Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit according to Figure 191 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green If not press the RESYNC key on the keypad Nx64 DCE 1 544 Terminal Figure 191 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex In Figure 191 the DTE supplies the transmitted 64 kbps signal to the SunSet T10 through the multiport The SunSet T10 multiplexes this 64 kbps signal onto a 1 544 Mbps T1 signal which is then transmitted through the T1 L1 Tx jack In Figure 191 the SunSet T10 is connected to an IN OUT Ch 4 Applications 371 monitor jack The 1 544M signal is passed from the IN to the OUT jack and back to the L1 Rx jack on the SunSet T1O This setup allows checking the multiplexed signal Step 7 outlines the proce dure for checking the multiplexed 1 544M signal 7 Injectan error from the DTE A Check that the BERT line in the TEST CONFIGURATION screenissetto T1DRP This meansthatthe LEDs will show information about the signal received on the T1 L1 Rx port B Upon injecting the error the ERRORS LED should light red If it does the multiplexing ability of the SunSet T10 has been verified With this ability the SunSet T10 can replace a
78. SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the desired value from the keypad Select any value from 60 to 3 dBm 2 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to release the SHIFT lock Press MINUS F1 to select negative values 4 Tosend the new tone level press ENTER key on the keypad Alternatively move the cursor off the TONE LVEL dBm line 5 There are two F key choices provided 0 dBm F1 and 13 dBm F3 1 A B C D Options ON HOOK F1 OFF HOOK F2 FLASH WINK F3 SEND F4 If desired the signaling bits may be changed that are trans mitted on the selected channel may be changed Ifin T1SINGL mode these bits are sent on line 1 e fin T1 DUAL Mode they are sent on the line that has been selected for Tx INSERT inthe TEST CONFIGURATION screen For SF D4 and SLC96 framing these will be A B bits For ESF framing these will be A B C D bits The exact bits sent for each condition will depend upon the supervision trunk chosen in Dial SPRVIS SETUP To manually change these bits use the following procedure Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 223 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the 1 and 0 number keys to enter the bits 2 Press the SHIFT key to release the SHIFT lock 3 Press the SEND F4 F key to send the A B C D bits LISTEN SIDE Options L1 Rx F1 L2 Rx F2 BOTH F3 This setting determines the listen line s Listening on Line 1 Line 2 or on both lines is possible Note For T1SINGL Mode the Listen Side
79. This time the data displayed refers to LINE 1 Rx B Verify that the pattern transmitted by TE 1 is shown on all available timeslots in this screen According to Figure 192 374 SunSet T1O p Rev the ALL ZEROES pattern should be on all timeslots This confirms that the SunSet T10 is receiving the LINE 1 signal properly Now the SunSet T10 is ready to connect to the Datacom device C Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the MAIN MENU 7 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1 MUX T1 section Tx INST L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx FRAMING as specified by the span design CODING as specified by the span design RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLK L1 RX Note in T1 MUX the SunSet T10 is forced to received timing LBO 182 as specified by the span design DATACOM section TYPE Selectthe datacominterface that will provide a 64 kbps frame TxSRC T1DRP MODE DCE note in T1 MUX the SunSetT10is forced to DCE MUX section BERT The same as DATACOM TYPE i e RS232 T1INS The Datacom TYPE selected above i e RS232 T1T S Select the 64 kbps time slot s to be multiplexed from the datacom to the T1 side see step 8 8 Select the 64 kbps timeslot s to be multiplexed A Press the Nx64K F1 F key to enter the T10 TIME SLOT screen B Use the arrow keys to move the flashing cursor to the desired receive timeslot and press the SELECT F2 F key As you select your
80. Tx CODING AMI or as provisioned TX SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB or as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 353 2 Connectthe SunSet T10tothe circuit as required for testing Refer to Figures 184 185 and 186 More than one SunSet T10 may be necessary because of the need to transmit and receive mainte nance commands on the A digroup while performing bit error testing on another digroup Possible tests to perform include Switching digroup A through D to protection looping back digroup A through D and P to verify transmission performance inducing the system to switch to protection by creating a loss of signal loss of frame or high bit error rate verifying transmission of proper alarm indication when a shelf or power source has gone down verifying the central office terminal transmits an AIS blue alarm in the downstream direction when signal has been lost in the upstream direction e verifying that A digroup can do a half switch when half of the A digroup and half of the protection digroup is not working verifying fast and transparent protection switching so that users do not notice a problem verifying proper assignment of channels during mode Il operation 3 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Central Office Controlled Environ
81. UAS Unavailable Second UI Unit Interval UNIVLDN Universal Loopdown uS microsecond VF Voice Frequency YEL Yellow YELS Yellow Alarm Second 410 SunSet T10 8 Rev B 2 0 Standard Test Patterns This section defines the various test patterns transmitted and recognized by the SunSet T10 The long patterns are written in hexadecimal form also known as HEX A pattern is written in HEX if itis written with pairs of numbers separated by commas HEX is a 16 digit number system consisting of the digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F The HEX pattern 15 FA translates to the binary pattern 0001 0101 1111 1010 where the left most bit is transmitted first QRSS QRSS is the industry standard Quasi Random Signal This signal is formed from a 20 stage shift register and is zero con strained for a maximum of 14 consecutive zeroes When trans mitted in a framed signal up to 15 consecutive zeroes will occur in accordance with AMI minimum density requirements 55DLY The Daly 55 Octet pattern is a special stress pattern that obeys industry standards for pulse density and maximum con Secutive zeroes in both AMI and B8ZS coded circuits Framing bits occur at octet boundaries Note that the Daly 55 octet pattern replaced the original 55 octet pattern refer to T1 6 The Daly 55 octet pattern is as follows 80 80 80 80 80 80 01 80 80 80 80 80 80 CO 80 80 80 80 EO 80 80 80 80 AA AA
82. UAS This is a percentage of bit unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test DGRM This is a count of the bit degraded minutes that have occurred since the beginning of the test Abit degraded minute is 60 non severely errored seconds with at least 92 errors DGRM This is a percentage of bit degraded minutes that have occurred since the beginning of the test 128 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 3 T1 MUX Mode Measurement Results The measurement results presented for T1 MUX mode de pend upon the BERT side selected in the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen The first nine screens are the same for both sides They are a Line 1 amp Line 2 Summary Line 1 Line Line 2 Line Line 1 Signal Line 2 Signal Line 1 Frame Line 2 Frame Line 1 ESF Line 2 ESF If MUX BERT T1DRP was selected and therefore looking at the signal dropped from the T1 side Line Frequency and Line Logical screens appear at pages ten and eleven If Line Rx DROP was selected these screens will present information for Line 1 Line 2 is shown if Rx DROP L2 Rx If MUX BERT was selected Datacom type i e X 21 RS232 a Datacom Bit Error screen will appear at page ten in place of Line Frequency and Logical If you have already reviewed the measurement results sec tions for TT SINGL DUAL and Datacom modes the screen titles above should be familiar If not refer to section 5 0 Measurement Results Menu for sample screens and de
83. a specific framing FRAMING Options UNFRAME F1 SF D4 F2 ESF F3 SLC 96 F4 Chose a specific framing type when the circuit uses a specific type of framing there is no T1 signal available when plugging the SunSet T1O into the circuit using the SunSet T10 with another test set that is configured for auto framing the SunSet T10 will control the framing on the T1 line the SunSet T10 will provide a signal to itself without first passing through network equipment which will force a specific framing Refer to Chapter 5 Reference for specific details on each framing type Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 51 UNFRAME Select for no framing SF D4 This is the simplest framing consisting of 12 grouped frames ESF Extended Super Frame consists of 24 grouped frames SLC 969 Introduced by AT amp T and later standardized by Bellcore Note If the framing on the received signal does not match the framing specified in the FRAMING menu the SunSet T10 will show a frame loss If the received framing changes during the middle of a test the SunSet T10 will also show frame loss even in the AUTO mode Tx CODING Options AMI F1 B8ZS F2 AMI Alternate Mark Inversion This requires the terminal trans mitting data to have at least a 12 5 average 1 s density and a maximum of 15 consecutive zeroes B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution This uses a bipolar violation substitution which guarantees the 12 596 average with a maxi
84. amp DATE MSS SWITCH CONTROL MSS RAMP ACCESS Figure 35 Westell NIU PM amp MSS Menu The Westell Performance Monitoring NIU is a smart jack which constantly measures the performance of the received signals from both network and customer equipment Use the SunSet T10 to poll the smart jack to provide information when troubleshooting the network The Westell Maintenance Switch is a 1xN protection device that is used for manually restoring service to HICAP lines upon failure With the Maintenance Switch Ramp Access func tion use the SunSet T10 to non intrusively poll the performance monitoring information from the NIU through the protection line All of these functions require the NIU to be looped back be fore beginning The SunSet T10 takes care of this function auto matically upon entering this menu Further the SunSet T10 will automatically switch itself into the required ESF mode The following procedure is for using the Westell Performance Monitoring NIU Maintenance Switch and Ramp features 1 Plug into the DS1 line to be tested This will be the customer s circuit if just using the PM NIU feature or it will be the maintenance spare if using the RAMP or Maintenance Switch Make sure the SunSet T10 is configured for SINGLE TERM and ESF 2 Select MAIN MENU gt LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL MENU gt WESTELL NIU PM amp MSS and refer to Figure 35 Note The SunSet T10 will pro
85. bit will be the first discarded during times of congestion D C DL Core Control This bit is used in 3 4 octet length head ers to specify whether the last octet contains control bits or DLCI bits D C 0 DLCI D C 1 control bits 3 1 1 DLCIs The largest portion of the header is the DLCI The DLCI can be 10 bits 2 octets 16 bits 3 octets or 23 bits 4 octets long The 10 bit DLCI is most commonly used The DLCI identifies the connection in a frame relay link DLCI identifies both the sender and destination For LAN WAN internetworking the DLCI identi fies the port to which the destination LAN is attached Refer to Figure 211 pu inm d gt gm T DLCI 1 5 12 DLCI 25 89 DLCI 4 FRAD FR FR Switch FEN X X DLCI 9 25 1002 FR F Switch Switch BV XK N Figure 211 DLCI Values DLCls typically have local significance between the customer and the network For example Routers B and C cannot use the same DLCI values However Router C and the FRAD may use the same DLCI values since they are connected to a different frame relay switch This allows more connections on the network otherwise only 1023 connections could be established with the 10 bit DLCIs Table 20 shows the possible DLCI length and corre sponding possible addresses Ch 5 Reference 417 BitLength Address Range Length Address Range DLCI Header DL
86. circuit passes through a synchronous network element such as a switch PBX or a digital cross connect system DCS the T1 circuit passes through more than one carrier Use this procedure to identify frequency synchronization problems 1 Obtain areference frequency source This can bethe other side ofthe customer s circuit ora 1 544 Mbps reference signal that is traceable to a stratum 1 level clock This test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL TxINSERT L1 Tx RxDROP L1 Rx RXLVL 1 TERM if a source with up to 36 dB loss RXLVL 2 TERM if a source with up to 36 dB loss or DSXMON if a DSXMON signal is used Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING As specified by the circuit Tx CODING As specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L2 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the reference T1 signal to the LINE 2 jack onthe side of the SunSet T10 Refer to Figure 175 Plug the LINE 1 jack side of SunSet T10 into the DSX MON jack or other MON jack of the circuit Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking history LEDs 322 SunSet T1O p Rev MULTI PORT SERIAL PORT T1 Reference Frequency Source 3V 7 to 36dB cable loss or DSXMON TERMINAL TERMINAL Figure 175 Frequency Synch
87. company at customer premises for a variety of maintenance reasons the NIUs Network Interface Units provide a loopback at the telephone company s control This loop back allows the telephone company to verify that the circuit works all the way to the point of interface with the customer s network The NIUs may also be configured to loopback signal send AIS or send idle signal when the customer signal is unplugged New kinds of NIUs even provide performance monitoring information and maintenance switching capability T1 can be transmitted over twisted pair fiber or digital radio Twisted pair normal telephone wire is the most widely spread form of transmission and has several types of associated net work elements Regenerative repeaters for example AT amp T s 239 series are located up to 6000 feet apart on a twisted pair span Ch 5 Reference 435 The repeaters are in apparatus cases which are located within 3000 feet of the central office and the customer premises This avoids cross talk problems when the signal is on building wiring Newer line repeaters offer loopback capability for faster span sectionalization Central office repeaters provide the 60 mA span current used for powering the regenerative repeaters on the span Housed in ORBs Office Repeater Bays these newer central of fice repeaters automatically adjust the supplied voltage to adapt to varying numbers of repeaters plugged into the span They also may have fractiona
88. containing the particular SAPI TEI values associated with the selection Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 261 8 2 2 EOC Statistics Entering the EOC STATISTICS screen the SunSet T1O be gins capturing and recording eoc message information The fol lowing results apply to all valid eoc messages if Filter None or to eoc messages containing filtered SAPI TEI On exiting all counts are reset to zero Two screens comprise EOC STATISTICS Refer to Figure 137 for the first screen 21 10 05 EOC STATISTICS ET 000 32 12 LINE TOTAL F R FR FR FR D D FRAMES FRAMES FRAMES E FRAMES FRAMES FRAMES E UP PAGE DN Figure 137 EOC Statistics Page 1 The following information appears in the first EOC STATIS TICS screen ET Elapsed time begins upon entering the EOC Statistics screen ET will reset to zero after escaping TOTAL FR A continuous count of the number of eoc messages ERRORED FR Count of the number of eoc messages containing FCS frame check sequence errors DISCARD FR A count of the number of eoc messages that have been discarded because framesare either above or below the specified length the total bit count is not divisible by 8 the message contains more than 6 consecutive ones 262 SunSet T10 Rev B The rest of the screen provides a running count of all valid EOC Layer 2 message types which includes
89. either of the two settings below MODE first LOOP UP Use to loop up the circuit before testing LOOP DN Use to restore the circuit to normal once testing is complete TYPE Options IN BAND F1 ESF DL F2 This determines the type of sent loopback code Sent in the ESF framing data link are ESF DL codes therefore ESF framing must be used to select ESF DL IN BAND is the most common type deployed in networks IN BAND can be transmitted with any type of framing However some loopback devices will not respond to IN BAND loopback codes when transmitted with ESF framing When in doubt select IN BAND when using SF framing and ESF DL when using ESF framing Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 73 CODE This determines which loopback code will be sent This code needs to be same as that of the equipment being looped back Select a user code by pressing the USER F4 F key Options The available options depend upon the type of loopback selected in TYPE see Figure 30 In Band Codes CSU F1 NI F2 100000 F3 USER F4 NI This code is used for an industry standard network interface unit smart jack if it is set to respond to in band loopback codes This loopback regenerates only the signal and should pass both BPVs and bit errors The telephone company generally installs this unit at the customer premises CSU Use this code for looping the customer owned CSU 100000 Use this code with a type of NIU smart jack that is installed in
90. enabled a beep will sound whenever the SunSet T1O receives an error i e BPV FBE on the line 288 SunSet T10 Rev B REMOTE CONTROL SW180 Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 Refer to chapter 2 section 5 for more details on this option PATTERN LOCK Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e Pattern Lock determines how the SunSet T10 achieves pattern synchronization ENABLE When enabled the SunSet T10 searches for and can only synchronize on its transmit pattern Select the transmitted pattern in the SEND TEST PATTERN screen When the AUTO key on the keypad is pressed the SunSet T10 searches through all of the patterns and changes its transmit pattern to match the received pattern DISABLED When disabled the SunSet T1O attempts to synchro nize on any known test pattern regardless of the SunSet T1O s transmit pattern When the AUTO key on the keypad is pressed the SunSet T10 searches through all known patterns for synchro nization and does not change its transmit pattern Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 289 CODE MISMATCH MSG Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e Provides a warning message when the SunSet T10 s line coding is configured differently from the coding received 21 10 05 LINE 1 CODING MISMATCH TX CODING B8ZS RX CODING AMI press ENTER to change Tx code press ESCAPE to ignore Figure 153 Coding Mismatch Message ENABLE This enables the visual warning whenever a cod
91. finished configuring the test press the ENTER key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Plug the SunSet T10 into the circuit Refer to Figure 180 Simple Talk Listen Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt VF MEA SUREMENTS and use the NEXT F1 or PREV F2 F keys to set up the receive and transmit channels Selectthe INSERT TYPE line and press the TONE F2 F key Select the TONE FREQ Hz line and choose the desired frequency using the F keys Use the more F4 F key to display additional alternatives A If needed enter a tone frequency directly from the keypad using the SHIFT and number keys on the keypad Enter a value between 50 Hz and 3950 Hz Selectthe TONE LVL dBm line and select either a 0 dBm level or a 13 dBm level A If needed enter the tone level directly from the keypad using the SHIFT and numberkeys onthe keypad Usethe MINUS F1 F key if the entry is lower than 0 dBm Ch 4 Applications 343 Press the ENTER key on the keypad when the settings are completed The SunSet T1O is now transmitting a tone on the selected channel When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 344 SunSet T10 p Rev 2 0 Advanced Applications 2 1 Fractional T1 Testing Term Access Monitor Access 1x0 Digital Cross Connect System DCS Interoffice Facilities To other end of circuit
92. first page shows timeslots 1 8 next page shows 9 17 next shows 18 24 This is a way of determining the test rate of the circuit and to verify that the SunSet T10 is properly configured When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the MAIN MENU 5 Select FRAME RELAY CONFIGURATION and configure as follows INTERFACE UNI STANDARD Press the AUTO F4 F key The SunSet T1O automatically finds the standard for the circuit DLCI VALUE Press the AUTO F4 F key The SunSet T10 automatically finds the DLCI length of the circuit The last 4 settings T391 N391 N392 N393 determine how often the full status enquiry response is sent how much time should elapse and error thresholds Unless a specific test is needed to check these parameters leave them at their default values T391 10 N391 6 N392 3 N393 4 After these settings are configured escape back to the FRAME RELAY menu 6 Select LMI ANALYSIS Upon displaying this screen the SunSet T10 begins sending responding the link management signaling to check the status of the UNI user network inter face The SunSet T10 sends a status inquiry message every 10 seconds per the T391 setting A Thenetwork must respond with a status message for each enquiry message After sending receiving the right number of enquires as determined from N391 setting the SunSet T10 sends a full status inquiry to the network When the SunSet T10 receives a full stat
93. for it to function OPTION This is a listing of all of the installed software options There are two F keys available PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 Use to scroll through the avail able screens Note Depending on the number of options PAGE UP and PAGE DN may not be available 282 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 10 2 Measurement Configuration 13 28 00 MEAS CONFIGURATION EAS DURATION 9S9 PERIOD LAST ENT DISABLE 2 4 CONTINU Figure 150 Measurement Configuration Several measurement configuration items may be adjusted Refer to Figure 150 MEAS DURATION Options TIMED F1 CONTINU F2 TIMED A timed measurement will stop after the indicated amount of time has elapsed This option is useful for making measure ments of a specified length 15 minute and 1 hour tests are com mon in the industry When a timed test is in progress the Re maining Time RT counter shows the remaining time before the end of the test To enter a duration use the following procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Usingthe keypad enterthe number between 1 min and 999 hr 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator CONTINU A continuous test will run indefinitely until the RE START F key is pressed or until some other setting is changed within the SunSet T10 that restarts the test Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 283
94. full duplex emulation of a CSU or NI With this capability use the SunSet T10 to emulate a CSU or NI The emulation screen displays apictorial explanation of the circuit status measurementresults configuration commands to perform loopbacks While in this mode the SunSet T1O will respond to CSU and NI loop up down codes Use CSU NI Emulation in T1 Single and T1 Dual modes 12 1 CSU NI Emulation T1 SINGL Mode 13 28 00 ET 000 00 30 NI Li LBKT BPV FBE OOF CRC6 RMTCMD NONE ES TYPE NI SES LOCCMD UAS ESET LLPBK 1 PLPBK 1 Figure 167 CSU NI Emulation T1 SINGL 1 Before entering CSU NI Emulation configure the TEST CON FIGURATION screen as follows TEST MODE T1 SINGL RxLvL 1 TERM BRIDGE or DSXMON FRAMING as appropriate for the circuit under test Cannotbe AUTO framed CODING as appropriate to the circuit under test TX SOURCE THRU NORMAL LBO 182 as appropriate for the circuit under test TEST RATE 1 544 M The CSU NI Emulation screen is not available for fractional rates 308 SunSet T10 Rev B 2 Plug the cords into the SunSet T10 and circuit under test Confirmthatsignal coming from the network is connected to the Line 1 jacks The SunSet T10 will then respond to loopback codes from the network and display the CSU NI Emulation screen See Figure 167 3 Setupthe SunSetT10 for either NI emulation or CSU emulation Do this by selecting TYP
95. grid Move the cursor to the desired character and press the SELECT F4 F key Repeat until the LABEL is complete Pressthe ENTER key onthe keypadto record the new LABEL and return to USER TEST PATTERN Alternatively press the TOGGLE F3 F key to return to the LABEL line and continue entering or editing the pattern 102 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 4 5 Correcting a Mistake in the Pattern 1 From step 6 ofthe Programming User Defined Patterns proce dure the wrong digit is entered A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator and use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the incorrect digit B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator Enter the correct digit A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator B Usingthe arrow keys onthe keypad move the cursor to the end of the line C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator D Enter in the rest of the digits 4 6 Editing a User Test Pattern 1 Fromthe SEND TEST PATTERN menu press the USER F1 F key to move into the USER TEST PATTERN screen Select the code to edit and press the EDIT F2 F key Usingthe procedure in Correcting a Mistake in the Label edit the code s label Press the ENTER key on the keypad to store the pattern 4 7 Deleting a User Test Pattern 1 2 Fromthe SEND TEST PATTERN screen pressthe USER F1 F key to enter the USER T
96. in Figure 81 D CHANNEL No Displays the D channel number The D chan nel numbers for each line are set the OTHER PARAMETERS Screen INTERFACE ID Displays the Interface ID configured for the line Configure both line interface IDs in the OTHER PARAMETERS Screen Status line Depending on the status of the D channel one of the following messages are displayed MOOS Manual out of service In this state the D channel is not available The D channel may be moved to an available state only by manual intervention on the near end Out of Service In this state the D channelis not available and the maintenance entity will periodically attempt to move the channel to an in service state In service In this state the D channel is available for transfer of call control and other Layer 3 messages Standby In this state only Layer 2 messages are established Service is not yet available for the transfer of Layer 3 mes sages If the other line s D channel is unavailable then this D channel will move to In service 170 SunSet T10 p Rev B Depending on the status of the particular line one of the fol lowing messages is displayed SIGLOSS Signal loss indicates that the line has lost signal e FRMLOSS Frameloss indicates thatthe line haslostframing Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the BACKUP D CHNL TEST status screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 171 6 7 4 SetupFilter 211005 D CHANNEL FILTER
97. is sendingthe switch code then it will attemptto verify the switch A Once this operation has succeeded a message will be displayed for the user to press the ENTER key on the keypad to switch the line B After pressing the ENTER key connect the customer s span to the maintenance spare for the duration of the switch If choosing RELEASE in step 5 reposition the cables on the span A Press the ENTER key on the keypad and wait until the control sequence has been executed Once executed the Switch is released Notes A loopback must be in place to perform the switch or release commands To use the switch function plug into the control unit To use release first plug into the NIU The CCU will automatically loop up when accessing the Teltrend MSS menu However when plugging into the NIU to perform the release command exit from the Teltrend MSS menu and re enter it as in step 2 to re establish a loopback at the NIU Consult the Teltrend Maintenance Switch System Practices manual for extensive information on the operation of the switch Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 97 3 8 HDSL Span Control To test HDSL spans with the SunSet T10 1 Select MAIN MENU LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL HDSL SPAN CONTROL and the screen depicted in Figure 40 appears 21 0405 HDSL SPAN CONTROL HTU HTU NIU TIME 000 47 Span ARME cC ER COMMAND 5 o EQUIPMT HTU C LOOP UP LOOP DN TOUTDIS m
98. is automatically set for Line 1 and cannot be changed The last three lines of the VF Configuration screen contain default values that can not be changed from this screen This is indicated by the hyphen separating the field name from the field value Rx 1 Rx 2 A B C D This displays the signaling system CAS bits associated with the selected channel e ForT1 SINGL only Rx 1 bits are displayed e ForT1 DUAL both Rx 1 and Rx 2 bits are displayed Rx 1 Rx 2 DATA This shows the live 8 bit channel data as it is received The display will Show Rx 1 DATA when T1 SINGL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION or T1DUAL wasselectedunder TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for RXDROP is set to L1 Rx Line 1 The display will show Rx 2 DATA when T1DUAL wasselectedunder TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for Rx DROP is set to L2 Rx Line 2 Rx 1 Rx 2 FRQ LVL This shows the frequency and level as it is received The display will show Rx 1 FRQ LVL when T1 SINGL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION or T1DUAL wasselectedunder TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for Rx DROP is set to L1 Rx Line 1 The display will show Rx 2 FRQ LVL when T1DUAL wasselectedunder TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for Rx DROP is set to L2 Rx Line 2 224 SunSet T10 Rev B 7 2 View Supervision 21 10 05 ABCD 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ABCD 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Figure 112 View Line 1 amp 2
99. is sometimes used in combination with ES to describe overall in service transmission performance During an SES the customer is likely to be experiencing trouble with the service but may still be able to use the service such as POM voice transmission Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 111 Lpp Level peak to peak is the peak to peak level of negative and positive pulses received by the SunSet T10 Usage Use to confirm that the signal is at the proper level For example at a DSX the level should be 0 dB at the out jack and about 20 dB at the monitor jack At the customer premises the received signal should be no lower than 15 dB and the trans mit signal should be about 0 dB At a repeater the input signals should be between 7 5 and 35 dB and the output signals should be about 0 dB UAS This is a count of all the unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test Note that T1 service is not available during a UAS UAS is any second with a loss of signal loss of frame loss of pattern or alarm indication signal A UAS also occurs at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs Once a UAS is declared the fol lowing seconds are counted unavailable until declared available again Service becomes available at the onset of 10 consecutive available non severely errored seconds Usage UASs are not permitted in any number in a 15 minute or 1 hour test Telephone companies typically guarantee 3 hours maximum outage time per year with T1 service FRE
100. more F1 F key loops up the specified line repeater Arm the repeater and enter the RPTR number before using this function LOOP UP This key will loop up a specified line repeater Arm the repeater and enter the RPTR number before using this function LOOP DN This key will loop down any line repeater it will not loop down an NIU SEQLPBK Sequential loopback allows the user to quickly step through the loopbacks on the line This feature is useful for track ing down misaddressed repeaters Arm the span before using this option Note Arming is required before the repeaters will actually loop up RPTR NO Press the SHIFT key on the keypad then use the keypad numbers to enter the desired repeater number This specifies which repeater will belooped up RPTR TYPE Options 31xx 56 F1 31xx 80 F2 This item determines the type of Westell Repeater Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 85 3 5 Westell Line RPTR SW 184 The Westell Line Repeater screen shows several aspects of the repeater control session Refer to Figure 34 21 10 05 E RPTR TIME 001 50 STATUS Span ARME SPAN RPTR No 01 RPTR 31 56 ARM DL UNARMDL TOUTDIS more Figure 34 Westell Line Repeater The items to the right of the diagram in Figure 34 provide information on the repeater control session and cannot be config ured within this screen They are TIME Time begins counting up f
101. mum number of 7 consecutive zeroes B8ZS coding is preferred because it reduces transmission problems caused in AMI Note The B8ZS LED will be green only if 8 consecutive data zeroes are observed on the line An AIS signal or other high density ones pattern will make it impossible for the SunSet T10 to determine whether the line is optioned for AMI or B8ZS Tx SOURCE Options THRU F1 NORMAL F2 THRU This allows the signal received on the Rx jack to be trans mitted out of the Tx jack for Line 1 The SunSet T10 will insert a signal on one or more channels on LINE 1 The channels and corresponding AB bits on that line that are not being used will be passed through the SunSet T10 unchanged from Rx to Tx NORMAL Use NORMAL for out of service bit error rate testing In this case a test pattern is transmitted on LINE 1 Tx During Nx64 NX56 or VF Channel Access testing idle code is inserted on the unused channels Note For NORMAL a highlighted T is shown in the graphic screen The T represents that the SunSet T10 is transmitting its own pat tern For THRU there is no T since the SunSet T10 is not gener ating its own pattern 52 SunSet T10 p Rev B XMT CLOCK Options L1 RX F1 L2 RX F2 INTERN F3 XMT CLOCK determines the timing source for the signal trans mitted out Line 1 Note When THRU is chosen as the transmit source XMT CLK is forced to L1 Rx Use L1 Rx if e plugging into a switch or other syn
102. of connection indicator forward call indicator calling party categ ory user service information called party number callreference To find out the translation of these hex values select the corresponding field and press the L4deco F4 F key Figure 205 shows an example of one of the Layer 4 decodings and shows the decoding bit by bi t according to ANSI documentation 02 22 06 HGFEDCBA 00000000 BA 00 Satellite Indicator no satellite circuit in the connection Continuity check ind continuity check not required Echo control device outgoing half echo control device not included F H Spare Figure 205 Nature of Connection Layer 4 Decode 8 When finished viewing messages disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 395 6 0 GSM Voice TRAU BERT Testing UJ 100 O 2 EIR VLR CS MSC Network m hud Subsytem BTS BSC AUC Authentication Center Um Interface A Interface BSC Base Station Controller BTS Base Transceiver Station EIR Equipment Identity Register HLR Home Location Register MSC Mobile Switching Center VLR Visitor Location Register BTS Abis Interface Figure 206 GSM Network The SunSet T10 is a powerful tool for maintaining installing GSM networks It offers three tests for testing the TRAU Transcoder and
103. on the keypad TheBIT ERROR LED should be red and one bit error should be recorded in MEASUREMENT RESULTS 12 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 366 SunSet T10 p Rev 3 2 Fault Location with Remote amp Local Loopbacks This application provides a troubleshooting procedure using the remote and local loopback capabilities of the SunSet T10 Figure 190 shows a remote and local loopback Local Loopback Modulator RS 449 Output Demodulator Output Remote Loopback West East RCV DATA RS 449 i XMT DATA Figure 190 Local and Remote Loopback 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE DATACOM TYPE per interface MODE DTE TEST RATE per modem REF CLOCK INTERN When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 2 Connect the SunSet T10 to the modem under test 3 Select DATACOM INTERFACE Confirm that the transmit leads RTS and DTR are turned on If not select the lead and press the ON F1 F key 4 Selectthe LL line and press the ON F1 F key this activates a loop on the modem The transmit and receive data LEDs should light up e Ifthe received data LED of the modem lights up but not the transmit data LED then the modem is faulty This is because it cannot transmit the received data back to the SunSet T10 5 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 6 Select MAIN MENU MEASUREMENT RESULTS and verif
104. other end of the circuit 1 SendtheNIU loop up code ARM INB Sending the UNBLOCK code will temporarily inhibit the NIU blocking feature of the office repeater 2 Send the NIU code ARM INB again and the far end NIU will loop up CLR FT1 Clear FT1 is used to temporarily re configure an E type office repeater in the fractional mode to through mode This al lows troubleshooting the span using 1 544 Mbps testing 1 Pressthe ARM INB F keyto armthe E type repeater This also loops back the NIU Pattern synchronization will not occur because the central office repeater is still blocking the unused channels 2 Pressthe CLR FT1 more F2 F key Pattern synchronization with no errors is now achieved 3 Whenfinished pressthe UNIVLDN more F3 F key This will drop the NIU loop and return the office repeater to its fractional blocking mode RPTR NO This specifies which repeater will be looped up Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to use the keypad numbers to enter the desired repeater number 80 SunSet T10 p Rev B 3 3 Teltrend Line Repeater SW 184 Figure 32 displays several aspects of the repeater control session 201 10205 E RPTR TIME 001 50 STATUS Span ARME SPAN CTRL NERIS RPTR No 01 ARM DL UNARMDL TOUTDIS more Figure 32 Teltrend Line Repeater The items to the right of the diagram in Figure 32 provide information on the repeater control session and c
105. receive timeslot the respective transmit timeslot will also be highlighted This is becausethe receive and transmit timeslots should normally be set to the same numbers f you want these timeslots to differ select the transmit section and manually set up the desired timeslots Ch 4 Applications 375 e You may also press UN SEL to de select a particular timeslot or CLR ALL F4 to erase allthe selected timeslots and start with a clear screen For RS232 you may select only one receive and transmit timeslot B Pressthe ENTER key on the keypad when finished You will return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 9 Connect the SunSet T10 to the datacom device through the multiport Refer to Figure 193 Datacom Device yg Mat Pattern 1 4 Figure 193 Emulating Add Drop MUX 10 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear any blinking LEDs 11 Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is green and no red error LEDs appear 12 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 13 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RE CEIVED DATA A Verify that the SunSet T10 is receiving DTE s test pattern on the multiport Since the datacom type for BERT in the 376 SunSet T10 p Rev B TEST CONFIGURATION screen has been selected the pattern received on the multiport should be displayed in this screen For Figure 193 511 should be seen Even if onl
106. responding to loopback commands This option is available only with ESF DL framing UNARMDL Un arm data link sends a disarming command in the Datalink This option is available only with ESF DL framing EQUIPMENT Options HTU C F1 HTU R F2 HRE F3 HLU F1 HRU F2 EQUIPMENT specifies which particular equipment will be looped up down when sending a LOOP UP or LOOP DN command HTU C and HLU These functions refer to the HDSL transceiver at the central office There is no difference in the code transmitted for HTU C HLU This command invokes a loopback of the DS1 signal at the HTU C HLU toward the network This loopback does not involve the 2B1Q HDSL span HTU R and HRU These functions refer to the remote HDSL unit There is no difference in the code transmitted for HTU R HRU This command invokes a loopback of the DS1 signal at the HTU R HRU toward the network This is a far end loopback and in volves the 2B1Q HDSL span HRE This is an HDSL range extender which can appear mid span Notes Sending a loopback command loops the 051 signal towards the network Armthe HDSL equipment before responding to loopback com mands Send an ARM DL ESF or ARM INB SF andthen send the loop up command The arming command uses the same sequence as the stan dard NIU loop up code An arming command willloop the far end NIU if an NIU is present and if it responds to loopback commands Alternatively if the NIU loopback featu
107. some parts of the country particularly New England The transmitted in band codes for each loopback are in Table 2 Command Inband Codes CSU Loop Up 10000 t0000 CSU Loop Down 100 NI Loop Up 11000 NI Loop Down 11100 100000 100000 Table2 In band Codes ESF DL Codes LINE F1 PAYLOAD F2 NETWORK F3 USER F4 LINE This code operates a line loopback at a CSU This loopback regenerates only the signal Bit errors and BPVs should pass through this loopback PAYLOAD This code operates a payload loopback at a CSU In this loopback the 192 channel bits pass through but the framing bits and line code are regenerated Only bit errors will pass through this loopback NETWORK This code operates an NIU smart jack loopback This loopback regenerates only the signal and should pass both BPVs and bit errors Shown in Table 3 are the transmitted ESF DL codes for each loopback 74 SunSet T10 p Rev B Command ESF DL Codes Line Loop Up 11111111 01110000 Line Loop Down 11111111 00011100 Payload Loop Up 11111111 00101000 Payload Loop Down 11111111 01001100 Network Loop Up 11111111 01001000 Network Loop Down 11111111 00100100 ESF DL Codes 3 1 1 Basic Loopback Procedure 1 Select MAIN MENU LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL A If TYPE and CODE are correct proceed to step 4 T
108. status for each active or idle 21 10 05 PVC STATUS PAGE 01 01 Figure 142 PVC Status Screen The PVC Status screen displays anyrecently activated or active DLCIs each corresponding to individual PVCs e when a DLCI shifts from NEW to ACTIVE after receiving a full status report from the DCE the DLCls automatically sorted by number e morethan one page of new or active DLCIs Use the PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 F keys to scroll through the results 270 SunSet T10 Rev B 9 3 PING Test Every Internet device has its own IP Internet Protocol ad dress Multiple LAN segments are connected via a frame relay network A common way to discover whether two remote LAN seg ments using the TCP IP protocol are connected is to send a PING Internet control message protocol message from one segment to another When receiving a PING message Internet devices acknowledge the message by sending an echo message back This test sends a PING message from a local to a destina tion IP address to verify continuity Both users must be using TCP IP protocol A large difference between the maximum and minimum response times for each PING message indicates con gestion in the network Configure the SunSet T10 as follows 21210205 PING CONFIGURATION LOCAL IP 192 004 051 006 EST IP 192 006 051 003 SNAPIP Figure 143 Ping Test Configuration Note Before beginning the proper DLCI v
109. stop viewing 11 When finished disconnect The SunSet T10 from the circuit 382 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 4 3 ISDN PRI Data Call Setup This procedure illustrates an ISDN Data call Illustrated in Figure 197 is a point to point call Figure 198 illustrates a loop back device call Calling a loopback device is quicker and less labor intensive than the point to point call If making a point to point call be sure each SunSet T10 is transmitting the same pattern N ISDN Network Figure 197 Point to Point Call ISDN Network i Loopback Device Figure 198 Loopback Call 1 Verify thatthe span is notin service This ISDN call will disrupt service Ch 4 Applications 383 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 the circuit as shown in Figure 194 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking history lights Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six consecutive ones together with two zeroes should be observed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 or 11110011 If not observed then the D channel is n
110. t SNM 184 SNT 184 TUP 184 SS7 Protocol ISUP 456 MTP 455 SCCP 456 TCAP 456 TUP 456 SS7 TCAP Package Type Identifiers Abort 201 COMP TYPE 201 Conversation with Permission 201 Conversation without Permission 201 Invoke Last 202 Invoke Not Last 202 ORIG TRX ID 201 Query with Permission 201 Query without Permission 201 Reject 202 Response 201 Return Error 202 Return Result Last 202 Return result Not Last 202 Unidirectional 201 SS7 TUP filtering fields ADDR SGNL 185 CIC CODE 185 HEAD CODE 185 Standard Test Patterns 1 16 412 1 8 412 127 413 2047 411 2e15 413 2e20 412 2e23 411 3 24 413 511 412 55DLY 411 63 413 ALL 0 413 ALL 1 412 ALT10 413 FOX 412 Index 489 Standard Test Patterns con t QRSS 411 T1 2 414 T1 3 414 T1 4 414 T1 5 414 T1 6 55 octet 415 T1 1 413 SW56 Call Setup METHOD 216 NUMBER 216 SW56 Measurement Results UAS 218 BER 218 BIT 218 CODE 218 ELAP TIME 218 FRME 218 PATT 218 RATE 218 RXA B 218 TXA B 218 UAS 218 Switched 56 Testing OFF HOOK A B C D 215 ON HOOK A B C D 215 RCV CHANNEL 214 TEST PATTERN 214 USER PATTERN 215 XMT CHANNEL 214 System Profiles 276 T T1 MUX Test Configuration BERT 67 CODING 66 DATACOM 67 FRAMING 66 LBO 1 amp 2 66 MODE 67 MUX 67 Rx DROP 66 RxLVL 1 amp RxLVL 2 66 T1 65 T11NS 67 T1T S 68 Tx SRC 67 490 SunSet T10 49 Rev T1 MUX Test Configura
111. the Cords 314 1 2 Accepting a New Span Loopback Test 315 1 3 Monitoring an In service 317 1 4 Stressing a T1 319 1 4 1 Using SEND TEST 319 1 4 2 Using Bridge Tap 319 1 5 Verify Proper B8ZS AMI Optioning 320 1 6 Checking for Frame Slips amp Frequency Sync 322 1 7 Measuring Signal 324 1 8 Running a Timed 326 1 9 Checking DSX Wiring sssseeene 327 1 10 Observing Network Codes or Channel Data 329 1 11 Determining Round Trip Circuit Delay 332 1 12 Determine Distance to Loopback 334 1 13 Basic Dialing Procedure 336 1 14 Entering amp Editing Speed Dialing Numbers 337 1 15 Monitor a Voice Frequency Channel 339 1 16 Simple Talk Listen 341 1 17 Sending Tone 343 2 0 Advanced Applications 345 2 1 Fractional T1
112. the INFO F key displays the decoded infor mation elements The message displayed in Figure 130 is a Setup message sent by the RDT The CRV is 146 The dashes next to the DS1 and DSO numbers indicate that this information is not specified in this message This is because the call is initiated by the RDT When the IDT responds with a Setup Acknowledgment CSC or Connect TMC message it will specify which DS1 and DSO to use for the call Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 253 8 1 5 TMC Statistics 21 10 05 A H TMC STATSITICS EST OUT OF SERV H UNAVAILABLE IST CH UNAVAIL EMP FAILURE JINE UNIT UNAVAIL RING FAILURE 5 INVALID CALL REF MSG UNIMPLEMENTED INFO UNIMPLEMENT TOTAL TMC MSG WO OWOG H TO O ESTART PAUSE Figure 131 TMC Statistics The TMC statistics page provides a running count of any cause values found in disconnect release release complete and sta tus messages This screen must be active for the results to accu mulate Provided are results for both lines 1 and 2 While in this screen the messages are also stored in the View Print Buffer Therefore if more details are needed for a certain cause value review through the messages in View Print Buffer Setting a post filter for the particular cause value will simplify the process The TMC filter also applies to the st
113. the timestamp of the most recent PING received from the IP address that sent the PING message PING FROM IP address that sent the PING TOTAL Total number of PINGs received from the associated IP address 274 SunSet T10 Rev B 10 0 Other Features 21 10 05 OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG EAS CONFIGURATION ERROR INJECTION THER PARAMETERS IEW TEST RECORD PRINT RECORDS LOAD SAMPLES Figure 146 Other Features Menu 10 1 System Configuration 21 10 05 SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES GENERAL CONFIG RASE NV RAM ULL SELF TEST VERSION OPTION Figure 147 System Configuration Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 275 10 1 1 System Profiles maximum of 10 system profiles can be stored in the SunSet T1O These profiles can save time while configuring the SunSet T10 for applications The SunSet T10 can store the current con figuration as a system profile After naming a profile it can be recalled at any time Items that are stored in the profile are General configuration settings Testconfiguration Measurement configuration Dial supervision setup Error injection Other parameters Send test pattern Note The SYSTEM PROFILES menu does not operate like the user pattern menus They may not be edited in the SYSTEM PRO FILES menu To modify a profile use the modification procedure described in section 10 1 1 6
114. to Figure 91 21 10 05 ETUP FILTER ER 3 INE 1 DPC 02 00 02 INE 1 OPC XX XX XX SI FIELD CIC CODE NONE ESG TYPE 01 DDR SGNL CALLED ASSR NUMB 3638000 gt XX X XX X FISU LSSU ON NONE SCCP ISUP more Figure 91 Setup Filter The following filter screens use these F keys NONE F1 Use to capture all message types INC 1 F2 Increment the selection by one e DEC 1 Decrement the selection by 1 10 50 F4 Determines increment decrement values for the F2 and F3 keys Select the following filter items Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 183 LINE 1 DPC Options 00 00 00 to FF FF FF Usedto enter a Destination Point Code in hexadecimal form The Destination Point Code indicates the signaling point for which the message is intended Enter this code in decimal if selecting NO F2 for HEX INPUT LINE 1 OPC Options 00 00 00 to FF FF FF Useto enter an Originating Point Code in hexadecimal form TheOriginating Point Code indicates the signaling pointthatis the source of the message If selecting NO F2 for HEX INPUT enter the code in decimal SI FIELD Options NONE F1 SCCP F2 ISUP F3 SNT more F1 SNM more F2 TUP more F3 Signaling handling functions to perform message distribution uses the Service Indicator Field The SI Field indicates the user part to which the message belongs This field further specifie
115. to the access mode selected Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs Select MAIN MENU VF CHANNEL ACCESS VF MEA SUREMENTS Select the receive listen and transmit talk channels Set the INSERT TYPE to TALK If access to a D1D D2 or SLC 96 digroups B D is required refer to Tables 17 Channel Numbering and 18 Channel Numbering SL C 96 Talking and listening on the selected channel is now possible Adjustthe volume to the desired level by using the volume keys on the keypad If control supervision ofthe circuit is needed goto Tx 1 or Tx 2 A B C D and enter the supervision bits in order to go off hook on hook or wink Use the appropriate F keys ON HOOK F1 OFFHOOK F2 WINK or SEND F4 to send the ABCD bits View the supervision bits that are returned on this same screen in Rx 1 or Rx 2 A B C D 358 SunSet T1O p Rev B A Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to exit this screen The last supervision bits sent will be sent for the remainder of the session 10 If dialing is to be performed on the circuit A Select DTMF DIALING and press the ENTER key on the keypad B Enter the number to be dialed and then press the ENTER key on the keypad 11 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit For reference the following tables list the common signaling arrangements used on D4 channel banks TRMT refers to the signaling bits transmitted by the c
116. what function will be performed if the SHIFT function is activated i e numbers or PRINT 28 SunSet T10 49 Rev 1 1 Orange Label Keys Shift Key Function To activate the shift function 1 Press and release the orange SHIFT key Do not press the SHIFT key simultaneously with other keys At this point the SHIFT indicator will appear in the upper left hand corner ofthe Screen 2 Thenpress the desired key marked orange The SunSetT10 will then perform the function indicated on the orange label 3 Press the SHIFT key again to release the shift Note that the SHIFT indicator is now gone Note Check the shift indicator if the keys are not behaving as expected If the shift indicator at the upper left hand corner of the screen indicates the wrong shift status press the SHIFT key A B C D E F Use these keys to enter DTMF tones A D special MF tones letters in labels and hexadecimal numbers through 9 Use these keys to enter user test patterns user loopback patterns numbers in LABELS and telephone numbers PRN SCRN Press PRN SCRN to print the current screen to the SS118 High Capacity Thermal Printer The image is converted to bitmap format so that any screen menu pulse mask graphic can be printed This screen will not print to ASCII devices When the PRINT F key is present the output is generally formatted in ASCII characters and can be used by common printers and computers Ch 2 Product De
117. will be dis played in either the looped or unlooped mode POWR DN Power down tells the office repeater to cut the power to the span The power will remain cut until you choose another function or escape to the MAIN MENU Powering down the span resets all the repeaters Make sure to arm the office repeater before selecting POWR DN UNIVLDN This sends the NIU in band loop down code to drop one Teltrend or NIU at a time LOOP UP This will loop up the office repeater Arm the repeater before using this function If the office repeater is an E type choose office RPTR number 1 through 3 in RPTR NO Do this before press ing the LOOP UP F key However if the E type repeater is config ured for fractional T1 blocking only repeater number 1 can be looped up After the loop up is successful a displayed message will show the fractional configuration of the office repeater Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 79 LOOP DN This will loop down the office repeater However it will not loop down an E type office repeater when it is in NIU emula tion mode DUAL LB This will loop back an E type office repeater in both directions when DUAL LB is configured for NIU mode and has already been looped up using the ARM INB F key UNBLOCK This will unblock the office repeater to allow the NIU loop up code to pass through the customer premises toward the DSX This function is necessary when testing from the customer premises and looping back an NIU that is on the
118. wrong timeslot is selected press the UN SEL F3 F key or pressthe CLR ALL F4 F key to deselect everything and start over again E Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished LBO 1 Options OdB F1 7 5dB F2 15dB 22 5dB F4 LBO 1 refers to line build out for line 1 Use LBO to stress test a line by attenuating the dB to a chosen level Use 0 dB e whenpluggingtheSunSet TlOinatthefrontpaneljackofa DSX CSU or NI equipmentdirection channel bank or other 3V test point whenthere is 132 feet or less of cabling between the SunSet T10 and the DSX under most conditions Use 7 5 15 and 22 5 dB whentransmitting toward the T1 span from a central office or customer premises and a 7 5 dB 15 dB or 22 5 dB attenuator is not in series with the SunSet T10 whenthesignal shouldbe transmitted at a lower level to prevent near end crosstalk problems e when the signal should be attenuated so that it arrives at the next repeater at approximately 31 dB dsx level whentesting the sensitivity of the network element s receiver to which the SunSet T10 is transmitting Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 55 2 2 T1DUAL Test Mode T1DUAL provides for the use of both LINE 1 and LINE 2 Use this mode to perform applications such as full duplex drop and insert in service VF channel access ISDN PRI 46B 2D call setup receive and SS7 Shown in Figure 20 is an example configura tion screen For T1DUAL the LEDs fo
119. 000 5 1 in 7 0100000 6 1 in 8 01000000 7 2 in 10 1100000000 8 2 in 11 11000000000 9 2 in 12 110000000000 10 2 in 13 1100000000000 11 2 in 14 EA 12 2 in 15 110000000000000 13 2 in 16 1100000000000000 14 3 in 18 teeth 15 3 in 19 110010000000000000 16 3 in20 1100010000000000000 17 3 in 21 01000100000000000001 18 3 in 22 010001000000000000010 19 3 in 23 0100010000000000000100 20 3 in 24 01000100000000000000100 Quasi Random Table 4 Bridge Tab Test Patterns SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 5 Pulse Mask Analysis SW190 Pulse Mask Analysis allows for the measurement and view ing of the quality of a T1 pulse Refer to Figure 62 2171005 Pattern QRSS T1 403 Width PASS 360 Rise 50 Fall 37 Over 0 Undr 1 Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 21 0 1 2 3 4 9 06 100nS T1 403 CB 119 PRINT Figure 62 Pulse Mask Analysis Use this procedure for performing a pulse shape analysis 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt PULSE MASK ANALYSIS select either START NEW ANALYSIS or VIEW LAST PULSE SHAPE 3 After a few seconds the pulse shape is displayed Key pulse statistics are shown in the right hand margin of the display 4 If required choose one of the industry standard masks for a pass fail report After selecting a message similar to T1 403 PASS is displayed
120. 03 NPRM Screen Select MAIN MENU DATA LINK CONTROL MONITOR T1 403 NPRM Refer to Figure 162 13 28 00 MONITOR T1 403 NPRM ELAPS TIME 000 32 21 ETEC TIME 000 32 21 EAR END ERRORS RC 1 0 C lt 100 0 lt 319 0 C gt 320 0 ES 0 END ERRORS RC 1 21 C lt 100 8 lt 319 0 C gt 321 0 ES 0 PerAlert 0 FrConv O0 RESTART HOLDSCR Figure 162 Monitor T1 403 NPRM Screen The Monitor T1 403 NPRM Screen defines the CRC 6 error counts and SES counts as near end and far end errors There are two available reports Per Alert Performance alert The network provider may define a performance threshold This PA bit will increment whenever the near end or far end count has exceeded the predefined threshold Note that some network equipment may not support this feature FrConv The Frame Conversion field increments when the SF to ESF frame format conversion occurs 302 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 11 2 3 Monitor T1 403 BOM 13 28 00 EW DATA LINK T1 403 BOM EIVE STATUS MESSAGE LAST MESSAGE left most bit received 1st Current 00000000001111111 1st last 11100011000011000 2nd last 11000110001100010 3rd last 10011011010001101 4th last 10010000000000011 Figure 163 Monitor T1 403 BOM The MONITOR T1 403 BOM screen displays the message that the SunSet T10 receives over the data link The receive sta tus line show
121. 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 472 T1DUAL Test Configuration 56 T1DUAL Graphic Test Mode 56 Loop or Slave Timing 60 Slave to Slave Timing 61 External Timing 61 Internal Timing 62 T10 Time Slot Screen 63 T1 MUX Mode Configuration 65 Datacom Configuration Menu 69 Loopback and Span Control Menu 72 CSU and NI Control 73 Teltrend Office Repeater 78 Teltrend Line Repeater 81 Westell Office Repeater 83 Westell Line Repeater 86 Westell NIU PM amp MSS Menu 88 Retrieve View All PM Reports 89 MSS Switch Control 92 MSS Ramp Access 94 Teltrend MSS Switch Control 96 HDSL Span Control 98 Send Test Pattern Menu 100 T1 Single Line 1 Summary Screen 105 T1 Dual Summary Screen 105 T1 Single Line 1 Summary Screen 108 T1 Dual Summary Screen 108 No Errors Screen 109 BPV Line 1 Line Screen 113 Line 1 Signal Screen 115 Line 1 Frame Screen 118 Line 1 ESF CRC 6 Screen 121 Line 1 Logical Screen 123 Frequency Screen 125 Datacom Bit Error Screen 127 Other Measurements Menu 130 View Received Data 130 SunSet T10 49 Rev Figures con t 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 Index Propagation Delay 133 Quick Test l 135 Quick Test Il 135 Ticket Label Entry 136 Quick Test Su
122. 1 DEC 1 F2 1 10 F3 Determines how many PINGS are sent to the remote IP address during the test UsethelNC 1 F1 or DEC 1 F2 F keysto setthis parameter The 1 10 F3 key determines increment decrement values for the F1 and F2 keys LMI MESSAGE Options ON F1 OFF F2 This setting activates or deactivates LMI signaling e ON activates LMI management and the SunSet T10 transmits status enquiry messages to the switch Upon entering the FRAME RELAY menu the SunSet T10 will begin sending LMI messages if this setting is ON 272 SunSet T10 4 Rev B When finished with configuration press the START F4 F key to begin the test The SunSet T10 displays the PING TEST screen as shown in Figure 144 With LMI activated the SunSet T10 waits until it has received the proper number of responses to begin the test When the SunSet T10 has received the proper number of status and full status messages PVC STATUS changes from NOT READY to READY and the SunSet T10 begins sending PING messages 21 10 05 PING TEST 521209505 ET 000 01 00 LOCAL IP 192 004 051 006 DEST IP 192 006 051 003 PVC STATUS READY GS 20 ROUNDTRIP TIME TUS SENDING CUR 220 ms AVG 230 ms MAX 255 ms MIN 215 ms Figure 144 PING Test in Progress The RESTART F4 F key is available within the screen shown in Figure 144 This F key restarts the test and resets ET to zero Figure 144 displa
123. 124 UAS 124 BER 123 BIT 123 BTSLP 123 CURBER 123 Line 1 Signal Screen UAS 115 484 SunSet T10 49 Rev Line 1 Signal Screen con t LVL 116 LVL 116 AISS 116 AS 115 EXZS 116 LDNS 116 LOSS 115 Lpp 117 SMPX 117 UAS 115 Line BPV Screen AS 114 DGRM 114 SES 114 UAS 114 AS 114 BER 113 BPV 113 CURBER 113 DGRM 114 Link Management LMI ANSI 11 617 Annex D 419 heartbeat 419 ITU Q 933 Annex A 419 keep alive 419 Original LMI FRF 1 1 419 Load Samples 292 M M13 346 Measurement Results Summary Screen EFS 111 ES 111 BER 110 BIT 109 BPV 109 BPVR 109 CRC 110 EFS 111 ES 111 FBE 110 Lpp 112 SES 111 UAS 112 Menu Tree 47 Index 485 Monitor Data Link SLC 96 A SHLF 294 A FELP 294 B SHLF 294 B FELP 294 C BITS 294 C SHLF 294 C FELP 294 D SHLF 294 D FELP 294 M BITS 294 MAJOR 294 MINOR 294 MODE 294 P FELP 294 POWER 294 PROTECT LINE SWITCH 294 Monitor T1 403 NPRM Screen FrConv 302 Per Alert 302 MSS Ramp Access ACTION 94 LINE 94 MSS Switch Control ACTION 92 LINE 92 N NV Non Volatile RAM 281 Nx56 345 Nx64 345 Other Parameters AUDIBLE ERROR BEEP 288 CODE MISMATCH MSG 290 IDLE CHANNEL CODE 288 PATTERN INVERSION 288 PATTERN LOCK 289 REMOTE CONTROL 289 P Printer PR40A 38 Propagation Delay Screen 133 486 SunSet T10 49 Rev Q Quick tests 135 R Remote Control 43 RMA 466 RTRV 54016 PM
124. 2 CRC Error Source Tm S X 4 0 PBX PRM gt Figure 229 DS1 Performance Monitoring End to end performance monitoring is possible through ESF framing and CSUs that support PRM Performance Report Mes saging on ESF FDL Specified in ANSI T1 403 is this capability The concept is similar to that described in the DS3 performance monitoring section In ESF performance monitoring any CRC 6 er ror or bipolar violation that the CSU receives is transmitted towards the other direction in the PRM on the FDL This way various tele phone companies that provide transport service can have an equal ability to see the quality of the end to end transmission while the circuit is in service Before this capability was available the circuit would have to be out of service in order to measure the performance This end to end performance monitoring capability gives the customer a way to verify the quality of the service that the telephone company is delivering It also allows the telephone company to setup internal monitoring systems to report on the average grade of ser vice provided to customers The telephone company may also re ceive early warning of some failures i e those failures preceded by a gradual period of deterioration This early warning allows the tele phone company to fix the problem before the service is lost Illustrated in Figure 229 is End to end performance monitoring In this a fault o
125. 2 Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES MEASURE MENT CONFIGURATION 3 Select MEAS DURATION and press the TIMED F1 F key 4 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 5 Use the keypad to enter the desired number of hours and minutes The format is hhh mm 6 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 7 Press the ENTER key on the keypad when the setting is correct 8 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 9 Proceed with the test procedure as outlined in section 1 2 or 1 3 ofthis chapter When performing MEASUREMENT RESULTS the test is timed To determine how much time is remaining observe the RT Remaining Time indicator in the upper right hand corner of the display 326 SunSet T10 p Rev 1 9 Checking DSX Wiring MULTI PORT SERIAL PORT LINE 2_ LINE 1 TX RX TX T1 Equipment ili T1 Equipment Figure 177 Checking DSX Wiring An incorrectly wired DSX can be the source of a problem Use the following procedure to verify proper wiring of the DSX Note If the DSX is very large you may need two SunSet T10s or a long cord for this test 1 2 Verify that the span is not in service This test will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure each SunSet T10 as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by your design Tx CODING as specified by yo
126. 2 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB or as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 199 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs 386 SunSet T10 7 Rev 9 Select ISDN PRIMARY RATE gt CONFIGURATION and set up according to the circuit making sure the EMULATE TYPE is set for TE Escape out and select ISDN PRIMARY RATE gt OTHER PARAMETERS Set up Line 1 D chnl and L 2 Bkup D Chnl according to the circuit Escape out and select ISDN PRIMARY RATE gt BACKUP D CHNL TEST Both LINE 1 and LINE 2 ISDN messages should be sent and information about a message should be received for either LINE 1 or LINE 2 PresstheL STAT F1 F key to display the status of both lines LINE 1 should display In service and LINE 2 should display Standby To test whether or not LINE 2 acts as a backup PRI line press the DROP L1 F1 F key to manually drop LINE 1 LINE 1 should display Manual out of service and LINE 2 should change now to In service To establish LINE 1 once again press the EST L1 F1 F key and
127. 2 1 TRAU Frame PCM Frame 1 544 Mbps Frame Type Channel Type Full Half Time Alignment Frame Indicators Spare Frame Indicators DTX Indicator Spare Spare Bits TEENE Figure 221 16 Kbit TRAU Frame Divided into four 16 kbps sub channels are the 64 kbps timeslots Each devotes 13 kbps to voice with 3 kbps remaining for spare bits A TRAU Transcoder and Rate Adaption Unit does the required transcoding between the 64 kbps and 16 kbps chan nels A TRAU may be located at the BTS BSC or MSC If located outside the BTS the TRAU is controlled by in band signaling using some of the spare bits A TRAU frame containing 320 bits is used to send signals between the BSC and the TRAU Its use is mandatory when the A bis interface is applied Ch 5 Reference 433 7 0 T1 Technology This section is an overview of T1 technology and equipment It also explains the basics of troubleshooting and sectionizing problems with T1 circuits T1 is a general term that refers to the transmission of 1 544 Mbps digital circuits over any media T1 can be transported over copper fiber or radio DS1 is the term for the electrical signal found at the metallic interfaces for this circuit where most testing is performed 71 T1 Transmission 7 1 1 T1 Usage Used for a variety of purposes are T1 circuits They are widely embedded in the network distribution architecture as a conve nient means of reducing cable pair counts by carrying 24 v
128. 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 476 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex 371 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex 374 Emulating Add Drop MUX 376 ISDN Call Setup TE Mode 379 ISDN Call Setup NT Mode 379 ISDN Monitoring 381 Point to Point Call 383 Loopback Call 383 Back up D Channel 386 47B D 388 Receive a Call INFO Screen 391 SS7 Network Testing 392 View Message Hexadecimal 394 View Message Decoded 394 Nature of Connection Layer 4 Decode 395 GSM Network 396 GSM 16K BERT Screen 397 GSM Monitor Screen 398 Voice amp TRAU XMT Configuration Screen 400 Frame Relay Header Formats 416 DLCI Values 417 Multiple PVC Connections 418 LMI Counters 419 HDSL Span 421 GR 303 System 422 TMC Call Procedure Initiated by IDT 424 TMC Call Procedure Initiated by RDT 425 CSC Call Procedure Customer Initiated 426 GSM Network 430 TRAU Locations 432 16 Kbit TRAU Frame 433 DS1 Network Elements 435 DS1 Pulse Transmission 437 DS1 Frame Structure 438 PCM Sampling and Law Encoding 440 Timing Distribution 442 AIS and Yellow Alarms 444 DS1 Loopback Testing 445 DS1 Performance Monitoring 446 BPVs amp LOS in DS1 Fault Sectionalization 449 FBE and CRC in DS1 Testing 450 DS1 Yellow and AIS 451 DS1 ESF PRM Errors 452 SS7 Network 454 SS7 and OSI P
129. 4M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 315 9 Connectthe SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 172 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking history LEDs Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL For SF framing setup as follows TYPE IN BAND CODE NI or CSU as appropriate Note Do not select the LOOP UP entry until last For ESF framing setup as follows TYPE ESF DL CODE NETWORK NIU or LINE CSU as appropriate Note Do not select the LOOP UP entry until last Press the LOOP UP F key a LOOPING UP message will be displayed followed by a LOOP UP SUCCEEDED message Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to MAIN MENU Select MAIN MENU gt SEND TEST PATTERN and select a pattern to send then push the ENTER key on the keypad Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS Verify that the span performs to requirements for the delivered service When done with MEASUREMENT RESULTS press the ES CAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 10 Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL and set the MODE to LOOP DN to release the loopback Leave the other settings as they were Verify that a LOOP DOWN SUCCEEDED message appears 12 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 316 SunSet T10 p Rev 1 3 Monitoring an In service Circuit 1 SERIAL
130. 557 Network Architecture 453 8 2 SST Protocol eit Bee ett gus 455 8 3 557 457 8 4 ISUP Message Example 460 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 461 1 0 Troubleshooting seen 461 2 0 Calib Fation eb teda se 464 3 0 Customer Information 466 3 1 Customer Service niei tieu 466 3 2 Express Limited Warranty 467 jd 469 11 Warnings T1 spanlines contain high voltage These voltages may appear on the tip and ring of the bantam jacks used to connect the signal to the SunSet T10 Insert or remove software cartridges only with the power switched off Otherwise damage could result to the software cartridge Use only the SunSet charger for your SunSet T10 Use only the printer charger forthe printer Improper use of any charger may damage your test set the printer or the chargers and will invalidate your warranty When bringing the SunSet in from extreme cold to a warm environment allow the SunSet to warm up and allow any condensation to evaporate before use Condensation may interfere with the operation of the SunSet and may result in damage Do not immerse the SunSet in water and do not expose the SunSet
131. 6 element the SunSet T1O will emulate as it sends the SLC 96 message The three elements are NOTE WP1 and WP1B MAJOR MINOR POWER A SHLF B SHLF C SHLF D SHLF These categories allow setting the desired alarm message A FELP B FELP C FELP D FELP P FELP These categories al low setting a far end loop or indicate the existence of a far end loop Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 295 S BITS M BITS C BITS These categories allow direct entering of those SLC data link bits that are not otherwise defined SEND This F key function allows sending the message at any time Note A message is not sent until the SEND F key is pressed This allows editing of the message Once sent the message will continue being sent until changed ACTION Select either SWITCH F1 or RELEASE F2 to carry out the desired action LINE Select the desired digroup A D by pressing the appropri ate F key F1 F4 When the settings are correct press the ENTER key on the keypad to send the message 296 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 11 1 3 View Data Link 13 28 00 EW DATA LINK SLC 96 01 C CsssM MAAS Ss 111111111110101110111111 111111111110101110111111 1TITTITETITIOTOTTIOTTITIT 111111111110101110011111 LLTTITTITITIOTOTTIOTIITTIT 111111111110101110111111 111111111110101110111111 111111111110101110111111 E UP PAGE DN PAUSE Figure 158 View Data Link VIEW DATA LINK allows viewing of an active SLC 96 data link The bits
132. 7 GSM Monitor D amp l 208 IDLE CODE 210 JUMP 208 LINE 1 LINE 2 208 LINE NUMBER 209 LINK DIRCTN 210 RCV CBITS 210 SUB CHANNEL 210 TIME ALGMNT 210 TIME SLOT 209 TRAU frames 207 GSM Monitor screen TRAU frames 399 GSM Network 13 Kbps RPE LTP speech 431 64 Kbps A law speech 431 A bis interface 431 A interface 431 AUC 431 480 SunSet T10 49 Rev GSM Network con t BSC 431 BSS 430 BTS 430 C bits 432 CCU 432 EIR 431 ETSI 430 HLR 431 IMEI 430 IMSI 430 ME 430 MS 430 MS ISDN 431 MSC 431 NS 430 PLMN 431 PSTN 430 SIM 430 TRAU 431 432 Um interface 430 VLR 431 H hardware self test 281 HDSL Span Control ARM DL 99 ARM INB 98 COMMAND 98 EQUIPMENT 99 HRE 99 HTU C and HLU 99 HTU R and HRU 99 LOOP DN 99 LOOP UP 99 TOUTDIS 99 UNARMDL 99 UNARMIN 98 HDSL Technology 2B1Q 421 2B1Q line coding 421 CAP 421 CSA compatible loops 421 full duplex links 421 HTU 421 HTU C 421 HTU R 421 Index 481 HDSL Technology con t twisted pair loop 421 Instrument Stand 14 ISDN Backup D Channel Test D CHANNEL No 170 DISC 169 FRM LOSS 171 INTERFACE ID 170 L STAT 169 MOOS 170 Out of Service 170 SIG LOSS 171 Status Message 170 ISDN Configuration EMULATE TYPE 153 NT 153 Q 931 STD 153 TE 153 TEST PATTERN 153 ISDN Data call loopback call 383 point to point 383 ISDN INFO Screen Bch CFG 166 BEARER 166 CALL NO 166 CHANNEL 166 CLED ID
133. 8 10 5 View Test Record 291 10 6 Print Records 292 10 7 Load Samples 292 11 0 Data Link Control sess 293 11 1 Data Link Control SLC 96 293 11 1 1 Monitor Data Link eee 294 11 1 2 Send 295 11 1 3 View Data Link esssssseseeenennnn 297 11 2 Data Link Control 298 11 2 1 Monitor T1 403 299 11 2 2 Monitor T1 403 NPRM 302 11 2 3 Monitor T1 403 303 11 2 4 Send 71 403 PRM 304 11 2 5 Send T1 403 BOM sse 305 Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions con t 11 2 6 RTRV 54016 PM CNTR 307 11 2 7 Print 54016 Results 307 12 0 CSU NI Emulation 181 308 12 1 CSU NI Emulation T1 SINGL Mode 308 12 2 CSU NI Emulation T1 DUAL 310 Chapter 4 Applications eere 313 1 0 Basic 5 313 1 1 Connecting
134. 90 5 0 5 392 6 0 GSM Voice TRAU BERT Testing 396 6 1 16K BER Testing sssssssseeeeeenee 396 6 2 Monitoring Network Traffic amp Voice Quality 398 6 3 Transmitting a GSM Encoded Voice Message 400 7 0 Installing a Frame Relay 401 d c BINGTeSU on st Bre RU EOM indue 401 Chapter 5 Reference eee 405 1 0 AbDreviatioris c detenti hdd 405 Chapter 5 Reference con t 2 0 Standard Test Patterns 411 2 1 DDS Patteri Notes siess arreoa gerettet 415 3 0 Frame Relay 416 3 1 Frame Relay Structure 416 93 1 DECIS ete ae 417 3 1 2 Link Management LMI eene 419 4 0 HDSL Technology 421 5 0 GR 303 Technology Overview 422 5 1 TMC and Hybrid Signaling 424 5 2 CSC and Out of Band signaling 426 5 3 Embedded Operations Channel 428 5 4 TMC CSC Cause 429 6 0 GSM TRAU Technology
135. ACER allows viewing and printing of spe cific data captured by the SunSet T10 Refer to Figure 93 21 1005 VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 402 VIEW FROM VIEW TO 402 TURN THE FILTER ON CLR ALL PRINT EW FLTR ON Figure 93 View Print Tracer To specify the records to view or print use the following pro cedure 1 Select VIEW FROM 2 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the desired numbers from the keypad 3 Press the SHIFT key to deactivate the SHIFT lock and select VIEW TO 4 Press the SHIFT key and enter the desired numbers from the keypad 5 Press the SHIFT key again to deactivate the SHIFT lock 6 When satisfied with the settings press the VIEW or PRINT F keys The four F keys available in this screen are CLR ALL F1 Erases the contents of the view print buffer Press the CLR ALL F key and follow the on screen instructions PRINT F2 Print the contents of the buffer VIEW F3 Displays the contents of the buffer as specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings FLTR ON FLTROFF F4 Turns the filter assignments on or off Turning the filter off displays all messages while saving filter set tings in the SETUP FILTER screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 197 ANSI SCCP Message Example LINE SCCP DPE RCV M 01 10 02 194 000 000 01 C7 CF 08 5B PAGE FO 06 04 01 01 2E 03 00 00 02 03 00 00 DO 11
136. ALYSIS select from the MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt DTMF MF DP ANALYSIS Configure the following items DIAL TYPE Options MF F1 DTMF F2 DP F3 Choose the dial type AUTO SCAN Options YES F1 NO F2 YES Enable auto scan by selecting YES When in scan mode the SunSet T10 will rapidly scan all 24 receive channels for any channel that goes from the on hook to off hook state When the SunSet T10 finds a channel going off hook the SunSet T10 will lock onto that channel and wait for digits to be transmitted NO If NO is selected the transmit and receive time slots must be entered In this mode the SunSet T10 will analyze the se lected receive channel only 232 SunSet T10 Rev B Tx SPRVN Options Auto Scan ON OFF F1 ON WINK F2 N A F3 1 channel ON OFF F1 ON WINK F2 MANUAL F3 Transmit Supervision determines the reply to an off hook ON OFF Choose to start sending an on hook while sending an off hook in response to a received off hook ON WINK Choose to start sending an on hook while sending a wink in response to a received off hook MANUAL Choose to manually send on hooks off hooks winks and flashes in response to an off hook N A For AUTO SCAN mode only Returns to normal AUTO SCAN mode No specification for Tx SPRVN After completing the settings press the ENTER key on the keypad to begin the analysis Continue reading for more informa tion on the analysis procedure
137. ASUREMENTS then select either QUICK TEST I or QUICK TEST II The screen depicted in Figure 59 appears 21 10 05 QUICK TICKET LOOPBAK CSU PRINT NONE TOGGLE Figure 59 Ticket Label Entry 136 SunSet T10 7 Rev B At TICKET enter a name with the following procedure A Press the TOGGLE F3 F key to enter the character grid B The letter A will flash Select the desired character and press the SELECT F4 F key C To enter numbers use the SHIFT key and the number keypad Press SHIFT when finished with the number keypad lf an incorrect character for the TICKET is entered press the TOGGLE F key and select the incorrect character using the arrow keys on the keypad Press the DELETE key F2 F key to remove the character Note that the DELETE key can only be used when the cursoris out of the character grid D When finished deleting letters move the cursor back to the end of the TICKET line press the TOGGLE F3 F key to return to the character grid and enter any additional charac ters E Repeat steps B and C until the TICKET line is complete The line can contain maximum of ten characters F Whenfinished press the TOGGLE F3 F key to escape the character grid and return to the TICKET line AtLOOPBACK choose CSU F1 NI F2 or NONE F3 The SunSet T10 will attempt to automatically loop back the far end based on its settings At PRINT choo
138. ATION ERROR INJECTION A Note the available options B Pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 28 Select OTHER PARAMETERS A Note the available options B Pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 29 Select DATA LINK CONTROL A Note the ESF datalink functions e Displays SLC 96 functions if the SunSet TIO is SLC 969 framed B Press the ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 30 Select CSU NI EMULATION A Press the LLPBK 1 F2 F key B Verify the loopback graphic C Press the ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 1 Initial Set up 23 31 If a Sunrise printer was ordered connect the supplied charger to the printer and a power outlet A B C D Connect the printer to the SunSet T1O using the Sunrise Telecom mini DIN 8 to RS 232C printer cable Turn on the printer and press the SHIFT key on the SunSet T10 keypad Press the PRN SCRN key on the keypad to print out the current screen Press the SHIFT key again to remove the SHIFT indicator 32 If Remote Control was ordered check out it s operation by connectting the SunSetT10 to a PC with Microsoft HyperTerminal or other VT100 emulation software Start by 24 A B C H U Plugging the Sunrise SS122B null modem adapter DB9 F into the PC s COM port 1 Plug the Sunrise SS115B printer cable into the SS122B Plug the other end ofthe SunSet SS115B printer cable
139. Adder Signal allows for filtering of messages using address numbers CALLED Use to look for a specific called number the destination of the call After pressing the CALLED F2 F key a new line ADDR NUMB will appear On this line enter the specific number by pressing the SHIFT key onthe keypad and then entering the desired number using the keypad number keys CALLER Use to look for a specific caller number the origin ofthe call After pressing the CALLER F key a new line ADDR NUNMB will appear On this line enter the specific number by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and then entering the desired number using the keypad number keys Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 185 Code TUP Heading Code ACB Access Barred Signal A5 ACC Automatic Congestion Control Information Message 1A ACM Address Complete Message 14 ADI Address Incomplete Signal 45 ANC Answer Signal Charge 16 ANN Answer Signal No charge 26 ANU Answer Signal Unqualified 06 BLA Blocking Acknowledgment Signal 37 BLO Blocking Signal 27 CBK Clear back Signal 36 CCF Continuity Failure Signal 32 CCL Calling Party Clear Signal 76 CCR Continuity Check Request Signal 67 CFL Call Failure Signal 55 CGC Circuit Group Congestion Signal 25 CHG Charging Message 24 CLF Clear Forward Signal 46 COT Continuity Signal 32 DPN Digital Path
140. Advanced Test Equipment Rentals A ished 1981 www atecorp com 800 404 ATEC 2832 SunSet T10 User s Manual SS150M Version 2 20 MAN 10450 US001 Rev B Sunrise Telecom A Step Ahead 302 Enzo Drive San Jose CA 95138 Tel 1 408 363 8000 Fax 1 408 363 8313 Copyright 2002 Sunrise Telecom Incorporated This device uses software either developed by Sunrise or licensed by Sunrise from third parties The software is confidential and proprietary The software is protected by copyright and contains trade secrets of Sunrise or Sunrise s licensors The purchaser of this device agrees that it has received a license solely to use the software as embedded in the device and the purchaser is prohib ited from copying reverse engineering decompiling or disassem bling the software 2 SunSet T10 amp Rev B SunSet T10 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Initial Setup eese 13 1 0 Unpacking the Test 13 2 0 Check Out Procedure sss 16 Chapter 2 Product Description 27 1 0 FUNCIONS uh N a a 28 1 1 Orange Labels iisen parann eainnt aiiai iiai 29 1 2 White Label Keys eeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 30 2 05 LEDS ende eire de erre ien 33 3 0 Connector 36 3 1 Using the Battery amp AC
141. After PRE EXISTING LOOP ONLY hit ENTER to con tinue is displayed press the ENTER key on the keypad If the ENTER key is not pressed immediately the loop up will be aborted B Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL If other choices are available within LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL selectthem and observe their functions SunSet T10 Rev B C When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad untill the MAIN MENU is displayed 10 Select SEND TEST PATTERN Observe all of the available stress patterns The SunSet T1O will synchronize only on the pattern it is sending Displayedis a USER F1 F key This allows the creation of 10 user patterns up to 2048 bits each A Select the FOX test pattern The SENDING line displays the FOX pattern B Press the ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 11 Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS and refer to Figure 6 ET 000 01 RCV FOX 53 08 21 36 RT CONTIN XMT FOX NO ERRORS NO ERRORS EQ 1544000 E UP PAG E DN U FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM Lpp 0 1 dB STOP mo re Figure 6 Measurement Results NO ERRORS A NO ERRORS should be displayed as shown in Figure 6 B Verify that FREQ is 1544000 1 C Verify that the Lpp is 0 dB 1 0 D Press the ERR INJ key on the keypad and observe the measurement counts There should be 1 BPV and 1 BIT error shown in the LINE 1
142. B 7 2 1 Fault Sectionalization BPVS Loss of Signal Figure 230 BPVs amp LOS in DS1 Fault Sectionalization Trouble Fault sectionalization techniques vary depending on whether the T1 circuit is in service or out of service If out of service then start from the middle and loop back the circuit in each direction to see which side has the problem Next go to the middle of the problem side and do another loopback in each direction Repeat this procedure until the problem is located Refer to Figure 228 for an illustration of the loopback test This figure shows many of the loopbacks that may be available in one direction from the central office Note that there also may be DS3 loopbacks available if the circuit is a DS3 circuit or DS1 channel loopbacks may be avail able in higher order multiplexes If the circuit is in service non disruptive performance moni toring techniques are used Simply plugging into monitoring jacks and observing the information can show much about the circuit Be sure to plug into the monitor jack for each direction and look at the results The following paragraphs tell what conclusions can make from various results at different monitor points In the accompanying diagrams a SunSet T10 shows what abnormal conditions it is seeing from its monitor point In the diagrams a black dot indi cates a line impairment that is causing steady or bursty errors A missing signal arrow
143. C 6 errored seconds UAS This is a percentage of ESF CRC 6 unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test 122 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 6 Logical Screen The LOGICAL screen reports all of the parameters measured from a known test pattern Reported results are available if syn chronized with a pattern Usage Most users will refer only to bit error rate and bit error count displayed on the Summary screen However the bit slip measurement offered on this screen is a useful means of detect ing this unusual circuit impairment Refer to Figure 51 21 10 05 LET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS LOGICAL ps np ER 0 0e 07 00 412 00 000 100 00 000 00 000 00 000 Figure 51 Line 1 Logical Screen LET In this screen LET replaces ET Logical Elapsed Time starts counting after achieving PAT SYNC BIT This is a count of line 1 logical bit errors since the beginning of the test BTSLP This is a count of line 1 logical bit slips that have occurred since the beginning of the test A bit slip occurs when the synchro nized pattern either loses a bit or has an extra bit stuffed into it Usage BTSLP can be useful for finding frequency slip prob lems that are symptomatic of a network element that periodically drops or stuffs a bit BER Line 1 logical bit error rate since the beginning of the test CURBER Line 1 logical current bit error rate dur
144. CI Header DLCIHeader 10 0 to 1023 2 octets 16 0 to 65535 3 octets 23 9108388607 4octets Table 20 DLCI Length amp Possible Addresses Frames are routed through the network using the DLCI val ues When a frame relay switch receives a frame it checks its DLCI value If itis a valid DLCI value it sends the frame toward its destination If the DLCI is not defined in its table the frame relay switch discards the frame In Figure 211 note that each connection may have several DLCIs assigned Frame relay allows users to send data to from multiple locations over the same circuit In Figure 211 Router C has 2 DLCIs assigned Figure 212 shows a possible use for these 2 DLCI values Bed d P d j ROUTERC g DLCI 89 DLCI 25 Figure 212 Multiple PVC Connections Router C uses DLCI 89 to transmit receive data to and from Router B Router C also uses DLCI 25 to send data to and from Router A Several DLCI values are reserved for signaling LMI signaling uses DLCIs 0 for ANSI D and 1023 original LMI to transmit link status information 418 SunSet T10 Rev B 3 1 2 Link Management LMI User to Network LMI ie Status Enquiry SE N393 DTE DCE T391 Network to User LMI N391 Status Report S Periodic Polling Based on Timer and Counter Actions Timer Every 10 seconds user sends Status Enquiry T391
145. Connection Request 1 CREF Connection Refused 3 DT1 Data Form 1 6 DT2_ Data Form 2 7 EA Expedited Data Acknowledgment 12 ED Expedited Data 11 ERR Error 15 IT Inactivity Test 16 RLC Release Complete 5 RLSD Released 4 RSC _ Reset Confirm 14 RSR Reset Request 13 UDT Unitdata 9 UDTS Unitdata Service 10 XUDT Extended Unitdata x 17 XUDTS Extended Unitdata Service x 18 Table 9 SCCP Message Types ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 Address Signal allows filtering of messages using address numbers CALLED Use to search for a specific called number Upon pressing the CALLED F2 F key a new line ADDR NUMB appears Enter the specific number by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and using the number keys e CALLER Use to search for a specific caller number Upon pressing the CALLER F3 F key a new line ADDR NUMB appears Enter the specific number by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and using the number keys SUBSYS NO Options NONE F1 000 to 255 Use subsystem number to select a Message Type The SSN subsystem number identifies a SCCP user function The SSN consists of one octet as shown in Table 10 190 SunSet T10 p Rev B Decimal Code Subsystem Number SSN not used or known SCCP Management Reserved ISDN User Part OMAP Operations Maintenance and A
146. D D D OF ON OF ON OF ON OF ON OF ESTART AB bits Figure 122 Signaling Analysis DECODE You may select either screen while the SunSet T10 is receiv ing data but decoded results only appear after pressing the STOP F1 F key 240 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 0 GR 303 Monitor SW193 Software option SW193 provides monitoring and analysis fea tures for the TMC CSC and eocchannels Select MAIN MENU gt GR 303 ANALYSIS Upon display two options are available Monitor TMC CSC Select to monitor the call management channel TMC or CSC Verification Select to monitor the eoc channel 8 1 Monitor TMC CSC Selecting Monitor TMC CSC displays a screen with six op tions The following sections describe these options 17 16 56 MONITOR TMC CSC CONFIGURATION MC FILTER TART TRACER IEW PRINT BUFFE MC STATISTICS END MESSAGES Figure 123 Monitor TMC CSC Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 241 8 1 1 Configuration CONFIGURATION TIME SLOT TX ONLY 1 DIR RDT gt IDT 1 100ms LOOP T EC 1 1 10 Figure 124 TMC Configuration Screen The TMC configuration screen allows configuration of the SunSet T10 for monitoring of the TMC CSC Time Slot The TMC Time Slot can be changed if necessary the default setting is Time Slot 24 as specified by GR 303 CORE It also contains setup items to send TMC messages from the SunSet T10 Re
147. D Select STOP BIT Two options are available 1 BIT F1 and 2 BIT F2 This setting must match the setting onthe target computer or terminal The normal configuration is 1 BIT E Select BITS CHAR Two options are available 7 BIT F1 and 8 BIT F2 This setting must match the setting on the target computer or terminal The normal configuration is 8 BIT 7 Plugamodem into the serial port A 9600 baud error correcting modem is highly recommended Some functions such as VF MEASUREMENTS will only work properly if a 9600 baud modem is used Refer to Figures 11 and 12 for cable pin out A breakout box appropriate tools and training will be needed to make sure the SunSet T1O is appropriately connected to the modem the first time it is setup 8 Plugthe modem into the telephone network 9 Setupaterminalto dial up the modem and commence commu nications Any terminal or personal computer with VT100 terminal emulation software will work 10 Call up the far modem with this terminal 44 SunSet T10 49 Rev 11 Establish communication with the far modem log on to the SunSet T10 by typing in on the computer or terminal logon Notes The graphic may be distorted if logging into the SunSet T1O while it is in the graphic mode Press the return key on the computer or terminal and then P for graphic to clear the distortion Donotpress the return enter key after typing the letters The SunSet T10 will automatically repaint the screen w
148. DTMF digit scanning is used as an example an MF or DP analysis will provide different information DTMF Analysis an example 1 Configurethe DTMF MF DP Analysis as shownin Figure 115 When finished press the ENTER key on the keypad 2 Ifinthe SCAN mode a flashing SCANNING message on the CHANNEL line will be displayed This message will continue to flash until the SunSet T10 finds a channel going from on to off hook The SunSet T1O will then show which channel as well as the Rx and Tx supervision bits it has found Referto Figure 116 3 The received digits are 4083638000 Refer to Figure 116 4 Toscan again press the SCAN F2 F key and the SunSetT10 will start looking for another channel going off hook 5 Pressingthe ANALYZE F1 F key will give adetailed analysis of each digit Refer to Figures 116 and 117 Figure 117 displays information on the first three digits 4 0 8 Use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view the other digits The following information is provided for each digit TheHigh H and Low L frequencies in Hz and dBm Theinterdigit period INTD in microseconds Note thatthere is no INTD for the first digit Thedial period PERD The TWST Twist whichis the difference in level between two frequencies Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 233 21 10 05 DTMF MF DP ANALYSIS DIAL TYPE DTMF CHANNEL RX AB OFFHOOK TX AB ON HOOK RxDIGIT 4083638000 ANALYZE Figure 116 DTMF
149. Determines the transmit channel Use NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to increment or decrement the transmit channel Uponchanging the channel the number will flash five times The SunSet T10 will not actually begin transmitting on that channel until the flashing stops RCV CHANNEL Options 1 24 Determines the receive channel Use NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to increment or decrement the receive channel TEST PATTERN Options 2047 F1 511 F2 127 F3 63 more F1 1111 more F2 0000 more F3 DDS 1 more F1 DDS 2 more F2 DDS 3 more F3 DDS 4 more F1 DDS 5 more F2 DDS 6 more F3 USER more F1 0101 more F2 Select a pattern to transmit Press USER more F1 to senda user pattern on this line 214 SunSet T10 p Rev B USER PATTERN To enter a User Pattern 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad 2 Enter the pattern using the 1 and 0 keys on the keypad Ifa mistake is made A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to turn off the SHIFT indicator B Use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the incorrect digit C Press the SHIFT key D Enter the number using the 1 and 0 keys E Whenthe digits are correct press the SHIFT key to turn off the SHIFT indicator ON HOOK A B C D Use the SHIFT key and numbers on the keypad to enter the signaling bits for an ON HOOK condition For ESF framing there are four bits for SLC96 and SF framing there are two bits OFF HOOK A B C D Use the SHIFT
150. E 147 CSU 147 DEV NO 147 DSO DP 147 DSU 147 LATCH 146 MODE 146 NON LAT 146 OCU 147 TYPE 146 470 SunSet T10 49 Rev DDS Measurement Results UAS 148 BER 148 BIT 148 COD E 148 ELAP TIME 148 FRM 148 PATT 148 RATE 148 UAS 148 DDS Measurements Rx T S 144 SEND PATT 145 TEST RATE 144 Tx T S 144 DDS Test Patterns DDS 3 415 DDS 4 415 DDS 5 415 Dialing E Procedure 336 EFS 128 Error Injection Screen BPV 285 BURST 285 COUNT 286 FRAME 285 LOG BPV 285 LOGIC 285 MODE 285 RATE 285 286 TYPE 285 F FBER 119 Figures 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Index Cartridge Installation 13 Cartridge After Installation 14 Instrument Stand Installation 15 T1SINGL TEST RATE Nx64K 17 T1SINGL TEST RATE 1 544M 18 Measurement Results NO ERRORS 19 SunSet T10 Front View 27 SunSet T10 Keypad 28 LED Panel 33 T10 Connector Panel 36 471 Figures con t 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 Printer Cable Pin Assignments 38 122C Null Modem Pin Assignments 39 Switch Settings for SS118 Printer 40 Printing to a Parallel Printer 41 Remote Control Typical Layout 43 SunSet T10 Menu Tree 47 T1 SINGL Test Configuration Menu 49 T1 SINGL Graphic 49 019 SunSet T10 Time Slot Screen 54 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044
151. E FE FE FE FE FE FE FF Ch 5 Reference 415 3 0 Frame Relay Technology Frame relay is a packet switching protocol that provides high bandwidth and low delay over a WAN Wide Area Network Packet switching organizes data into individually addressed frames or packets instead of placing data into timeslots A frame relay network consists of endpoints servers PCs hosts access equipment bridges routers FRADs and net work equipment switches network routers 3 1 Frame Relay Structure The frame structure is quite simple The customer s data pack ets are not changed frame relay adds a header to the frame The header can be 2 3 or 4 octets long Figure 210 shows the differ ent header formats DECI T Ec ceres DLCI DLCI or Core Control Figure 210 Frame Relay Header Formats The following fields are included in the header DLCI Data link connection identifier C R Command response bit EA Extended address bit indicates whether there are more oc tets in the header EA 0 more octets EA 1 last octet FECN Forward explicit notification bit When frame relay equip ment detects possible congestion it notifies all downstream equip ment of congestion with the FECN bit BECN When frame relay equipment detects possible conges tion it notifies the upstream equipment of congestion with the bit backward explicit notification bit 416 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B DE Frames tagged with the discard eligibility
152. E STOP BIT 1 BET BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CRtLF ED CONTINU Figure 148 General Configuration Screen The following items are configured in the GENERAL CON FIGURATION screen DATE Y M D To set the date 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Using the keypad enter the appropriate numbers for the year month day The SunSet T10 inserts the hyphens automati cally out of range numbers are rejected 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator TIME H S To set the time 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Using the keypad enter the appropriate numbers for the hour minute and second The SunSet T10 inserts the colons automatically out of range numbers are rejected 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 278 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B BACK LIGHT Options TIMED F1 CONTINU F2 TIMED This timer controls how long the backlight will stay on When selecting TIMED the backlight will automatically turn itself off after the indicated number of minutes has elapsed To set the timer 1 Press the TIMED F1 F key 2 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Using the keypad enter inthe number of minutes between 1 and 99 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator
153. E and then by selecting CSU F1 or NIU F2 4 Observe any circuit error counts and verify that the SunSet T10 is receiving aremote loopback command Note thatthe framing of the remote loopback command must be the same as the framing selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 5 If desired operate any of the local commands as follows RESET F1 resets the SunSet T10 to a through mode LLPBK 1 F2 operates a line loopback from L1 Rx to L1 Tx A line loopback regenerates the signal but does not reframe the signal Hence BPVs and frame errors will pass through the line loopback unchanged Once invoked the line loopback UNLLB 1 replaces the LLPBK 1 command In this case pressing the UNLLB 1 F2 F key will undo the loopback PLPBK 1 F3 operates a payload loopback from L1 Rx to L1 Tx A payload loopback regenerates the signal and also re frames and re codes the signal Hence BPVs andframe errors are eliminated as they pass through the payload loopback Once invoked the payload loopback UNPLB 1 command replaces the PLPBK 1 command In this case pressing the UNPLB 1 F3 F key will undo the loopback 6 Whenfinished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU This drops all loopbacks Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 309 12 2 CSU NI Emulation T1 DUAL Mode 1 13 28 00 ET 000 00 30 RMTCMD NONE TYPE CSU LOCCMD MES ESET ULPBK 1 ULPBK 2 Figure 168 CSU NI Emulatio
154. E is not the same as the idle code on the circuit being tested 7F 01111111 FF 11111111 One way to observe the idle and active channels is to plug the SunSet T10 in using the 1 544 Mbps test rate and then select MAIN MENU gt VIEW RE CEIVED DATA This will allow you to verifiy what the SunSet T10 establishes for AUTO configuration Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 182 Loopup the circuit toward the near end CSU standard CSU loopback code may be used from the access point illustrated in Figure 181 because the SunSet T10 has access to the entire T1 terminating at the CSU Note The SunSet T10 may need to be configured back to the 1 544M TEST RATE in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen in order to loop up the CSU 5 Change the Tx INSERT toL1 Tx and Rx DROP to L2 Rx to loop towards the far end Loopback the far end FT1 CSU The loop code will need to be known to activate the far end FT1 CSU This may require assistance at the far end Change the access Tx INSERT to L1 Tx and Rx DROP to L1 Rx Press the GRAPHIC key on the keypad to verify that the SunSet T10 is sending and receiving across the entire length of the span from end to end Fromthe MAIN MENU gt MEASUREMENT RESULTS perform the acceptance test Verify that the fractional T1 service performs to the requirements for the service delivered 348 SunSet T10 p Rev B 2 2 SLC 96 Testing This section contains application notes
155. ENU MEASUREMENT RESULTS and con firm that there are no errors valid frequency and proper level To restart the test press the STOP F3 F key then the RESTART F key After restart a NO ERRORS message should appear on the summary screen When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad 6 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA This screen shows the current idle and data channels Idle channels display the circuit s idle code of FF or 7F Press the PAGE DN F2 F key to scroll through all timeslots the first screen shows timeslots 1 8 the next screen shows 9 17 and the next shows 18 24 This is a method of determining the test rate of the circuit and verifying the SunSet T10 s test configuration When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 265 9 1 Frame Relay Configuration Select MAIN MENU FRAME RELAY CONFIGURATION and refer to Figure 140 21 10 05 CONFIGURATION INTERFACE UNI STANDARD ANSE DLCI LENGTH 2 VALUE 16 TIMER T391 10 N391 6 N392 i09 N393 4 ANSI617 Q 933 LMI Figure 140 Frame Relay Configuration Configure the following items INTERFACE Option UNI F1 The SunSetT10 supports the UNI User to Network Interface which specifies the interface between the user s equipment and the network The SunSet T1O is the user side of this
156. ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 21 Select and note the DIAL SPRVIS Setup menu A Pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 22 Select OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG VERSION OPTION to view the ordered options Press the PAGE DN F2 F key if the options take more than one screen A Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu 23 Select FULL SELF TEST and verify that there are no errors Ifthe SunSetT10 lost PAT SYNC during the self test press the RESYNC key on the keypad A Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu 22 SunSet T10 4 Rev B 24 Select ERASE NV RAM This will reset the SunSet T10O s non volatile RAM and erase all programmed patterns and profiles A Follow the on screen instructions B Turn off the SunSet T10 for 5 seconds when the procedure is complete then turn it back on to reload the default settings 25 Select TEST CONFIGURATION A Configure as shown in step 6A B Pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 26 Select OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM PROFILES A Press the VIEW F1 F key to view screen 1 and press the PAGE DN F2 F key to view the other available screens SYSTEM PROFILES can store and recall up to 10 instrument configurations B Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until the OTHER FEATURES menu is displayed 27 Select MEAS CONFIGUR
157. EST CONFIGURATION is TEST MODE Four mode choices are available T1SINGL T1DUAL T1 MUX and DATACOM The Test Configuration menu differs for each mode selected 48 SunSet T10 p Rev B 2 1 T1ISINGL Test Mode Select T1 SINGL Test Mode for common T1 Line testing appli cations loopback testing frequency slip measurements and simple talk listen operations This is the simplest T1 mode and disables the LEDs for Line 2 Refer to Figure 17 for the T1SINGL Configuration screen 08 21 36 EST CONFIGURATION EST MODE E A p TISINGL T1DUAL T1 MUX DATACOM Figure 17 T1 SINGL Test Configuration Screen Figure 18 displays the graphic associated with the configura tion in Figure 17 08 21 36 TISINGL LINE iY RAMING ESF DING B8ZS XMT QRSS RCV ORSS RATE 1544kbps Figure 18 T1 SINGL Graphic Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 49 The following items are contained within the T1 SINGL Test Configuration screen RxLVL 1 Options TERM F1 BRIDGE F2 DSXMON F3 RxLVL 1 configures the LINE 1 1 544 Mbps receiver This setting lets the SunSet T10 electrically decode a 1 544 Mbps sig nal under a wide range of resistive or cable losses It also deter mines which electrical load the SunSet T10 will place on the cir cuit There is no effect on the transmitter In a 1 544 Mbps circuit there must be a receiver that applies the low
158. EST PATTERN screen Selectthe test pattern to delete and press the DELETE F3 F key Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 103 5 0 Measurement Results Measurement Results allows viewing of the accumulated mea surement results You may also restart the measurement process Points to remember e The SunSet TIO continuously performs measurements on received signals You do not need to access MEASUREMENT RESULTS in order to compile measurement results Eachtime the test configuration is changed measurements restart A key concept for Measurement Result screens is availabil ity A circuit is available for use only when the bit error rate is low enough so that the signal can get through and be understood Acircuit is unavailable at the beginning of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds Whenthe circuit is unavailable errors errored seconds and severely errored seconds are not accumulated For example start injecting errors continuously from the SunSet T10 ata 1x10 error rate Displayed for the first 9 seconds are increasing bit errors errored seconds and severely errored seconds At the tenth second all the counts will decrease back to the values they had before the start of error injection and the unavailable counter will increase by 10 Once a circuit is unavail able it becomes available only after 10 consecutive seconds with out severe errors Now turn off severe error injection and insert 1 or 2 errors during the next
159. Event Transmission of a Status Enquiry SE N391 1 255 sec Counter Every 6 events sends a Full Status Enquiry FSE Default Timer Reset upon receiving SE or T392 10 5 30 sec Error T392 expired or invalid SE sequence number 392 3 Threshold Error threshold N393 4 Modulo Event counter with modulo X range Figure 243 LMI Counters Link management signaling was developed to communicate important status information between the user and network over the UNI LMI Link Management Interface defines special man agement frames with a unique DLCI address that are passed be tween the network and local access devices Link management signaling checks if the user network link is connected and active as well as informing the user on the status of all virtual circuits at that interface It reports on whethertheinterface is active this is often called a heartbeat or keep alive signal allvalid DLCIs defined at that interface e thestatus of each virtual circuit PVC new active or inactive Link management signaling shows the addition deletion of vir tual circuits and the availability of new virtual circuits Three speci fications define link management e ANSI T1 617 Annex D e ITU Q 933 Annex A Original LMI FRF 1 1 Ch 5 Reference 419 The link management protocol must be configured the same on the network device and on the switch A mis configuration will cause th
160. F keys list the 9 programmed codes available To enter a USER code 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad 2 Enter the binary digits 1 or 0 from the keypad 3 When competed press the SHIFT and then ENTER keys on the keypad to send the USER code F key Control pius b8 Description Code F1 ABNORMAL 10011110 Abnormal Station Condition F2 MUX 00S 10011010 Mux out of Sync F3 C IDLE 11111110 Control Idle Code more F1 D IDLE 11111111 Data Idle Code more F2 MAPO 10010011 Confirmation Code line side more F3 MAP1 11101101 Map 1 Confirmation Code drop side more F1 T ALERT 11101100 Test Alert more F2 TEST 10011100 Test Code more F3 UMC 10011000 Unassigned Mux Channel Note The least significant digit b1 is always 1 and cannot be changed Therefore it appears in parentheses on the SEND MESG line Table 5 DDS Control Codes Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 149 Other DDS codes can be sent using the previously described procedure The following DDS codes may be of interest e Block 10001010 FarEnd Voice FEV 11011010 MJU Alert MA 11110010 Release 11111000 Transition in Progress TIP 10111010 Receiving Codes The RECEIVE portion of the screen displays the DDS code received from the far end The SunSet T10 will display the re ceived digits If these bits correspond to one of the 9 programmed codes shown in Table 4 the message will
161. FF FF FF f 55 55 55 55 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 55 55 55 55 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 T1 3 This 54 octet pattern is used for stress testing T1 circuits and network elements The framing bit is inserted at octet bound aries The pattern violates the 15 zeroes constraint when trans mitted in a framed AMI signal However in unframed transmis sion or B8ZS transmission it meets the zeroes constraint The following is the actual pattern 80 80 80 80 80 80 00 80 80 80 80 80 80 CO 80 80 80 80 EO 80 80 80 80 AA AA AA AA 55 55 55 80 80 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF FF FF 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 T1 4 This 120 octet pattern is used for stress testing T1 circuits and network elements The following is the actual pattern with f showing the locations of the framing bits fFF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF f FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF f FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF f 55 55 55 55 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 f 55 55 55 55 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 T1 5 This 53 octet pattern i
162. GURATION TX INSERT L1 Tx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK L1 Rx ES Figure 22 Loop or Slave Timing 60 SunSet T10 gy Rev B Note For DROP INSERT testing TXSOURCE must be set to THRU XMT CLOCK will automatically be set for the same line as the Rx DROP side If using Loop timing and the timing source is also using loop timing there is no real clock source and the transmit signal may die This is known as Slave to Slave timing since there is no master timing source Figure 23 depicts Slave to Slave timing SLAVE _ SLAVE L1 Rx L1 Tx T10 TEST CONFIGURATION TX INSERT L1 Tx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK L1 Rx Figure 23 Slave to Slave Timing External timing uses an external clock source to time the Tx INSERT signal Set the XMT CLOCK to the opposite line of the Rx DROP selection For instance if RX DROP L2 Rx XMT CLOCK should be L1 Rx Figure 24 demonstrates external timing MASTER SLAVE Exchange or other Timing Source L1 Rx SLAVE L2 Rx L2 Tx T10 TEST CONFIGURATION TX INSERT L2 Tx Rx DROP L2 Rx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK L1 Rx Figure 24 External Timing Internal or Master timing is used in loopback testing where synchronization is not required An internal clock provides a tim ing source but the source is not synchronized to the network The SunSet T10 uses a Stratum 3 clock for its internal timing Figure 25 depic
163. IDGE mode first to see if this works then try DSXMON if it does not If BRIDGE mode is selected for a 3V signal from an OUT jack then the BPV light will probably come on Use TERM mode instead 50 SunSet T10 p Rev B DSX MON Used when a monitor measurement is made The sig nalis from the MON jack of a DSX DS1 plug in card CSU or NI The DSX has isolated the MON signal from the live signal with a high impedance circuit and the transmitter is sending the selected test pattern Notes The DSX monitor jack protects the live signal from any possible disruptions caused by the testing process It allows the technician to observe the line and check for problems while the customer is using it If DSXMON mode is selected when receiving a 3V signal then the red BPV LED will turn on This often happens if DSX MON is selected when the SunSet T1O is plugged into an OUT jack In this case select TERM mode instead of DSXMON mode In some cases it may not be clear if the monitor jack provides a bridged access or a 20 GB isolated monitor access In this case try BRIDGE mode first to see if this works if it does not try DSXMON mode Use DSXMON mode if using the SunSet T10 with another test set that is already configured for auto framing Use DSXMON mode if the SunSet T1O will control the framing on the T1 line Use DSXMON mode if the SunSet T10 will provide a signal to itself withoutfirst passingthrough network equipment which will force
164. IGURATION screen For most results there are pages for both Line 1 and Line 2 However the Logical and Frequency screens refer to whichever line was selected as Rx DROP in the TEST CONFIGURATION Screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 107 5 1 1 Measurement Results Summary Screens The summary screens contain the most significant measure ment results The screens contain measurement results for errored Seconds severely errored seconds unavailable seconds and bit errors If there are no errors in the signal the SunSet T10 displays the No Errors Screen in place of the Summary screen Refer to Figures 44 45 and 46 21 10 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS LINE 1 SUMMARY PVR 1 2e 09 ER 1 2e 09 RC 0 1380 EFS 99 859 0 2 dB REQ 1544000 BPV BIT FBE ES ES ES AS oe Ed Q UJ UJ D pd nj O 65 PAGE UP PAG Figure 44 T1 Single Line 1 Summary Screen 21 10 05 ET 000 07 42 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS SUMMARY LINE 1 LINE 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 454 99 550 0 3 dB 1544000 0 oe Ed Ci Bd E 5 Co 0 S ES AS ES EFS LE Q S U L b B As D Q E UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 45 T1 Dual Summary Screen 108 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 24 10 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS C
165. II ET 1234567890 ES EST PATTERN DURATION min min min min min Figure 58 Quick Test Il Quick tests save about a half hour each time a new HICAP service needs to be accepted In a Quick Test the SunSet T10 sends out five patterns The patterns and their durations may be changed or the default settings can be used Quick Test and Quick Test II are similar but the patterns and durations are different Because of the default patterns and durations supplied use Quick Test for AMI lines 3 24 pattern Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 135 and Quick Test Il for B8ZS lines 1 8 pattern Alternately you can set up the two tests to your needs Note Unlike Measurement Results Quick Test will not run in the background The test will stop after escaping out of the Quick Test Use this procedure to run a Quick Test or adjust the default settings 1 Before using Quick Test configure the line interface in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen to the following settings TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING per the line specification Tx CODING per the line specification Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 as appropriate for the test access point Note T1 Dual Mode does not support Quick Test 2 Plug the cords into the appropriate jacks on the SunSet T10 as specifiedinthe TEST CONFIGURATION screen and also into the IN and OUT jacks on the DSX 3 Select MAIN MENU OTHER ME
166. ITCH F1 RELEASE F2 SWITCH Select SWITCH if connected to the maintenance switch and are ready to switch the circuit over to the spare RELEASE Select RELEASE if connected to the customer s span and the customer is using the maintenance span LINE This specifies the position of the line to switch or release Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the keypad numbers to enter the desired numbers Use the following procedure to ini tiate the maintenance switch 1 Upon entering TELTREND MSS the SunSet T10 will attempt to loop up the CCU maintenance switch common control unit 2 Confirm that an established loopback is at the maintenance switch by pressing the ERR INJ key on the keypad the LED display panel indicates any received errors 3 If a successful loopback is not established escape to LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL TELTREND MSS CONTROL The 96 SunSet T10 p Rev B SunSet T1O will automatically attempt to loop up the CCU or NIU Select TELTREND MSS CONTROL If connected to the maintenance switch and ready to switch the circuit over to the spare press the SWITCH F1 F key A Press the RELEASE F2 F key if connected to the customer s span and the customer is using the mainte nance span B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the position of the LINE to switch or release C Press the ENTER key on the keypad to start the control sequence If choosing SWITCH the SunSet T10 will indicate that it
167. L 231 SCAN 231 TX AB 230 Tx CHNL 230 VF Measurements Setup Screen INSERT TYPE 222 LISTEN SIDE 224 QUIET 223 TALK 222 TONE 222 TONE FREQ Hz 223 TONE LVEL dBm 223 Tx 1 A B C D 223 1 T S 221 View Received Data ASCII 131 BINARY 131 HEX 131 494 SunSet T10 49 Rev W WAN 416 Warranty 467 Westell Line Repeater ARM DL INB 87 LOOP DN 87 RPTR NO 87 RPTR TYPE 87 SPAN 86 SPAN CTRL 86 STATUS 86 TIME 86 TOUTDIS 87 UNARMDL 87 UNIVLDN 87 Westell NIU PM amp MSS ACCUM PRD 90 B8ZS 90 CVL 90 CVP 90 DIRECT 90 ESL 90 ESP 90 MSEC 90 PDVS 90 PM PERIOD 90 SESL 90 SESP 90 STAT 90 UASL 90 UASP 90 Westell Office Repeater ARM DL INB 84 LOOP DN 85 LOOP UP 85 87 LPBKQRY 85 NO 85 85 SEQLPBK 85 87 SPAN 84 SPAN CTRL 84 STATUS 84 TIME 84 TOUTDIS 84 UNARMDL 84 UNIVLDN 85 Index 495 X XMT CLOCK INTERN 53 L1 Rx 53 L2 Rx 53 496 SunSet T10 49 Rev
168. L Loop up the SunSet T10 following the procedure in section 3 1 1 Basic Loopback Procedure 3 From MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt PROPA GATION DELAY View the propagation delay Refer to the following comments for an explanation 4 When finished press the ESCAPE key to return to the MAIN MENU During measurement the SunSet T10 measures the number of unit intervals that it takes for the signal to return A unit interval is the amount of time it takes to transmit one bit 647 uS for a T1 signal Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 133 This number is translated into an exact number of microseconds of round trip delay and into an equivalent number of kilofeet Note that the exact number of kilofeet to the loopback will depend on several items such as number of regenerators gauge of cable type of transmission media existence of any transmis sion devices with appreciable delay etc In the absence of equip ment with dejittering circuits or other sources of significant delay the kilofeet measurement is generally accurate to about 1000 feet and 10 It is suitable for determining where a looped repeater is located 134 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 3 Quick Test I and Il 21 10 05 QUICK TEST X TICKET 1234567890 LOOPBAK MONJ PRINT YES TEST PATTERN DURATION 3 24 05 min ALL 1 05 min Q Q RSS 15 min QRSS 15 min NONE 00 min NI Figure 57 Quick Test I 21 10 05 QUICK TEST
169. LC 96 fram ing The C datalink is used only in mode II In this mode it carries channel allocation information The SLC 96 system uses a protection digroup for ensuring a higher level of reliability Either the remote terminal or the central office terminal may initiate a switch to the protection digroup if a transmission failure is encountered 350 SunSet T1O p Rev 2 2 1 SLC 96 Data Link Monitoring Central Office SERIALPORT LINE LINE NimH 15V TX E TX eus MS MULTIPORT E olo e 9 C Central Office Central Terminal or Direct Switch Interface Remote Plu a Terminal Terminal A Digroup Controlled Environment Vault Remote Terminal Figure 184 Monitoring the SLC Data Link This procedure is for monitoring the A data link to observe the operational status of an in service SLC 96 system 1 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 DSXMON FRAMING SLC 96 Tx CODING AMI or as provisioned Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB or as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 351 2 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 184 Plug Position 1 3 Select MAIN MENU MEASUREMENT RESULTS observe if the signal has any BPV
170. LL Figure 26 T10 Time Slot Screen There are two options for selecting the desired combination of Fractional T1 channels 1 Pressthe AUTO F1 F key and the SunSet T1O will autornati cally configure itself for all active fractional T1 channels The SunSet T10 performs this AUTO configuration by searching for the 7F or FF idle codes as selected in OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAMETERS on any unused channels 2 Manually select the exact channels to be tested using the following procedure A Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the flashing cursor to the desired timeslot and press the SELECT F2 F key B As the RECEIVE timeslots are selected the SunSet T10 will fill in the corresponding TRANSMIT timeslots C Ifthe TRANSMIT timeslots are to be configured differently use the down arrow key on the keypad to access these timeslots and set up the selections manually D Ifthe wrong timeslot is selected press the UN SEL F3 F key or pressthe CLR ALL F4 F key to deselect everything and start over again E Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 63 LBO 1 amp 2 Options OdB F1 7 5dB F2 15dB F3 22 5dB F4 LBO 1 amp 2 stands for line build out for line 1 and line 2 Use LBO to stress test a line by attenuating the dB to a chosen level Use 0 dB whenplugging the SunSet T10 in atthe front panel jack of a DSX CSU or NI equipment direction channel bank or other 3V tes
171. MF DP Analysis Screen 1 21 10 30 5 DTMF MF DP ANALYSIS DIGIT 1 4 INTD H L Hz 1209 0767 PERD dbm 6 4 4 6 TWST DIGIT 2 0 INTD H L Hz 1336 0944 ERD dbm 6 4 4 5 TWST DIGIT 2 8 INTD H L Hz 1336 0852 PERD dbm 6 4 4 6 TWST E UP PAGE DN Figure 117 DTMF MF DP Analysis Screen 2 234 SunSet T10 Rev B 7 6 Noise Analysis SW 183 21 10 05 E MEASUREMENT 18 RESULTS Signal to Noise dB Noise C Message dBrnC Noise 3K Flat 71 6 dBrn Noise C Notch dBrn ESG 3K FLAT C NOTCH Figure 118 Noise Analysis Menu Noise Analysis measures noise using the following four pa rameters Signal to Noise Noise C Message filter Noise 3K Flat filter Noise C Notch filter 1 Press an F key to begin one of the four noise measurements Signal to Noise F1 e C Message F2 e 3 kHz flat C Notch F4 2 After an F key is pressed the measurement will start 3 Tochangethe noise measurementatany time press a different F key The previous measurement results are kept but only the result for the current measurement type is updated 4 Whenthe noise analysis is completed press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to VF CHANNEL ACCESS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 235 7T 7 MF Tracer MF tracer analyzes ABCD bits and MF digits on both lines MF tracer is not supported in the T1 SINGL test mode Confirm th
172. Measurement Results All results relate to the total elapsed time of the test ELAP TIME If necessary use the RESTART F1 F key to restart the measurements The following are the items found in Figure 66 ELAP TIME Elapsed Time is the total amount of time that has passed since the beginning of the measurement process hhh mm ss FRME Displays is the type of transmitted framing CODE Displays the type of transmitted line coding RATE Displays the test rate as specified in the CONFIG amp SEND PATT menu PATT Displays the transmitted test pattern as specified in the CONFIG amp SEND PATT menu BIT Displays the total number of bit errors since the beginning of the test BER Displays the bit error rate since the beginning of the test UAS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test UAS Displays the percentage of unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test 148 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 6 4 Send Receive DDS Control Codes This screen facilitates transmission of DDS control codes to the far end it also displays the received codes Refer to Figure 67 2 E 10305 ENS RCV CONTROL CODI ESG 1 0011010 F 10011010 MUX OOS ABNORML MUX OOS C IDLE Figure 67 Send Receive Control Code Transmitting Codes The SEND MESG line displays the transmitted code To change this code press the F key of choice Shown in Table 5 these
173. N PRI network element i e PBX and configured for TE there is no clock When selecting ISDN PRIMARY RATE the clocking is determined by the EMULATE TYPE setting After escaping out of the ISDN PRIMARY RATE menu the SunSet T1O s transmit clock reverts to the TEST CONFIGURATION XMT clock setting Q 931 STD Options AT amp T F1 NTI F2 NATNL 2 F3 ETSI F4 The Q 931 specification indicates which type of ISDN switch is to be tested Try each type if the type of switch is unknown AT amp T relates to the 5ESS switch NrTlrelates to the Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch NATNL 2isthe National 2 standard ETSI is the ETSI standard TEST PATTERN Options 2047 F1 511 F2 127 F3 63 more F1 1111 more F2 0000 more F3 USER more F1 Selectthe test pattern to be transmitted on the B channel during data calls Selecta pattern by pressing the corresponding F Key l fusinga USER pattern press the USER more F1 F key and then enter the binary digits using the SHIFT key and keypad numbers To send a USER pattern 1 Press the USER more F1 F key 2 Change the user pattern by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and then enter either a 1 or 0 to change the bit settings 3 The INSERT F1 F key may be used to insert a bit or the DELETE F2 F key may be usedto delete the length of the user Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 153 pattern by one bit The length of the user pattern may be upto one byte long
174. NALYSIS analyzes the ABCD bits and timing at 1 ms reso lution SIGNALING ANALYSIS displays simultaneous ABCD changes at 3 ms resolution for both lines when the SunSet T10 is in the T1DUAL Mode Figure 121 shows the AB Bits screen after the STOP F1 F key has been pressed This screen shows the actual bits received on L1 Rx if running in T1SINGL mode If in T1 DUAL mode an other column will appear to the right of the L1 RX CHNL column displaying the bits from L2 Rx Atime stamp appears to the right of the bits this represents the time since the beginning of the test RXCHNL M5 E 1415 sec D 0000 INIT D 1111 00 000 D 0000 38 156 D 1111 41 036 D 0000 45 356 D 1111 45 815 D 0000 50 438 D 1111 52 496 D 0000 52 757 D 1111 56 999 Figure 121 Signaling Analysis AB Bits Options STOP PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 appears after STOP is pressed RESTART F3 DECODE AB bits F4 STOP Stops the analysis to view the results STOP is replaced by PAGE UP PAGE DN Appears after STOP is pressed Use to page through the available screens RESTART Restarts the analysis DECODE AB bits Toggles the display between the AB Bits screen Figure 121 and the DECODE screen Figure 122 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 239 Figure 122 shows the DECODE screen DECODE displays the decoded state as defined by the signaling type selected in the DIAL SPRVS SETUP screen D D D D D D
175. NFG TERM RCV QRSS XMT ORSS NO ERRORS NO ERRORS EQ 1544000 Lpp E UP PAGE DN STOP Figure 46 No Errors Screen These are the SUMMARY definitions BPV This is a count of the number of bipolar violations that oc curred since the start of the test Usage This measurement detects problems with the line to which the SunSet T10 is connected BPVSs are local because any multiplexers radio or fiber transmission links switches digital cross connects or other line terminating devices will remove them as the signal passes through those devices BPVs only pass through copper and regenerative repeaters This measurement is also useful where the transmitted framing or data is unknown Finally many telephone companies use a given number of BPV counts as the maximum acceptable for a span BPVR This is the average bipolar violation error rate since the beginning of the test Usage Sometimes used instead of a count when the mea surement is conducted for a longer period 10 is a typical main tenance limit for voice transmission 10 is a common accep tance limit for voice transmission Many data customers require 10 or better BIT This is a count of the number of bit errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test BIT displays N A when the SunSet T10 cannot synchronize on a pattern Usage This is similar to BPV with the following differences First the SunSet T1O is measuring a known pa
176. NFIG ERASE NV RAM and press the ENTER key on the keypad after the warning message is displayed The SunSet T10 will display a working message 2 When the SunSet T10 is finished turn the power off for 5 seconds and then turn the power back on 3 Re configure the SunSet T10 for the operations it needs to perform TEST CONFIGURATION SEND TEST PATTERN and all other areas of the SunSet T10 will revert to the default settings 10 1 4 Full Self Test Use to perform a hardware self test on the SunSet T10 If it displays an error message after the self test please contact Sun rise Telecom Customer Service for assistance at the following Voice Toll Free 1 800 701 5208 available 24 7 e Fax 1 408 363 8313 E Mail support sunrisetelecom com Shipping contact Sunrise Telecom for instructions Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 281 10 1 5 Version Option 13 28 00 Version 2 20 S N 004589 OPTION A SW180 Remote Control SW190 Pulse Mask SW185 MF DTMF DP SW183 Noise Analysis SW189A SS 7 Analysis SW186 ISDN Analysis SS151 DATACOM module DATACOM MODE SW189B SS 7 TCAP Analy B Ct Ds Es G H T Figure 149 Version Option Screen The Version Option screen displays the following items Version software version that the SunSet T10 is currently using S N software serial number Note The software serial number must match the hardware serial number on the back of the SunSet T10 in order
177. NNEL ACCESS whenthe TxSOURCE inthe TEST CONFIGURATION screen is set to NORMAL TESTPAT an idle channel code and signaling will be inserted into channels that are not selected The idle channel code is programmed from MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAM ETERS IDLE CHNL CODE 220 SunSet T10 Rev B 7 1 VF Measurements 21 10 05 VF MEASUREMENTS Tx 1 T S 04 Rx 1 T S 04 Rx 2 T S INSERT TYPE TONE TONE FREQ Hz 1004 TONE LVL dBm 0 dBm Tx 2 A B 11 LISTEN SIDE L1 RXx Rx1 2 ABCD 11 10 Rx 1 DATA 11001010 Rx 1 FRQ LVL 1003 00 0 Figure 111 VF Measurements Setup Screen The VF MEASUREMENTS setup screen determines the channel to test for receiving and transmitting whethertotalk sendatone or place a quiettermination on the transmit signal In T1 DUAL mode the test channel can pass through unchanged tonefrequency and level Signaling bits to send line orlines used for listening The VF MEASUREMENTS menu also shows the received signaling bits received 8 bit data received frequency and level The following Voice Frequency features as shown in Figure 111 should be configured in this screen Tx 1 T S Tx 2 T S Options 1 24 Note The VF Measurements Screen will display either Tx 1 T S or Tx 2 T S as the first field on the menu The display will show Tx 1 T S when T1SINGL was selected under TEST CONFIGURA
178. Not Provided Signal B5 EUM Extended Unsuccessful Backward Set up Information F5 Message FOT Forward Transfer Signal 66 GRA Circuit Group Reset Acknowledgment Message A8 GRQ General Request Message 13 GRS Circuit Group Reset Message 98 GSM General Forward Set uplnformation Message 12 HGU Hardware Failure Oriented Group Unblocking Message 78 Acknowledgment Message HUA Hardware Failure Oriented Group Unblocking 88 IAI Initial Address Message withAdditional Infomation 21 IAM Initial Address Message 11 LOS Line out of Service Signal 85 MBA Maintenance Oriented Group Blocking 28 Acknowledgment Message MGB Maintenance Oriented Group Blocking Message 18 MGU Maintenance Oriented Group Unblocking Message 38 MPR Misdialled Trunk Prefix C5 MUA Maintenance Oriented Group Unblocking 48 Acknowledgment Message RLG Release Guard Signal 17 RSC Reset Circuit Signal 77 SAM Subsequent Address Message 31 SAO Subsequent Address Message with One Single 41 SBA Software Generated Group Blocking Acknowledgment C8 Message SEC Switching Equipment Congestion Signal 15 SGB Software Generated Group Blocking Message B8 SGU Software Generated Group Unblocking Message D8 SSB Subscriber Busy Signal 65 SST Send Special Information Tone Signal 95 SUA Software Generated Group Unblockin
179. OD 284 PRINTER 279 STOP BIT 280 TIME H M S 278 GR 303 Monitor EOC Setup CHANNEL 259 FILTER ON 260 GR 303 Monitor EOC Statistics 9o COUNT 263 DISCARD FR 262 DM 263 ERRORED FR 262 ET 262 INFO 263 478 SunSet T10 49 Rev GR 303 Monitor EOC Statistics con t REJ 263 RNR 263 RR 263 SABME 263 TOTAL FR 262 GR 303 Monitor Message Types CALL REF 252 CALL REF SUFFIX 252 CAUSE 252 DSO 252 DS1 252 GR 303 Monitor Start Tracer Buffer No 247 Current No 247 Date and time stamp 247 RDT lt IDT 247 GR 303 Monitor TMC Configuration Call Ref 244 Cause Value 245 CRC Check 243 DSO Number 245 DS1 Number 244 Layer 2 Msg 243 Layer 3 Msg 244 TIME SLOT 242 GR 303 Monitor View Print Buffer QUALIFIED 250 GR 303 Technology Bellcore defined interface 422 CMISE ASN 1 428 CONNECT ACK 425 CONNECT message 424 CSC 423 DISCONNECT message 424 DLC 422 e0c 423 428 GR 2833 428 GR 303 CORE 422 IDLC 422 IDT 422 LAP D protocol 428 LDS 422 Q 931 protocol 422 RDT 422 RELEASE COMPLETE message 425 Index 479 GR 303 Technology con t RELEASE message 424 robbed ABCD bits 422 SAPI TEI 428 SETUP message 424 TMC 422 GSM 16K BERT EFS 212 ELAPSED TIME 212 ERROR 212 ES 212 LINE NUMBER 211 LOSS 212 PATTERN 212 SES 212 SUB CHANNEL 212 TIME SLOT 211 UAS 212 GSM 16K BERT screen EFS 397 ELAPSED TIME 397 ERROR 397 ES 397 LOSS 397 SES 397 UAS 39
180. OGGLE F3 F key to escape out of the character grid F Verify thatthe letter C is no longer flashing and the ticketline displays ABC 15 Select LOOPBACK and choose A Observe the patterns and the times for this test B Press the ENTER key on the keypad to begin the test C Observe the pre existing loopback message D Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to abort the test Observe the results e ThePAGE DN F key is available if the test finishes atleast one of the test patterns 20 SunSet T10 4 Rev B E Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu 16 Select BRIDGE TAP DETECT A Wait 30 seconds until the first pattern is finished and then press the PAGE DN F2 F key to view the test summary A perfect score is BIT errors 0 ES Errored Seconds 0 AS Available Seconds 30 B Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu 17 If ordered select PULSE MASK ANALYSIS A Select START NEW ANALYSIS B Observe the pulse shape C Press the T1 403 F1 F key and verify that T1 403 PASS is displayed D Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until the MAIN MENU is reached 18 Select VF CHANNEL ACCESS Observe that the PAT SYNC LED turns off A Select VF MEASUREMENTS B Usethe NEXT F1 and PREV F2 F keys alongwith the arrow keys on the keypad to set Tx 1 and Rx 1 T S to 01 C Adjust the volume by pressing the VOL UP key on the keypad until so
181. ONITOR TMC CSC gt START TRACER and allow the SunSet T10 to capture messages After tracing the messages press the ESCAPE key on the keypad and select VIEW PRINT TRACER The FLTR ON F4 F key turns on the post filter The SunSet T10 displays the total number of messages captured and then the total number of messages matching the filter criteria To turn off the post filter press the FLTR OFF F4 F key 246 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 1 3 Start Tracer 1 Select MAIN MENU GR 303 MONITOR MONITOR TMC CSC START TRACER 2 Thelive messages appear on the display andare stored in the buffer Note The Start Tracer screen must be displayed to capture messages 21410705 BUFFR No 695 CURRENT No 15 98 02 15 20 29 36 RDT IDT STATUS CALL REF 1948 CALL REF SUFFIX O0 Non ISDN CAUSE 81 Invalid Call Reference CALL STATE 0 Null ESTART PAUSE Figure 126 Start Tracer Screen The following information is displayed on this screen Buffer No Total number of messages stored in the buffer Current No Total number of messages captured since entering the Start Tracer screen Date and time stamp Displays the capture time and date of the message RDT IDT Displays the direction of the message whether it came from the RDT Remote Digital Terminal or IDT Integrated Digital Terminal Message Type and Information Element contents Refer to sec tion 8 1 4 View Print Buffe
182. Overview 430 6 1 GSM Network Architecture 430 6 2 TRAU Frames nene cs 432 6 2 1 433 7 0 T1 Technology 434 7 1 T1 Transmission sre a A 434 TUSIGA E iat ts 434 T5127 TI SetviceS cotum Sent 434 7 1 8 051 Network Elements 435 7 1 4 051 Standards sss 437 71 5 DS1 Signal eet rae ees 437 FAG 438 TE etnies eret de ERAS 440 etis c ne Ent oe eia rede 441 7 1 9 Synchronization sssssssssseneeee 442 7 1 10 Supervision 443 ZA tT Addressing asi te s 443 7 1 12 AIS and Yellow 444 TETS Eoopbacks ine iori 445 7 1 14 End to End Performance Monitoring 446 7 2 Troubleshooting and Fault Sectionalization 447 7 2 1 Fault Sectionalization 449 10 SunSet T10 Rev B Chapter 5 Reference con t 7 2 2 Bipolar Violations and Loss of Signal 450 7 2 8 Frame Bit Bit CRC 6 and C Bit Parity Errors 450 7 2 4 AIS and Yellow Alarm sese 451 7 2 5 FEBE or ESF PRM 452 8 0 SS7 Technology Overview 453 8 1
183. PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2 LINE 1 NimH 15V A TX RX T x 2 Le ES T1 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT T1 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Figure 173 Monitoring an In Service Circuit This test may be performed while the span is carrying live traffic Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL TxINSERT L1 Tx RxDROP L1 Rx RxLVL 1 DSXMON RxLVL 2 DSXMON TxSOURCE THRU FRAMING as specified by the circuit or press the AUTO key on the keypad to find the correct framing Tx CODING as specified by the circuit or press the AUTO key on the keypad to find the correct coding XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 317 3 Connect the SunSet TIO s Line 1 and 2 Rx jacks to the MON jacks as shown in Figure 173 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear any blinking history lights 4 Examine the LEDs and the GRAPHIC screen for information about the circuit under test The PULSES LED should be green A red PULSES LED is an indication of severe problems Avalid framing type should be indicated in green SF ESF SLC 96 If one of the framing LEDs is red this indicates severe problems Anactive ERRORS LED indicates thatthe circuitis working but is experiencing problems Anactive YELLED ind
184. Q This is the frequency of the signal as measured against the frequency of a reference clock When measuring just one sig nal the reference is the SunSet T10 s internal clock The internal reference clock of the SunSet T10 has a stratum 3 accuracy When both Rx jacks have signals plugged in XMT CLOCK defaults to the received signal from the line selected in TX INSERT in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 112 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 2 Line BPV Screen Calculated from bipolar violation occurrences are the LINE screen measurements Use these screens to perform an in ser vice test on an unframed signal Figure 47 shows the LINE 1 LINE screen 2110 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8Z28 CNFG TERM RCV ORSS XMT ORSS LINE INE 11 9 9e 09 ER 0 0e 07 E 00 692 00 000 100 00 000 00 000 more Figure 47 BPV Line 1 Line Screen Defined as follows are the measurements in Figure 47 BPV This is the number of bipolar violations that have occurred since the beginning of the test BER This is the bipolar violation error rate measured since the beginning of the test Usage Use BER instead of a count when the measurement is conducted for a longer period 10 is a typical maintenance limit for voice transmission and 10 is a common acceptance limit for voice transmission Many data customers require 10 or better CURBER This is the current bipolar violation bit error rate
185. RM FRAMING per circuit or use the AUTO key on the keypad to configure on the line s framing type Tx CODING per circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE Nx64K or Nx56K It is crucial to select the proper test rate for the frame relay data If the configured rate is unknown press the AUTO F1 F key The SunSet T10 auto matically configures to the active channels Active channels are highlighted Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit using its Line 1 Rx and Tx jacks Once connected the PULSES and framing i e SF LEDs should both be green Flashing LEDs indicate a history condition Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the LEDs Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS to check for no errors as well as a valid frequency and level To restart the test press the STOP F3 F key and press the RESTART F3 F key After restarting the test the SunSet T10 should display NO ER RORS on the summary screen When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad Ch 4 Applications 401 4 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA This screen displays which channels are idle and which channels are used for data Idle channels display the circuit s idle code of FF or 7F Press the PAGE DN F2 F key to scroll through all timeslots the
186. RY LINE LINE 2 U TxCd B8ZS CNFG TERM ES 0 E 0 ES 0 E su AS 2 2t 40 EFS 454 EFS 99 550 0 3 REQ 1544000 TI 0 E UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 43 T1 Dual Summary Screen The following function keys are common to all MEASURE MENT RESULTS screens Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 105 PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 Use these F keys to scroll through the MEASUREMENT RESULTS screens STOP RESTART F3 Pressing the STOP F key causes the SunSet T1O to stop the test Pressing the RESTART F key restarts the measurement process and resets the elapsed time to zero HOLDSCR CONTINU more F1 Hold screen allows observa tion of the measurement screen The measurement count is still proceeding but the counts are updated only in memory When finished viewing the screen press the CONTINU F key to update the screen PRN SAV more F2 Press this F key to print the currently dis played results or save them in VIEW TEST RECORD In addition to measurement data the screen displays the fol lowing data in the upper portion of the measurement screens Current Time The current time is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen ET Elapsed time is the time that has passed since the test was started or Since switching on the SunSet T10 Since configuring the SunSet T10 in the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen since restarting the test using the RESTART F3 F
187. Rate Adaption Unit They are 16k TRAU frame BER testing Check voice quality with real time 13k speech monitoring Insert GSM encoded speech message to test TRAU BTS 6 1 16K BER Testing 1 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 s LINE 1 transmit and receive jacks to the circuit under test 396 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 3 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS GSM VOICE TRAU BERT 16K BERT configure as shown in Figure 207 21 10 05 GSM 16K BI INE NUMBER LINE TIME SLOT 02 SUB CHANNEL 2 PATTERN Bee ELAPSE E 000 08 37 0 0 06 EFS 0 UAS 0 v EH Ed E STOP 2047 more PRINT Figure 207 GSM 16K BERT Screen The following measurements are in the lower portion of the screen within Figure 207 ELAPSED TIME This is the elapsed time since the beginning of the test This counter begins counting when entering the 16K BERT Screen or after pressing the STOP RESUME F1 key ERROR The number of bit errors that have occurred since the start of the test ES This is the number of errored seconds since the beginning of the test EFS This is t
188. S Available Second ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AVBER Average Bit Error Rate AVCER Average CRC 6 block Error Rate B Channel Bearer Channel is a 64 Kbps ISDN user channel that carries digital data PCM encoded digital voice or a mixture of lower speed data traffic B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution is a type of line coding formatfor T1 lines that uses bipolar violations to encode strings of eight consecutive zeroes BPV Bipolar Violation BTSLP Bit Slip occurs when the synchronized pattern either loses a bit or gains an extra bit through stuffing BUFF A Buffer is a device that stores data temporarily from a faster device Ch 5 Reference 405 CCITT Comite Consultatif Internationale de Telegraphique et Telephonique is an international consultative committee that sets worldwide communications standards CER CRC 6 Error Rate Checksum The total of a group of data items used for error checking purposes CLR Clear COFA Change of Frame Alignment indicates when the framing has moved to a new position CONFIG Configuration CRC 6 Cyclic Redundancy Check Code 6 is a method of error detection for link layer data transmissions CSU Customer Service Unitis a digital DCE used to terminate digital circuits i e DDS T1 lines at the customer site CTL Control CUFBER Current Framing Bit Error Rate CURBER Current Bit Error Rate dB Decibel is a unit of measure o
189. S7 VERSION SH TRUNK RATE 56k DISPLAY INPUT HEX ANSI CCITT CHINA24 CHINA14 Figure 90 SS7 Configuration The following items are present in the SS7 Configuration screen Line 1 Rx T S Options 1 24 Select the receive time slot for Line 1 by using the F keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 Line 2 Rx T S Options 1 24 Select the receive time slot for Line 2 by using the F keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 SS7 VERSION Options ANSI F1 CCITT F2 CHINA24 F3 CHINA14 F4 This line determines the SS7 protocol standard to be used during the analysis TRUNK RATE Options 56k F1 64k F2 Select the appropriate Trunk Rate Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 181 HEXINPUT Options YES F1 NO F2 Choose to enter the OPC DPC and CIC codes in either deci mal or hexadecimal in the SETUP FILTER screen Select YES F1 to enter these codes in hex or NO F2 for decimal entering HEX INPUT also determines how the codes are displayed in the tracer 182 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 MSU Monitor MSUs Message Signaling Units are used by ISUP TCAP and TUP messages They carry the content of the signaling message There are three menu items within the MSU Monitor selection Setup Filter Start Tracer e View Print Tracer 6 8 2 1 Setup Filter The Setup Filter screen allows you to select different param eters for filtering SS7 messages These parameters are used dur ing SS7 trace procedures Refer
190. SEG RES has a value of 82 In binary code this translates to 10000010 Since bit 1 0 this indicates no more data DATA This shows the rest of the data in hexadecimal form The arrow sign atthe right indicates that there is more data press the HEX F3 F key to view all the data in hex form Place the cursor on the DATA line an L4dec F4 F key appears This F key will bring up the Layer 4 decoded information This decodes several parts of the TCAP message Refer to Figure 96 The F keys available in Figure 95 are PAGE UP F1 Allows viewing of the other pages of data by show ing the previous message Pressing the PAGE UP F key would display the last message PAGE DN F2 Allows viewing of the other pages of data by show ing the next message Pressing the PAGE DN F key would dis play message 2 HEX F3 This F key displays the message in hexadecimal form L4deco F4 This F key appears only when the cursor is placed on the DATA line The L4 decode F key decodes several parts of the TCAP Layer 4 message Figure 96 shows the Layer 4 De code screen 21 10205 TCAP MESSAGE PACKAGE TYPE QRY With PER ORIG TRX ID 00000000h COMP TYPE Invoke Not Last Figure 96 Layer 4 Decoded TCAP Message 200 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B Figure 96 contains the following information PACKAGE TYPE Describes what kind of TCAP interaction has taken place between two signaling nodes Package Type is one octet l
191. SINGL mode in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen this line will be Line 1 If selecting T1 DUAL mode in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen this will be the line selected for TX INSERT Note The SunSet T10 will begin insertion only after the selected time slot number has been flashed five times This momentary delay ensures that you do not insert data on each time slot that is displayed as you move to the correct selection 230 SunSet T10 Rev B SCAN The SunSet T10 is in receive mode The SunSet T10 searches all time slots for an on hook to off hook transition When it finds this transition it locks on that time slot and waits for the digits The SunSet T10 will notify the user with the message In coming call on Channel 01 as appropriate The user may then accept or reject this call Rx CHNL F keys NEXT F1 PREV F2 SCAN F3 Assigns the receive channel fthetransmitandreceive channels are the same changing the transmit Tx channel will automatically change the receive channel fthese channels to be different select RXCHNL and use the F1 or F2 keys Refer to TXCHNL for more details Rx ABCD Displays the received signaling bits it is for viewing only Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 231 7 5 DTMF MF DP Analysis 21 10 05 DTMF MF DP ANALYSIS DIAL TYPE AUTO SCAN YES TX SPRVSN ER to start ON OFF ON WINK N A Figure 115 DTMF MF DP Analysis To enter DIMF MF DP AN
192. SUMMARY screen E Pull out the bantam cable on the SunSet T10 wait a few seconds and put it back in F The UAS unavailable second counter continues to count for 10 seconds after the cable is plugged back in and then decreases by 10 Ch 1 Initial Set up 19 G The ERRORS and BIT ERROR LEDs flash red Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the flashing LEDs H Press the PAGE DN F2 F key to observe the other measurements There are seven available screens Pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 12 Select OTHERMEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA A Press the PAUSE F3 F key B Press the PAGE DN F2 F key to observe the FOX message in the ASCII column Displayed is the binary and hex protocol This data is presented by timeslot number within consecutive frames C Verify that 60 screens are available D Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu 13 Select PROPAGATION DELAY A Verify that RND TRIP DELAY is 0 or 1 UI B Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu 14 Select QUICK TEST I A Select TICKET and press the TOGGLE F3 F key to access the character grid B Press the SELECT F4 F key to choose the letter A C Move the cursor to B it begins flashing and press the SELECT F4 F key to choose it D Move the cursor to C it begins flashing and press the SELECT F4 F key to choose it E Press the T
193. SunSet T10 s graphics the HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS and PULSE MASK ANALYSIS results will not print eventhough the PRINT F Key is available 4 0 Additional Controls Contrast Control This control adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen It is lo cated on the left hand side of the SunSet T10 42 SunSet T10 49 Rev 5 0 Remote Control SW100 Remote Site Host Location RS232 cable ar Torio A 2 Serial Port Telephone Line Modem Modem j Figure 15 Remote Control Typical Layout Controlling the SunSet T10 through the optional remote con trol is similar to controlling the SunSet T10 directly Remote con trol allows a remote user and a local user to use the SunSet T10 together at the same time This simultaneous usage feature can help a team of people fix a problem Refer to Figure 11 for a diagram of the pin to pin assignments of the DIN to EIA 232 C cable supplied by Sunrise Telecom Re fer to Figure 12 for the pin to pin assignments of the Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter A breakout box null modem patch box and other RS 232C communications tools maybe needed to set up serial communi cations Configure the SunSet T1O as a DTE A modified null modem cable is required to connect directly to a terminal To modify con nect pin 20 DTR of the modem or terminal to pin 5 CTS of the SunSet T10 DB25 connector Pin 5 of the SunSet T10 DB25 con nector must show green on the break
194. T indicator C Use the keypad to enter the number D Press the 1 key once the multiplier position is showing 1 The cursor moves to the exponent position E Press the 6 key once the 6 is entered F Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 5 Press the ENTER key on the keypad The SunSet T10 is now programmed to inject bit errors ata rate of 1x10 6 each time the ERRINJ key on the keypad is pressed Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 287 10 4 Other Parameters 13 28 00 OTHER PARAMETE ERN INVERSION iE CODE ERR BEEP E CONTROL ERN LOCK E MISMATCH MSG E DISABLE Figure 152 Other Parameters The OTHER PARAMETERS menu contains the following items PATTERN INVERSION Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 When enabled transmitted pattern inversion turns ones into zeros and zeros into ones Forinstance a3 in 24 pattern turns into a 21 in 24 pattern and is then transmitted In addition the PAT SYNC LED will light only if the SunSet T10 receives the same inverted pattern as it transmits IDLE CHANNEL CODE Options 7F HEX F1 FF HEX F2 Useldle code during VF channel access operations when the Tx Source is set to the TESTPAT mode Usein fractional T1 testing to fill up unused channels AUDIBLE ERROR BEEP Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 When
195. T LINE 2 LINE 1 RX TX an NimH 15v TX RX T1 Equipment T1 Equipment Figure 179 Monitoring an In Service Voice Frequency Channel 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 BRIDGE or DSXMON FRAMING As specified by the circuit Tx CODING As specified by the circuit TX SOURCE THRU XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 339 2 Connectthe SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 179 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs 3 Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt VF MEA SUREMENTS 4 Select the desired transmit and receive channels and LISTEN SIDE from which to monitor The channel number is automati cally converted to a timeslot number on SF D4 ESF and SLC 96 A digroup DS1s The SunSet T10 refers to the framing type to make this conversion If another type of framing is used refer to Table 17 Channel Numbering and Table 18 Channel Numbering SLC 96 to determine which timeslot to specify 5 Adjustthe volume to the desired level by using the volume keys on the keypad Note If unable to monitor the channel verify that frame synchro nization is present If it is not press the AUTO key on the keypad If framing is still not achieved change the RxLvL in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen The SunSet T10 cannot perform
196. T1 line The voice conversation a 4 kHz analog bandwidth is transmitted through the network Through the Nyquist theorem 8000 samples per second are taken in order to achieve the 4000 Hz bandwidth requirement As shown in Figure 225 PCM Sampling and u Law Encoding the analog signal is sampled at 125 uS intervals 8000 times per sec ond Each sample is a measurement of the voltage of the analog signal The voltage level is then converted to an 8 bit binary word An 8 bit word provides 256 different levels which is not enough to produce a quality sound To produce a quality sound a transformation is applied which puts a constant dB level in be tween each voltage step This creates a nonlinear relationship between the pulse amplitude and the level number but it is more pleasing to the ear because it provides a more constant signal to noise ratio at a wide range of volumes Each 8 bit word occupies one channel in one frame Because there are 24 channels available up to 24 conversations can be on the T1 signal 440 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 7 1 8 Switching An understanding of switching is helpful when troubleshooting T1 circuits 051 DS2 and 053 signals are plesiochronous that is they are not frequency locked with respect to each other The DS2 and 053 signals have stuff bits built into the framing This allows for slippage of all signals with respect to each other and not cause any transmission errors The frequencies are requ
197. T10 are the same as the transmitted A B C D bits from EQUIPMENT 1 Line 1 Tx 1 A B C D bits for the SunSet T10 should also be the same as the received A B C D bits at EQUIPMENT 2 7 Check the other channels by repeating step 6 Both EQUIP MENT 1 and EQUIPMENT 2 should not be disturbed 8 Repeat the same checks for LINE 2 Ch 4 Applications 357 2 4 Advanced Talk Listen Advanced Talk Listen allows use of different access modes signaling and other additional features Use the Simple Talk Lis ten procedure as a reference for this procedure 1 2 Verify thatthe spanis notin service if a disruptive access mode is used Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION configure as needed Tx SOURCE NORMAL In the TERM mode the SunSet T1O drops and inserts on the selected channels and fills the other 23 channels with idle code The received signal is terminated at the SunSet T10 and is not retransmitted Tx SOURCE THRU In THRU mode the talk listen will be performed on the LINE 1 or the LINE 2 side of a full duplex circuit The other 23 channels of that side will be transmitted without disruption All 24 channels of the other side will be transmitted without disruption There willbe a momentary hiton both sides when the SunSet T10 is plugged into the circuit and when it is unplugged There will also be a hit if access modes are changed from one side to the other side Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit according
198. TEI 1 INTERFACE 2 INTERFACE 47B D CONFIG DISABLE Figure 88 ISDN Other Parameters Line 1 D chnl Options 1 24 This specifies the Line 1 D channel for ISDN 23B D 46B 2D and 47B D Use the F Keys NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select a D channel L2Bkup D chnl Options 1 24 This specifies the backup D channel for Line 2 for 46B 2D In 46B 2D one D channel is active at a time the other channel is in standby mode and can become active if the first D channel should go out of service View the status of the B channels in the Backup D Channel Test Use the F Keys NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select a D channel Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 177 The following items use these F keys INC 10 F1 Increment the selection by ten INC 1 F2 Increment the selection by one DEC 10 F3 Decrement the selection by ten DEC 1 F4 Decrement the selection by one Layer 2 SAPI Options 0 63 F Keys INC 10 F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 10 F3 DEC 1 F4 The Service Access Point Identifier identifies the point where Layer 2 services are provided to a Layer 3 entity Select a number between 0 63 for the SAPI value At this time there are four assigned SAPI values 0 Call Control Procedures 1 Packet Mode using Q 931 call procedures 16 Packetcommunications conforming to X 25 Level 3 procedures 63 Layer2 management procedures Notes All other values are reserved fo
199. TION or T1DUAL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for Tx INSERT is set to L1 Tx Line 1 The display will show Tx 2 T S Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 221 when you have selected T1 DUAL under TEST CONFIGURA TION and the value for Tx INSERT is set to L2 Tx Line 2 Use the F keys NEXT F1 PREV F2 to select the time slot value to which you will insert signals via Line 1 Tx 1 or Line 2 Tx 2 Note The SunSet T10 will begin insertion only after the selected time slot number has flashed five times This momentary delay ensures that you do not insert data on each time slot that is dis played as you move to the correct selection Rx 1 T S Options 1 24 Usethis field to enter the received time slot value if 1 T1SINGL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION or 2 T1DUAL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION andthe value for Rx DROP is set to L1 Rx Line 1 Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select the time slot value from which you will drop signals via Line 1 Tx 1 As the transmit time slot is changed the receive time slot automatically changes However you can manually change the receive time slot if necessary Rx 2 T S Options 1 24 Use this field to enter the received time slot value if 1 T1DUAL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION and the value for Rx DROP is set to L2 Rx Line 2 If T1SINGL was selected under TEST CONFIGURATION this field will read N A
200. TS Using the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 F keys access the LINE 1 SIGNAL screen Verify thatthe L VL is 3 00V 10 and that the LVL is 3 00V 10 Verify that the FREQ is 1544000 1 Hz Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 10 Connect a single bantam to single bantam cord from LINE 2 TX to LINE 2 464 SunSet T10 9 Rev B 11 Select TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L2 Tx Rx DROP L2 Rx RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING SF D4 Tx CODING AMI XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 12 If necessary press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge any flashing history LEDs Verify that the PULSES SF and PAT SYNC LEDs are green 13 Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS Using the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys access the LINE 1 SIGNAL screen Verify that the LVL is 3 00V 10 and that the LVL is 3 00V 10 14 Verify that the FREQ is 1544000 1 Hz 15 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU The calibration procedure is now complete Ch 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 465 3 0 Customer Information 3 1 Customer Service General Sunrise Telecom Customer Service is available from 7 30 AM to 5 30 PM Pacific Standard Time California U S A Customer Service performs th
201. Teleos Call Monitor Setup Screen 219 110 VF Channel Access Menu 220 111 VF Measurements Setup Screen 221 112 View Line 1 amp 2 CAS 225 113 Dial Supervision Setup 226 114 Place Receive Calls Menu 229 115 DTMF MF DP Analysis 232 116 DTMF MF DP Analysis Screen 1 234 117 DTMF MF DP Analysis Screen 2 234 118 Noise Analysis Menu 235 119 MF Tracer Screen 236 120 MF View Tracer Screen 238 121 Signaling Analysis AB Bits 239 122 Signaling Analysis DECODE 240 123 Monitor TMC CSC Menu 241 124 TMC Configuration Screen 242 125 TMC Filter 243 126 Start Tracer Screen 247 127 View Print Tracer 249 128 View Tracer with Post filter 250 129 Release Message 251 130 Setup Message 252 131 TMC Statistics 254 132 Send Message Menu 255 133 Message Composer 256 134 Message Composer with Layer 3 257 135 EOC Setup Screen 259 136 EOC Filter Selection 261 137 EOC Statistics Page 1 262 138 EOC Statistics Page 2 263 139 Frame Relay Menu 264 140 Frame Relay Configuration 266 141 LMI Analysis 269 142 PVC Status Screen 270 143 Ping Test Configuration 271 144 Ping Test in Progress 273 145 PING Response Screen 274 474 SunSet T10 49 Rev Figures con t 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 Index Other Features Menu 275 System C
202. Testing 345 2 1 1 FT1 Circuit Acceptance Test Procedure 347 8 SunSet T10 amp Rev B Chapter 4 Applications con t 2 2 SLC 96 TeSting uidet on tee ent ae 349 2 2 1 SLC 96 Data Link Monitoring 351 2 2 2 Out of service SLC 96 Testing 353 2 3 In Service Hitless Dual Drop amp Insert THRU Testing 355 2 4 Advanced Talk 358 2 5 Testing SUPERTRUNK VF 05 0 362 3 0 Datacom 364 3 1 Point to Point Datacom Testing 364 3 2 Fault Location with Remote amp Local Loopbacks 367 3 3 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex 370 3 4 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplexer 373 4 0 ISDN Applications eeem 378 4 1 ISDN PRI Call Setup seee 378 4 2 ISDN PRI Monitoring eeee 380 4 3 ISDN PRI Data Call 383 4 4 Emulate a ISDN Network Terminal or PBX 385 4 5 46B 2D Call Setup 386 4 6 47 0 Call 388 4 7 Receiving Two Simultaneous B Channel Calls 3
203. Then press the PAGE DN F2 F key to scroll through the data The datais presented asit appears onthe T1 bitstream The data is broken out into timeslots Use Table 17 Channel Numbering and Table 18 Channel Numbering SLC 96 to convert from timeslot number to channel number 7 Figure 178 shows an example of the ten bit pattern 1011 1111 1 8 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Channel Numbering T S D3 D4 D1D D2 1 1 1 12 2 2 13 13 3 3 2 1 4 4 14 17 5 5 3 5 6 6 15 21 7 7 4 9 8 8 16 15 9 9 5 3 10 10 17 19 11 11 6 7 12 12 18 23 13 13 7 11 14 14 19 14 15 15 8 2 16 16 20 18 a 18 18 21 22 19 19 10 10 20 20 22 16 21 21 11 4 2 22 2 2 23 12 8 24 24 24 24 Table 17 Channel Numbering 330 SunSet T10 p Rev B Channel Numbering SLC 96 T S SHLFA SHLF B SHLFC SHLF D 1 1 25 49 73 2 13 37 61 85 3 2 26 50 74 4 14 38 62 86 5 3 27 51 75 6 15 39 63 87 7 4 28 52 76 8 16 40 64 88 9 5 29 53 77 10 17 41 65 89 11 6 30 54 78 12 18 42 66 90 B 7 31 55 79 14 19 43 67 et 15 8 32 56 80 16 20 44 68 92 17 9 33 57 81 18 21 45 69 19 10 34 58 82 20 22 46 70 94 21 11 35 59 83 22 23 47 71 95
204. URATION sec 10 2 ERROR INJECTION sec 10 3 OTHER PARAMETERS sec 10 4 VIEW TEST RECORD sec 10 5 PRINT RECORDS sec 10 6 LOAD SAMPLES sec 10 7 FRAME RELAY SW 194 CONFIGURATION sec 9 9 LMI ANALYSIS sec 9 2 PING TEST sec 9 3 PING RESPONSE sec 9 4 LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL OTHER MEASUREMENTS CSU amp NI CONTROL sec 3 1 TELTREND OFFICE RPTR SW 184 sec 3 2 TELTREND LINE RPTR SW 184 sec 3 3 WESTELL OFFICE RPTR SW 184 sec 3 4 WESTELL LINE RPTR SW 184 sec 3 5 WESTELL NIU PM amp MSS SW 184 sec 3 6 TELTREND MSS SW 184 sec 3 7 HDSL SPAN CONTROL sec 3 8 VIEW RECEIVED DATA sec 6 1 PROPAGATION DELAY sec 6 2 QUICK TEST sec 6 3 QUICK TEST II sec 6 3 BRIDGE TAP DETECT sec 6 4 PULSE MASK ANALYSIS SW 190 sec 6 5 DDS MEASUREMENTS SW 188 sec 6 6 ISDN PRIMARY RATE SW 186 sec 6 7 SS7 ANALYSIS SW 189 sec 6 8 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT SW 191 sec 6 9 SWITCHED 56 TESTING SW 187 sec 6 10 Note Some menu items are offered only as software options and may not appear on your SunSet T10 Parentheses containing the SW option number indicate such menu items Figure 16 SunSet T10 Menu Tree Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 47 1 0 Introduction The SunSet T10 uses a menu driven format Before entering a menu item it must be selected highlighted by using the arrow keys on the keypad A selected item is easily re
205. VF Measurements 221 7 2 View Supervision sseessssssneeeeeeennnes 225 7 8 Dial Supervision Setup 226 7 4 Place Receive Calls 229 7 5 DTMF MF DP Analysis eene 232 7 6 Noise Analysis SW 183 235 Taf ME TACE ite tie heels 236 dol dH METI368D 2 LL 236 7 7 2 MF View Print Tracer eeee e 238 7 8 Signaling Analysis sssssssseeeeneenee 239 8 0 GR 303 Monitor SW193 241 8 1 Monitor TMC 241 8 1 1 Configuration sssssssssseeeeeeeneeennenn 242 81 2 By Ga a eer ente eere temet 243 8 1 2 1 Pre and Post Filtering sees 246 8 1 3 Start Tracer E eene 247 8 1 4 View Print Buffer eeeeseee esse eeeaees 249 8 1 5 254 8 1 6 Send Messages 255 8 2 EOC Verification 259 9 2 EOC Selup to attt erret teet te its 259 8 2 2 EOC Statistics e edet stet nas 262 6 SunSet T10 Rev Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions con t 9 0 Frame Relay SW194 sss 264 9 1 Frame Relay Configuration
206. Y 000008 they are NOTE and WP1B which are 16 bit formats WP1 which is a 13 bit format MAJOR Indicates a major alarm on the data link MINOR Indicates a minor alarm on the data link POWER Indicates a power alarm A SHLF Indicates an A shelf alarm B SHLF Indicates a B shelf alarm C SHLF Indicates a C shelf alarm D SHLF Indicates a D shelf alarm PROTECT LINE SWITCH Displays the switch to protection line switch message C BITS Indicates the eleven C Bits A FELP Indicates an A digroup far end loop B FELP Indicates a B digroup far end loop C FELP Indicates a C digroup far end loop D FELP Indicates a D digroup far end loop P FELP Indicates a Protection digroup far end loop M BITS Indicates the three M bits 294 SunSet T10 Rev B 11 1 2 Send Message 13 28 00 Figure 157 SLC 96 Send Message The SunSet T1O displays an English language table of mes sages that can be sent on the SLC 96 data link Before entering this menu confirm that 1 The TEST CONFIGURATION screen is set up as follows TERM SLC 96 Tx SOURCE NORMAL for T1SINGL or TxSOURCE TESTPAT for T1 DUAL 2 The transmit and receive cords must plugged into the circuit and the SunSet T10 Refer to the applications chapter for diagrams on how to plug in the SunSet T10 into the circuit The following items are within Figure 157 MODE Determines which SLC 9
207. YPE Select TYPE and choose either IN BAND F1 or ESF DL F2 CODE Select CODE and choose the code depending upon the equipment to be looped back MODE Select LOOP UP F1 to loop the circuit up before testing Select LOOP DN F2 to restore the circuit to normal once testing is complete Oncethe loopback operation is finished an appropriate mes sage will appear on screen Pressthe ESCAPE key on the keypad three times to return to the MAIN MENU 3 1 2 Select a User Loopback Code 1 In the CSU amp NI CONTROL menu select CODE and press the USER F4 F key Be sure to press the USER F4 F key even if the USER item is already displayed as the selected CODE entry This allows access to the USER LOOPBACK CODE screen Selectthe desired loopback code and press the ENTER key on the keypad Press the ENTER key on the keypad to begin the loopback operation and proceed to step 4 of the Basic Loopback Procedure Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 75 3 1 1 3 1 1 2 76 3 View a User Loopback Code In the CSU amp NI CONTROL menu select CODE and press the USER F4 F key Be sure to press the USER F4 F key even if the USER item is already displayed as the selected CODE entry This allows access to the USER LOOPBACK CODE screen Selectthe desired loopback code and press the VIEW F1 F key The selected pattern will be displayed Whenfinished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to r
208. ached Setup the CONFIGURATION and OTHER PARAMETERS screens according to the circuit Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until START LINK CALL SETUP is reached Check to see if a READY message is displayed This signifies that the D channel is running Set up the call by pressing the CALL F3 F key Enter the desired parameters Press the CALL F key to place a call 378 SunSet T10 7 Rev B Note The SunSet T10 is able to call itself which allows the test ing of two channels at once This call must be acknowledged When the SunSet T10 rings or displays the Receive a Call mes sage press the ACC LOOP F3 F key to accept the looped call When finished press either DISC 1 or the DISC 2 F keys to disconnect the line Central Office or PBX Figure 194 ISDN Call Setup TE Mode Customer Premises Figure 195 ISDN Call Setup NT Mode 8 A SEND L1 CONNECTION ACKNOWLEDGE message should be observed When finished with the call press the DISC F2 F key to disconnect 9 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 379 4 2 ISDN PRI Monitoring 1 The following procedure illustrates placing an ISDN call This test may be performed while the PRI line is in service 2 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx RxLVL 1 DSXMON RxLVL 2 DSXMON
209. actional T1 circuit travels as a bundle through the various network elements and transmission media If individual channels should become split onto two different transmission paths the transmission delay of the two paths will probably be different The function of the CSU in the fractional T1 circuit shown in Figure 181 has already been covered Other elements serve dif ferent functions For instance the 1x0 DCS Digital Cross con nect System is used to cross connect the incoming fractional T1 line onto the desired transport line The 1x0 DCS allows many fractional T1 circuits to be combined with other channelized cir cuits onto more densely packed T1s The idle channels are sim ply discarded as they pass into the DCS This reduces costs by providing highest utilization fill on the T1 paths in the long haul portion of the network The M13 or 3x1 DCS allows the grouping of many T1s onto selected higher speed transmission paths for long haul transport The fractional circuit passes through a similar group of network elements at the far end of the circuit 346 SunSet T10 p Rev B 2 1 1 FT1 Circuit Acceptance Test Procedure Central Office 1X0 DCS To Far pP m 3 a FTi CSU I ILL DIETE TT TET Near End FT1 CSU Figure 182 Plugging into the FT1 Circuit This is an acceptance test for a fractional T1 circuit It is an advanced procedure that should be attempted on
210. ad to return to the CALL SETUP screen 9 When receiving another call the SunSet T10 displays another RECEIVE A CALL message The ACC TERM F2 and ACC LOOP F3 F keys are now available Pressing the INFO F1 F key displays information about both calls Shown in Figure 201 is sample INFO screen 21 10 05 gL 579 DIR RECEIVE ERM Bch LN LINE VOICE CHANNEL 3 4083638000 2 580 DIR CFG LOOP Bch ER VOICE CHANN ID EMPTY Figure 201 Receive a Call INFO Screen 10 When finished disconnect from either call by pressing one of the following F keys DISC 1 F2 for CALL No 1 or DISC 2 F3 for CALL No 2 11 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 391 5 0 SS7 Applications This application demonstrates how the SunSet T10 can re ceive SS 7 messages In the following procedure two SS7 nodes SSPs are sending basic call procedure messages to each other The SunSet T10 can receive and decode these messages to monitor the call procedure Figure 202 shows part of the SS7 network 027 024 000 036 032 000 ISUP Messages IAM ACM ANM RLC REL Figure 202 SS7 Network Testing The following is a common configuration setting when testing a link Use the following proc
211. al is present the SunSet T10 uses its internal clock as a reference In this case the screen will still display the Min Max Avg fre quency of the received signal but it will not display any clock slip or wander information Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 125 CLKSLIP Clock Slip is the net value of the negative and positive wander WANDER Maximum positive phase difference between the mea sured frequency and the reference frequency since the beginning of the test A signal whose frequency is wandering i e whose frequency alternately goes faster and then slower than the refer ence frequency will show both positive and negative wander WANDER Maximum negative phase difference between the mea sured frequency and the reference frequency since the beginning of the test 126 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 2 Datacom Measurement Results The measurement results for Datacom Mode are on one screen the DATACOM BIT ERROR screen Refer to Figure 53 21 10 05 ET 000 02 44 RT CONTINU TYPE MODE DTE RATE RxHz 48000 RCV ALT10 XMT ALT10 DATACOM ERROR 0 E 0 0e 07 0 SE 00 000 0 E 00 000 I 100 100 00 000 00 000 HOLDSCR PRN SAV STOP Figure 53 Datacom Bit Error Screen Defined as follows are the measurements in Figure 53 BIT This is a count of the number of bit errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test There is no count during unavail able seconds RATE This is th
212. all state mismatch The RDT may also send this message in a STATUS message if it believes there is a call state mismatch In addition the IDT and RDT may send this message to indicate call clearing due to a call failure event like a timer expiry or if a resource becomes unavailable during the call 44 Line Unit Unavailable Sent by the IDT RDT to reject a call setup when the line termination as indicated by the CRV is incapable of providing service After receiving a Release Complete message with this cause value the RDT IDT immediately stops call establishment 47 Ring Failure Sent by the RDT to reject call establishment when the line indicated by the CRV fails the ring pre trip test 81 Invalid Call Reference Sent by the RDT IDT to reject a message that contains an invalid call reference value 96 Mandatory Element Missing Sent by the RDT IDT to reject a message that does not contain a required information element 97 Message Unimplemented Sent by the RDT IDT to reject an unrecognizable message 99 Information 35 Distribution Channel Unavailable Sent by the RDT IDT to indicate that it did not Sent by the RDT to reject call establishment when Element recognize an information element in the received Unimplemented message 100 Invalid Sent by the RDT IDT to reject a message that Information Element Contents Table 22 Ch 5 Reference contains an invalid informat
213. alue must be selected in FRAME RELAY CONFIGURATION LOCAL IP Enter the IP address of the local side that will send the PING Use the following procedure to enter the number 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enter the numbers directly from the keypad If a mistake is made A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 271 B Use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the incorrect entry C Pressthe SHIFT key onthekeypad the SHIFT indicator appears D Enter the correct number directly from the keypad DEST IP Enter the destination IP address to receive the PING Use the following procedure to enter the number 1 Press the SHIFT key onthe keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enter the numbers directly from the keypad If a mistake is made use the procedure described in LOCAL IP NLPID Options IP F1 SNAPIP F2 The NLPID network level protocol identifier identifies the protocol or encapsulation type used in the frame IP Internet protocol SNAPIP Sub network access protocol IP Referto Network Working Group document RFC 1490 TIMEOUT Options 1 10 seconds F Keys INC 1 F1 DEC 1 F2 Determines how long in seconds the SunSet T10 will wait for aresponse before declaring a PING as unreachable UsethelNC 1 F1 or DEC 1 F2 F keysto setthis parameter NO OF PINGS Options 1 99 F Keys INC 1 F
214. ameter for T1 ser vices Acceptance limits rate the number of errored seconds in a 5 minute 15 minute or 24 hour period 7 errored seconds in 5 minutes and 20 errored seconds in 15 minutes are common ac ceptance limits and 60 errored seconds in 5 minutes is a com mon immediate action limit Some organizations accept no errors on a turn up test The measurement is attractive because it takes out the ef fects of burstiness on service performance and it measures the quality of service as the user actually experiences it EFS This is a count of error free seconds since the beginning of the test ES This is a count of the percentage of errored seconds as defined in ES This percentage is calculated by the formula 9eES ES ASx100 EFS This is a count of percentage of error free seconds since the beginning of the test Usage EFS is used for evaluating T1 services Data cus tomers typically expect this number to be anywhere from 95 to 99 5 or higher EFS and AS are the two most significant parameters in gauging the quality of T1 service delivered to the customer SES This is the number of severely errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test An SES is a second with a 10 error rate where error rate is measured from bit errors BPV errors framing bit errors and CRC 6 errors An out of frame error will also generate a SES There is no count of SES during un available seconds Usage This measurement
215. and SPRM PRM F4 RESTART Restarts the measurement HOLDSCR CONTINU Freezes the screen for observation To up date press the CONTINU F key SPRM PRM Allows access to the supplementary performance report or the performance report messages Refer to Figure 161 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 299 The following items appear in the MONITOR T1 403 PRM Screen ELAPS TIME Total amount of time that has passed since the start of data link monitoring DETEC TIME Total amount of time during the elapsed time that the SunSet T1O has detected valid data link messages CRC 1 Number of seconds in which exactly 1 CRC 6 error was reported C lt 5 Number of seconds that 2 to 5 CRC 6 errors were reported C lt 10 Number of seconds that 6 to 10 CRC 6 errors were re ported C lt 100 Number of seconds that 11 to 100 CRC 6 errors were reported C lt 319 Number of seconds that 101 to 319 CRC 6 errors were reported C gt 320 Number of seconds that 320 or more CRC 6 errors were reported SEFE Number of severely errored framing events that were reported FSBEE Number of reported frame synchronization bit error events BPV Number of seconds during which at least one bipolar viola tion was reported SLIP Number of seconds during which at least one frame slip occurred PLB sec Number of seconds during which the device is looped back YEL sec Number of seconds during which at least one yellow alarm message was receiv
216. annot be config ured within this screen they are TIME Time begins counting up from 000 00 mmm ss as soon as the span is armed This indicates how much time is remaining until the repeater automatically drops its loopback This usually occurs because of the repeater s time out circuitry STATUS The Status bar displays the current looping status of the span SPAN CTRL The Span control line shown ARMED in Figure 32 displays which span control function is currently under process or has been completed Configure the items appearing below the diagram in Figure 32 Those items are Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 81 SPAN CTRL The exact options available depend upon the FRAMING se lected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen ESF Framing ARM DL F1 UNARMDL F2 TOUTDIS LPBkQRY more F1 PWLPQRY more F2 PWCUTTH more F3 UNIVLDN more F1 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 SF D4 Framing ARM INB F1 TOUTDIS F3 LPBkQRY more F1 PNLPQRY more F2 PNCUTTH more F3 UNIVLDN more F1 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 ARM DL INB This arms the office repeater and line repeaters on the span In most cases ARM INB and ARM DL have the same function UNARMDL This unarms the data link TOUTDIS Time out disable will turn off the automatic time out of the repeaters on the span If pressed be sure to loop down all the repeaters on the span when finished LPBkQRY Loopback query will query all the
217. ard if the volume is set high enough 11 The call should now be completed and a Talk Listen test can now be performed Ch 4 Applications 363 3 0 Datacom Applications 3 1 Point to Point Datacom Testing In this application the SunSet T10 DTE is connected to a modem DCE to perform a simple BERT test The V 35 interface will be used This test will allow the SunSet T10 to send and re ceive signals with a DCE 1 Verify that the datacom circuit is not in service This test will disrupt the service 2 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE DATACOM TYPE as required by interface for this example use V 35 MODE DTE TEST RATE as required by modem REF CLOCK INTERN Note If the SunSet T1O supplies the timing source select IN TERN for REF CLOCK If the SunSet T10 is using timing from the network select RECEIVE When the SunSet T10 uses received timing the test rate selection is not significant since the SunSet T10 will use its received rate When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 3 Connectthe SunSetT10 to the modem as shown in Figure 188 Datacom Cable SCSI 36 to DB37 Interface rd SunSet p n 58308 Figure 188 Modem Testing with Datacom V35 364 SunSet T1O Rev 4 Select SEND TEST PATTERN and select a pattern Certain pa
218. are arranged according to their place in the SLC 96 data link This screen can be useful for those applications that do not follow TR TSY 000008 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 297 11 2 Data Link Control ESF 13 28 00 DATA LINK CONTROL ESF MONITOR T1 403 PRM MONITOR T1 403 NPRM MONITOR T1 403 BOM SEND T1 403 PRM SEND T1 403 BOM RTRV 54016 PM CNTR PRINT 54016 RESULTS Figure 159 Data Link Control ESF DATALINK CONTROL ESF is provided when ESF framing is selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen Select from MAIN MENU gt DATALINK CONTROL and refer to Figure 159 298 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 11 2 1 Monitor T1 403 PRM 13 DATA LINK MONITOR T1 403 PS TIME 000 03 40 EC TIME 000 01 21 C 5 lt 100 C gt 320 SLIP YELsec U1 ET C e C SE BE PL R U ESTART HOLDSCR Figure 160 Monitor T1 403 PRM The MONITOR T1 403 PRM screen allows viewing of the T1 403 performance report message as reported on the ESF data link real time end to end performance information when the circuit is in service how many seconds has elapsed since a payload loopback message has appeared acountof yellow alarm second messages thetotal elapsed time monitoring the data link how much time it took to receive a valid T1 403 data link message Options RESTART F1 HOLDSCR CONTINU F2
219. arious ways to plug the SunSet T10 into the circuit SN SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT fLINE2 _LINE1_ NmHi5V TX RX TX RX 9 nmn SN i E alle Note The MON jack be from a DSX or other T1 network equipment Figure 169 Plugging in DSXMON Mode SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2 rie d Raney TX RX T RX x o ollo all Ss eae Figure 170 Plugging in BRIDGE Mode MON NA 7 x Figure 171 Plugging in TERM Mode 314 SunSet T10 p Rev B 1 2 Accepting a New Span Loopback Test Central Office 7 SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2 LINE 1 NimH 15V La T m pes s 62 ex dee lS ALY k Q 2 Customer Premises Figure 172 Accepting a New T1 Span 1 Verify that the span is not in service This acceptance test will disrupt service Find out the type of loopback device installed atthe end of the span and the loopback codes that operate it 2 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 54
220. as it passes through various network elements except fractional T1 circuits hence it depicts the overall transmission quality from the far end of the circuit to the SunSet T10 A limitation with this measurement is that it only measures one out of every 193 bits and so it gives only a sampling of the true transmission performance Another drawback is that it can not measure the quality of transmission on the two outgoing di rections of transmission FBE can measure the quality only on the two incoming directions of transmission FSLIP This is a count of line frame slips that have occurred since the beginning of the test A frame slip occurs each time the phase of the line under test has deviated from the phase of the reference clock by 193 bits 118 SunSet T10 7 Rev Usage FSLIPs are useful for finding frequency synchroniza tion problems in the network Frequency synchronization can be the source of problems for channelized HICAP services that carry data and face a switch or a 1x0 digital cross connect system FBER This is the framing bit error rate measured since the begin ning of the test Usage Refer to the usage of FBE This rate is a way of sum marizing the information that is independent of the actual mea surement period CUFBER This is the current framing bit error rate Usage This measurement is useful for determining if the cir cuit recently had major error problems However the limitation of this measure
221. as occurred somewhere between the measurement point and the origin of the ESF framed signal Any 438 SunSet T1O Rev B monitoring device along the line can do the same division pro cess and compare its remainder to the CRC 6 bits The FDL is a 4 kbps data channel that allows terminal to terminal communications on an in service circuit One example of in service communication is the performance report message broadcasted once per second on an in service circuit This mes sage is discussed later in the End to end Performance Monitor ing section in this chapter The FDL also provides a secure com munication channel that the customer cannot influence For in stance ESF NIU loopback commands are transmitted on the data link so that there is no chance that the customer s own payload data will accidentally loop up the NIU The SLC 96 framing is used on AT amp T s SLC 969 product line The framing supports a broad variety of maintenance func tions such as alarm transmission automatic switching to protec tion line and far end loop back The DS1 link in between the cen tral office terminal and the remote terminal uses SLC 96 framing Ch 5 Reference 439 7 1 7 PCM Step 1 Sampling the Signal 125 uS Step 2 Conversion 256 Amplitude Number Signal Voltage Figure 225 PCM Sampling and p Law Encoding PCM Pulse Code Modulation is a technology that allows digitization of a voice conversation and inserting it on a
222. as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select SEND TEST PATTERN and choose 1 8 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note 1 8 is the normal pattern to use for ISDN applications QRS may bring down the switch 4 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 194 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six consecutive ones together with two zeroes should be displayed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 or 11110011 If not observed then the D channel is not set up to handle ISDN messages Escape and select ISDN PRIMARY RATE Set up the CON FIGURATION and OTHER PARAMETERS screens ac cording to the circuit Make sure to set up EMULATE TYPE to TEin CONFIGURATION Escapeandselect START LINK CALL SETUP Verify thatthe READY indicator is at the top ofthe screen This indicates that the D Channelis operational When receiving a call the SunSet T10 displays a RECEIVE A CALL message Press the ACC TERM F2 F key to accept 390 SunSet T10 7 Rev B the first call in a terminated mode Press the INFO F1 F key for more information on the first call Press the ESCAPE key on the keyp
223. at T1 DUAL is selected the TEST CONFIGURATION screen The MF tracer menu offers two options MF TRACER This function traces the received ABCD bits for both lines with time and date information MF VIEW PRINT TRACER This function allows the user to view and print specific MF ABCD bits with time and date information 7 7 1 MF Tracer 2135102505 RX CHANL 21 L2 RX CHNL 18 E 1401 sec LINE 2 24 sec 00 INIT ABCD 00 INIT 00 000 01 568 01 768 01 968 02 168 02 368 02 568 02 768 ABCD 11 05 587 Figure 119 MF Tracer Screen MF TRACER traces the received ABCD bits and MF digits MF TRACER may be used to time winks or other changes of state in the ABCD bits Refer to Figure 119 In Figure 119 the SunSet T10 receives MF forward digits from Line 1 on time slot 1 The initial signaling state is shown for both Lines 1 and 2 Both start on hook 00 E amp M signaling Line 1 shows an off hook signal 11 followed by the digits 00 000 The KP be ginning of pulsing and ST end of pulsing codes represent control signals used in the MF system 236 SunSet T10 Rev B Notes Timerecords a 200 ms between digits this is a combination of the dial period and the silent period Shown in this screen are two F keys STOP F1 and RE START F3 Pressing the RESTART F key will erase any displayed results Pressing the STOP F key will stop the tracing for viewing After pressing the STOP
224. at position or press the DELETE F2 F key to Ch 4 Applications 337 remove one or more digits at that position The cursor may be moved to the right before pressing the INSERT or DELETE F keys Toggle into the character grid as described in steps 5 through 9 if needed 18 When done with the LABEL as described in step 17 confirm that the SHIFT indicator is off and that the character on the character grid has stopped blinking Then select the number line A If needed press the INSERT F1 F key to start inserting more digits atthat position orpressthe DELETE F2 F key to remove one or more digits at that position The cursor may be moved to the right before pressing the INSERT or DELETE F keys B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator to enter different numbers using the keypad 19 If a mistake is made while editing an existing user number press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to abort editing The original user number is not affected 20 When done press the ENTER key on the keypad the edited label will be displayed within the list Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 338 SunSet T10 p Rev 1 15 Monitor a Voice Frequency Channel This procedure is for monitoring a voice frequency channel within a T1 circuit Figure 179 illustrates the setup This test maybe performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic SERIAL PORT MULTI POR
225. ating network element such as a D4 channel bank PBX central office switch or 1x0 DCS sends a yellow alarm back to wards the other end when it receives a loss of frame Note that receiving an AIS means there is a loss of frame Terminating elements also need to condition the DSOs that the DS1 carries when the frame is lost For instance a D4 chan nel bank is to condition its channel cards to take them out of service Then it transmits an appropriate out of service signal to any low speed equipment Refer to Figure 227 for diagrams of how the transmission of AIS and yellow alarms works 444 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 7 1 13 Loopbacks Figure 228 DS1 Loopback Testing To quickly verify the performance of a new 051 circuit use loopback testing It can also greatly speed up the fault sectionalization process on a circuit that is not working properly A variety of equipment provides loopback capabilities newer central office repeaters newer regenerative line repeaters NIUs CSUs and M13 multiplexes Discussed in the previous DS1 equip ment section are the general characteristics of this equipment Figure 228 shows the variety of loopback points available from the central office for a fault sectionalization process Ch 5 Reference 445 7 1 14 End to End Performance Monitoring Central Office Performance Monitoring Equipment Customer Premises 5 0
226. atistics screen For example if filtering on DS1 5 only messages for DS1 5 are recorded Note Recorded at the bottom of the screen is the total TMC mes sage count This counts all valid TMC messages The following F keys are available for the TMC Statistics screen F keys Restart F1 Pause Resume F2 Count Restart This restarts the measurement and sets all counters to zero Pause Resume Pause stops the measurement All counters re main at the current value but do not increase Press the Resume F2 F key to return to live measurements COUNT Changes the results display to a percentage format Press Count to return to a count display 254 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 1 6 Send Messages The SEND MESSAGES menu item allows sending messages from the SunSet T10 to another piece of test equipment This has been included into this software option as a convenience item It is not part of any standard test Select MAIN MENU GR 303 MONITOR MONITOR TMC CSC gt SEND MESSAGES and the following screen is displayed 21 10 05 1 2 3 4 Su 6 Ts 8 9 0 1 Figure 132 Send Message Menu This menu facilitates sending user programmed messages Up to 20 messages may be stored To send a message use the following procedure 1 Select one of the messages 2 Press the SEND F3 F key The following F keys are available within this menu F keys DETAIL F1 HEX F2 SEND F3
227. available if UNFRAME or SF D4 is selected as framing in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen ESF and SLC 96 have different DATA LINK CONTROL menus each with different screens and options Section 11 1 pertains to SLC 96 framing and Section 11 2 to ESF 11 1 Data Link Control SLC 96 13 28 00 DATA LINK CONTROL SLC 96 MONITOR DATA LINK SEND MESSAGE VIEW DATA LINK Figure 155 Data Link Control SLC 96 Select SLC 96 framing in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen before proceeding Select MAIN MENU DATALINK CONTROL and refer to Figure 155 All capabilities are in conformance with Bellcore s standard TR TSY 000008 WARNING Using the SLC 96 send message capability can bring down anentire SLC system Before proceeding obtain proper training Monitoring the SLC datalink from a MON jack should not disrupt service Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 293 11 1 1 Monitor Data Link 13 28 00 DATA LINK MONITOR SLC 96 MODE F ELP MAJOR AI FELP MINOR 1 FELP POWER i FELP A SHLFE 1 FELP B SHLE CI Tn CLR C SHLF CI M2 CLR D SHLF Cl M3 CLR PROTECT LINE SW IDLE C BITS LILITIILTITTI HOLDSCR Figure 156 Monitor Data Link SLC 96 The DATA LINK MONITOR screen displays an English lan guage translation of the information in the SLC data link The following describes the items shown in Figure 156 MODE There are three data link modes specified in TR TS
228. ay Do not press SHIFT key simultaneously with another key on the keypad Press the SHIFT key again The SunSet T10 may not have registered it the first time Turnthe SunSetT 10 off wait 10 seconds and then turn it on again Problem Measurementis not working properly loss of signal no pattern synch Suggestions 1 A Verify signal TEST MODE and RxLVL 1 or RxLVL 2 settings in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen Verify that proper cable connections are in accordance with the circuit to the circuit graphic Make sure that OUT is plugged to IN and vice a versa Twistthe plugs inside the jacks and check for proper insertion Check continuity of the cables 462 SunSet T10 9 Rev B Problem Test Patterns will not synchronize Suggestions 1 2 Press RESYNCH on the keypad to force the SunSet T10 to re synchronize on the pattern framing type and line coding Verify that the sent pattern is the desired pattern Check this the SEND TEST PATTERN screen Verify that there is no AMI B8ZS mismatch Problem Test patterns will not synchronize with other test equipment Suggestions 1 2 Verify that PATTERN INVERSION is set for DISABLE in the OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAMETERS screen Use VIEW RECEIVED DATA to look at the pattern the other test set is sending Problem Voice Frequency section does not work Suggestions 1 Verify that the SunSet T10 has a valid framing type sho
229. be displayed in the lower portion of the screen 150 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 7 ISDN Primary Rate Menus SW186 ISDN Primary Rate provides a comprehensive analysis of the ISDN protocol based on the CCITT Q 931 standard The ISDN PRIMARY RATE menu shown in Figure 68 is accessed from MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt ISDN PRIMARY RATE 21 10 05 ISDN PRIMARY RATE START LINK CALL SETUP BACKUP D CHNL TEST SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACI OTHER PARAMETERS Lj DL n Figure 68 ISDN Primary Rate Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 151 152 6 7 1 ISDN Configuration CONFIGURATION configures EMULATION TYPE STAN DARD PROTOCOL TEST PATTERN for data calls and USER PATTERN for ISDN analysis Refer to Figure 69 21 10 05 CONFIGURATION EMULATE TYPE 931 STD NTI EST PATTERN 2047 USER PATTERN 00110011 Figure 70 Emulate Type SunSet T10 p Rev B EMULATE TYPE Options TE F1 NT F2 This configures the emulation mode for the SunSet T10 Fig ure 70 displays the two uses TE Terminating Equipment used when the SunSet T10 is emulating customer equipment TE uses the received signal to clock the transmitter NT Network Terminal is used when the SunSet T10 is emulat ing an ISDN switch such as a DMS 100 or 5ESS NT uses the SunSet T10 s internal clock Note When plugging the SunSet T10 into an ISD
230. blems caused in AMI Note The B8ZS LED will be green only if 8 consecutive data zeroes are observed on the line An AIS signal or other high density ones pattern will make it impossible for the SunSet T10 to determine line coding XMT CLOCK Options L1 Rx F1 L2 Rx F2 INTERN F3 The XMT CLOCK determines the timing source for the trans mitted signal the line selected as Tx INSERT The other Tx sig nal uses the timing recovered from its Rx signal For instance when TxINSERT L1 Tx and XMTCLK INTERN the L1 Tx sig nal uses the internal timing of the SunSet T10 The L2 Tx signal uses the recovered timing from L2 Rx When TxSource is set for THRU the XMT CLOCK selection defaults to the Tx Insert set ting There are four different timing scenarios possible from the three F Key options Loop Slave timing Slave to Slave timing External timing and Internal Master timing For Loop or Slave timing choose the same line for Tx INSERT and XMTCLK For instance if Tx INST 2 L1 Rx then XMT CLOCK should be L1 Rx In this case the exchange or network element is configured to be a master timing source in relation to the SunSet T10 Loop Slave timing is required when transmitting toward an ex change or other network element that requires synchronous signals Figure 22 provides a graphic illustration of Loop Slave timing SLAVE i 3 MASTER L1 Rx Exchange or other Timing L1 Tx Source T10 TEST CONFI
231. ceed only if it is able to verify that a loopback is established 88 SunSet T10 p Rev B 3 6 1 RTRV VIEW All PM RPT 21 10 05 RTRV VIEW ALL PM RPT LAST REPORT IS AVAILABLE SELECT OPTION SCRVIEW EW PRINT RMTDUMP DELE Figure 36 Retrieve View All PM Reports This command retrieves all the performance information from the NIU Refer to Figure 36 and use the following procedure 1 Select RTRV VIEW ALL PM RPT 2 Ifthis operation was performed after the NVRAM was erased skip to step 3 The SunSet T10 will then retrieve the data This will take several minutes to complete The operation is complete when Retrieving data changes to All PM reports retrieved A Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the WESTELL NIU PM amp MSS menu B Press the ENTER key on the keypad to re enter the RTRV VIEW ALL PM RPT menu 3 Ascreen will appear asking whether to Enable Printing Enter either YES F1 or No F2 4 Press the SCRVIEW F1 F key to view the performance data printed on the screen A Press the PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 F keys to view all the data B Ifadisplayed STAT message is unknown press the STATUS F3 F key to get an interpretation of the STAT code C Pressthe ESCAPE key on the keypad to get outof the STATUS interpretation screen and back to the performance results Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 89 5 Topollthe NIU again press the DELETE F4 F key
232. ceive jack Ch 2 Product Description 35 3 0 Connector Panel The connector panel shown in Figure 10 is located on the right side of the SunSet T10 Line 1 Use these jacks for both T1SINGL and T1DUAL access modes SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE a SUNE 1 4 Figure 10 SunSet T10 Connector Panel NimH 15V n X o olo o R Line 2 Use these jacks when T1DUAL is selected in the TEST CON FIGURATION screen Also use the Line 2 Rx jack as the refer ence frequency input in T1SINGL mode SERIAL PORT Use this port for sending information to the printer and for the optional remote control MULTI PORT This port is provided for Datacom testing NimH 15V The SS104 Cigarette Lighter Charger and the SS128 B Bat tery Charger plug into the DC jack Plugging the charger in enables the SunSet T10 to operate off a discharged battery e Thebattery will charge during operation while the SunSetT10is running on the charger 36 SunSet T10 49 Rev 3 1 Using the Battery amp AC Charger NOTICE Use only the charger supplied with the SunSet T10 Use of other chargers will void the warranty Designed to provide power for portable testing the battery uses a custom designed charger This charger is powerful enough to run the SunSet T10 continuously while keeping the battery charged The charger features fast charge which recharges a battery quickly Th
233. ch Nx64 kbps T1 timeslots to insert to and drop from the multiplexed signal Press Nx64K F1 to enter the T10 Time Slot screen Refer to section 2 1 Test Rate for details on selecting timeslots For RS232 only one time slot is allowed 68 SunSet T10 p Rev B 2 4 Datacom Operation Menus Datacom testing allows the SunSet T10 to send and receive signals with other data communication equipment Datacom uses a standard interface in order for two equipment elements to com municate with each other The standard protocols available are V 35 RS449 X 21 and RS232 Testing of only the low speed synchronous or asynchronous signal on the multiport is possible A graphic diagram of the SunSet T10 s configuration is not pro vided in the Datacom Mode 2 4 1 Datacom Test Configuration To use the SunSet T10 for Datacom testing set up as follows 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION 2 Select TEST MODE and press the DATACOM F4 F key 3 Ascreen similar to the one shown in Figure 28 appears 21210305 CONFIGURATION EST MODE DATACOM TYPE RS449 MODE DCE TEST RATE 05 49 REF CLOCK INTERN press Nx64K F3 to change test rate 48k Nx56k Nx64k more Figure 28 Datacom Configuration Menu TYPE Options V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 RS232 F4 TYPE determines the electrical interface at the multiport Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 69 MODE Options if TYPE is V 35 RS449 or X 21 DTE F1 DCE F2
234. chargeris intrickle charge mode When the LED barely flickers at all the battery is fully charged Ch 2 Product Description 37 3 2 Printing from the Serial Port The SunSet T10 is equipped with a standard serial port for printing and remote control operations 3 2 1 Serial Port Settings The Serial Port can be configured for baud rate parity stop bit bits character and carriage return line feed These settings are configured in MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG gt GENERAL CONFIG In general the SunSet T1O s se rial port settings will need to match the settings of the printer or remote control 3 2 2 Configuring for Printing An optional 55118 High Capacity Thermal Printer is available with the SunSet T10 This printer uses the 8 bit serial RS 232C port located at the top of the SunSet T10 The SS118 uses ther mal paper it has no ink cartridge or ribbon that needs replacing Many other serial printers are available to the user however not all of these printers will operate correctly with the SunSet T10 In addition to the optional 88118 printer the TTC PR40A printer will work although it requires an optional SS122C Null Modem Adapter Use this information to setup the SunSet T10 with another printer However Sunrise Telecom does not warrant the operation of the SunSet T10 with any printer other than the one supplied by Sunrise Telecom Pin to Pin Connections DIN 8 Pin EIA 232 C D Sub 1 13
235. chronous element which requires the SunSet T10 to be slave timed placing a voice or data call into a switch or DCS digital cross connect system This ensures that the signal will not slip and cause repetitive slips or stuffs which destroy circuit integrity Note Using L1 Rx in the wrong application such as loopback testing may cause a loss of signal Use L2 Rx if anexternal DS1 signal is needed to supply the L2 Rx jack in order to synchronize the signal coming out L1 Tx e areferenceclockis required for measuring frequency synchro nization and clock slips Note The L2 receiver jack maybe used in T1SINGL Mode but the receiver level of this jack cannot be controlled Use INTERN for most applications such as loopback testing simple talk listen point to pointtesting e anytime the SunSet T10 is to provide an independent signal Note If unsure of the correct XMT CLOCK setting choose IN TERN TEST RATE Options 1 544M F1 Nx56K F2 Nx64K F3 1 544M Used for normal T1 and DS1 testing Nx56K Use where the fractional circuit is any number 1 24 of 56 kbps channels within the DS1 In this case the SunSet T10 will transmit a 1 in the eighth least significant bit of each fractional T1 channel Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 53 Nx64K Use for fractional T1 testing where the fractional circuit is any number 1 24 of 64 kbps channels within the DS1 If any one of the fractional settings is selected
236. cognized be cause the surrounding area is black while the text is white After selecting the item execute the selection by pressing the ENTER key on the keypad In a few specific cases the simple action of selecting an item will execute the selection Note The gt symbol means to select the indicated item and press the ENTER key on the keypad Figure 16 SunSet T10 Menu Tree shows the location of major menu items Refer to the subsection listed in the menu tree for a complete menu description Some menu items are offered only with certain software options Parentheses containing the soft ware option number indicate such menu items 2 0 Test Configuration Menu Before connecting the SunSet T10 to a circuit it must be configured for the type of circuit to be tested This is done in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION The F keys show the available options for each setup param eter within TEST CONFIGURATION In the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen as each F key is pressed the SunSet T10 immedi ately alters its configuration to reflect the new settings Notes e nordertoavoid configuration mistakes use the GRAPHIC key onthe keypad to confirm any changes to TEST CONFIGURA TION Graphics are not available for DATACOM The SunSet TIO can be configured to automatically detect incoming framing and test patterns by pressing the AUTO key on the keypad The first selection in T
237. creen contrast by using the control thumb wheel on the left side of the SunSet T10 6 After the SunSet logo screen appears the SunSet T10 MAIN MENU screen will automatically appear A Select TEST CONFIGURATION by using the up down arrow keys on the keypad Press the ENTER key on the keypad once TEST CONFIGURATION is highlighted Con figure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING ESF Tx CODING B8ZS Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLK INTERN TEST RATE Nx64K LBO 1 0dB Notes If the cursor will not move check the SHIFT indicator at the upper left hand corner of the screen To turn it off press the SHIFT key on the keypad and the word SHIFT will disappear Throughout this manual the gt symbol is used This means to select the indicated item and press the ENTER key on the keypad 16 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B B After entering Nx64K for TEST RATE the T10 TIME SLOT screen appears The AUTO key can be used to configure the received fractional T1 circuit or it can be done manually For now press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 7 Press the GRAPHIC key on the keypad and refer to Figure 4 TISINGL INST DROP ESF B8ZS ORSS RCV QRSS 64 kbps Figure 4 T1SINGL For LINE 1 and LINE 2 Rx is the SunSet T1O s receiver Tx is the transmitter Notice that LINE 2 is disabled This
238. cted Return result Not Last Retrieves the results of an invoked op eration This indicates that there are further responding compo nents Selecting the Component Type field the CompDec F4 F key appears This F key provides further decoding of the Compo nent Type Figure 97 shows a sample Component Decode screen 202 SunSet T10 p Rev B 21 10 05 Bhvoke Not Last CORRELATN ID 00h OPERATION CODE NATIONAL HGFEDCBA 10000101 H Reply Required G A Operation Family Caller Interaction Olh Operation Specifier Play Announcement LIST OF PARAMETERS Figure 97 Component Decode Screen Figure 97 contains the following information CORRELATN ID This must be included in a return result and in an invoke component if the invoke component is responding to a previous invoke with an invoke ID The correlation ID is identical to the invoke ID of the other component OPERATION CODE This identifier indicates the particular stan dard the Operation Code follows In Figure 97 defined by the ANSI T1 114 standard is the operation code NATIONAL Defined within a network specific TCAP application is the Private Code Identi fier An operation specifier that divides the Operation Code fol lows Operation Family Each is one octet long Figure 97 shows the Operation Family 10000101 This represents the caller inter action family as shown in Table 13 This family tells the exchange to interact wi
239. d Usage This measurement can provide clues as to the nature of an out of service condition For example a break in the line will cause a loss of signal at the SunSet T10 if there are no line terminating elements between the break and the SunSet T10 However if there is a line terminating element the same break will cause an AISS LVL Positive level is the level of positive pulses received by the SunSet T10 Usage The LVL and LVL measurements are useful for find ing faults with the last repeater or transmitter that is generating the signal to the SunSet T10 If the value of the positive pulses is more than 1 dB different from the value of the negative pulse this could cause problems The level at a DSX should be approxi mately 3 volts The level at a repeater should be between 10 dB and 35 dB Level and simplex current measurements are only from L1 Rx LVL Negative level is the level of negative pulses received by the SunSet T10 Usage Refer to LVL 116 SunSet T10 7 Rev Lpp This is the peak to peak level of negative and positive pulses received by the SunSet T10 Usage The Lpp measurement saves time by adding the LVL and LVL values to calculate Lpp FREQ This is the frequency of the signal as measured against the frequency of a reference clock When measuring just one sig nal the reference is the SunSet T10 s internal clock The internal reference clock of the SunSet T10 has a stratum 3 accuracy When
240. d 999 ms use the following procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enterthedesired value from the keypad To selecta value less than 100 ms add a 0 first for example 50ms 050 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 226 SunSet T10 Rev B SILENT PERIOD Options 30 ms 999 ms Silent Period specifies the period in milliseconds for DTMF and MF dialing The default value is 100 ms Toselectany value between 30 and 999 ms use the following procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enterthedesired value from the keypad To selecta value less than 100 ms add a 0 first for example 50ms 050 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator TONE LEVEL dbm Options 25 to 5 dom Press the appropriate F key NEXT F1 or PREV F2 to select the desired tone level in 1 dB steps Supervision Trunk Type Options E amp M F1 G START F2 L START F3 USER F4 e Select the appropriate trunk type These trunk types will determine the exact signaling bits transmitted for each signaling condition Touse custom on off hook signaling bits 1 Press USER F4 F key andthe user SPRVIS selection screen will appear 2 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 3 Manually enter the OFF HOOK ON HOOK signaling bits with the keypad numbers 1 and 0
241. d charac ter Repeat as necessary 3 1 6 Deleting a User Loopback Code 1 Fromthe CSU amp NI CONTROL menu select CODE and press the USER F4 F key Besuretopressthe USER F4 F key even ifthe USER item is already displayed as the selected CODE entry This allows access to the USER LOOPBACK CODE screen Select the desired code and press the DELETE F key Repeat as necessary Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the CSU amp NI CONTROL screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 77 3 2 Teltrend Office Repeater SW 184 Teltrend provides a variety of office repeaters that are sup ported by the SunSet T10 Refer to Teltrend documentation for detailed information on the operations of these various repeaters Figure 31 shows the Teltrend Office Repeater screen 221210205 END OFFICE RPTR TIME 001 50 STATUS Span ARME SPAN CTRL MERE RPTR No 01 ARM DL UNARMDL TOUTDIS more Figure31 Teltrend Office Repeater Figure 31 shows several aspects of the repeater control ses sion The items to the right of the diagram are not configured in this screen but they provide information on the repeater control session They are TIME Time begins counting up from 000 00 mmm ss as soon as the span is armed This indicates of how much time is remaining until the repeater automatically drops its loopback This usually occurs because of the repeater s time out circu
242. decide if any need to be changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 6 7 7 Other Parameters for information on these settings Ch 4 Applications 381 8 To capture only a select group of messages select SETUP FILTER from ISDN PRIMARY RATE Here choose to capture only messages with a certain Call Reference value Called Number or Caller Number To do so A Select FILTERTYPE pressthe F Key correspondingto the desired type B Select NUMBER Press the SHIFT key on the keypad so the SHIFT indicator appears attop Then enterthe numbers from the keypad C When finished press the SHIFT key again to clear the SHIFT indicator D To capture all messages press the NONE F4 F key for Filter Type 9 Escape out to ISDN PRIMARY RATE and select START TRACER If a call is placed at either end then both LINE 1 and LINE 2 ISDN messages should be observed being sent and received Press the PAUSE F2 F key to pause the mes sages The RESTART F1 F key will restart the tracing process 10 Escape out to ISDN PRIMARY RATE and select VIEW PRINT TRACER Atthe initial screen choose to view or printallofthe messages or a certain number of messages To view print a select number A Select VIEW FROM B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the number of the message to view with the number keypad C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to clear the SHIFT indicator D Select VIEW TO Repeat steps B and C to enter in the message number where to
243. dministration Part MAP Mobile Application Part Home Location Register Visited Location Register Mobile Switching Center Equipment Identification Register Authentication Center Spare Reserved for expansion Oo O1 4 amp 0 n9 lo Table 10 Subsystem Numbers Notes Network specific SSNs should use the spare octets 11 to 254 decimal in descending order starting with 254 Toenter an SSN an address signal must be specified SIG PT COD Options NONE F1 000 to 255 000 to 255 000 to 255 Useto enter a Signaling Point Code in decimal format The Signaling Point Codes consists of three octets and are transmitted in the following order Network Cluster Member Network Cluster and Network Identifier TCAP FILTR Options OFF F1 ON F2 Filters the Transaction Capability Application Part OFF Press the OFF F1 F key to turn off the TCAP filter ON Press the ON F2 F key to use the TCAP filter The following two filtering items appear ORIG TRXID Options OFF F1 ON F2 Thisfield contains the Transaction ID assigned by the origina tor It consists of four octets Tocaptureaspecific Originating Transaction ID press the ON F2 F key then press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the numbers for all eight digits using the keypad Enter the Originating Transaction ID in hexadecimal form indicated by
244. e RNR receiver not ready reject layer 2 e SABME set asynchronous balanced mode extended e DM disconnect mode NFO information The following F keys are available F keys PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 COUNT STOP START F4 PAGE UP and PAGE DN Use to scroll through the available pages of statistics COUNT When the user presses the F key the screen shows all values in terms of percent i e the percentage of errored frames out of the total eoc frames received COUNT returns the results back to a count STOP START This key stops the current measurement The counters are frozen To reset the counters press the ESCAPE key on the keypad and return to EOC Statistics START continues the current measurement Pressing the PAGE DN F2 F key provides the second EOC Statistics screen as shown in Figure 138 This provides a running count of the various eoc datalink paths These paths are determined by the SAPI TEI values outlined in chapter 5 Reference 21 10 05 EOC STATISTICS ET 000 33 01 EOC PATH SWITCH RDT ADMIN OS RDT MAINT OS RDT TEST OS RDT IDT RDT Test SYST 1 RDT Test SYST 2 RDT Test SYST 3 Figure 138 EOC Statistics Page 2 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 263 9 0 Frame Relay SW194 The SunSet T1O s frame relay option SW194 provides a tool for the installation and verification of frame relay circuits The SunSet T10 uses link management LMI signaling to verify
245. e are a few important differences in using Westell repeaters The Westell central office and line repeater F key menus also include SEQLPBK sequential loopback This allows stepping quickly through the loopbacks on aline Touse this feature arm the span and then press the SEQLPBK F key and observe which repeater loops up The repeater s address does not need to be entered This feature is useful for tracking down misaddressed repeaters To attempt a span power down with the Westell office repeater it must first be looped up The Westell central office repeater menus do not have frac tional T1 blocking or the NIU mode commands of the Teltrend This screen shown in Figure 33 depicts several aspects of the repeater control session The items to the right of the diagram in Figure 33 provide information on the repeater control session and cannot be config ured within this screen they are Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 83 TIME Time begins counting up from 000 00 mmm ss as soon as the span is armed This indicates of how much time is remaining until the repeater automatically drops its loopback This usually occurs because of the repeater s time out circuitry STATUS The Status bar displays the current looping status of the span SPAN The Span Control line shown ARMED in Figure 33 displays which span control function is currently under process or complete Configured in this screen are the items appearing below the diagram i
246. e displayed in the graphic Otherwise LPBK will display either the looped or the unlooped mode PWR QRY Power query will query all repeaters on the span to see which one is looping the span simplex power A message will appear if the power loop query finds a repeater in the power loop UNIVLDN This causes the SunSet T10 to transmit the universal loop down code to loop down any looped repeaters LOOP UP This key will loop up a specified line repeater Arm the repeater and enter the RPTR number before using this function LOOP DN This key will loop down any line repeater it will not loop down an NIU SEQLPBK Sequential Loopback allows the user to quickly step through the loopbacks on the line This feature is useful for track ing down misaddressed repeaters Arm the span before using this option Note Arming is required before the repeaters will actually loop up RPTR NO Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the keypad num bers to enter the desired repeater number This specifies which repeater will be looped up RPTR TYPE Options 31xx 56 F1 31 80 F2 This item determines the type of Westell Repeater Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 87 3 6 Westell NIU PM amp MSS SW 184 Use the Westell NIU PM amp MSS menu when using the Westell Performance Monitoring NIU Maintenance Switch or Ramp features 21 10 05 ESTELL NIU PM amp MSS ETRIEVE PM REPORT ESET PM COUNTERS ETRIEVE NIU HEADE ET NIU TIME
247. e following functions Answerscustomer questions overthe phone on such topics as product operation and repair Facilitates prompt repair of malfunctioning SunSet s Provides information about product upgrades A RMA Return Merchandise Authorization Number is re quired before shipping any product to Sunrise Telecom for repair Out of warranty repairs require both an RMA and a Purchase Order before returning the unit All warranted repairs are good for 90 days Please contact Customer Service if any additional assistance is required Customer Service Sunrise Telecom Incorporated 302 Enzo Drive San Jose CA 95138 U S A Toll Free 1 800 701 5208 24 hours per day 7 days a week Fax 1 408 363 8313 Internet http www sunrisetelecom com Email support sunrisetelecom com 466 SunSet T10 9 Rev B 3 2 Express Limited Warranty A Hardware Coverage COMPANY warrants hardware products against defects in materials and workmanship During the war ranty period COMPANY will at its sole option either i refund of CUSTOMER S purchase price without interest ii repair said products or iii replace hardware products which prove to be defective provided however that such products which COM PANY elects to replace must be returned to COMPANY by CUSTOMER along with acceptable evidence of purchase within twenty 20 days of request by COMPANY freight prepaid B Software and Firmware Coverage COMPANY warrants sof
248. e keys on the keypad Note The SunSet T10 will automatically convert the channel num ber to a timeslot on SF D4 ESF and SLC 96 A digroups For other framing formats or digroups refer to the channel numbering tables in Tables 17 and 18 to determine which channel to specify with the SunSet T10 5 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 342 SunSet T10 Rev 1 17 Sending a Tone This procedure will disrupt service Be sure the T1 line is not carrying traffic and that it will be able to withstand the hits that this procedure will introduce 1 Configure the SunSet T10 forthe appropriate TEST CONFIGU RATION mode for sending the tone Tx SOURCE When TxSOURCE is set for NORMAL in the TERM mode the SunSet T10 drops andinserts onthe selected channels and fills the other 23 channels with idle code The received signal is terminated at the SunSet T10 and is not retransmitted Tx SOURCE When TxSOURCE is set for THRU mode the talk listen is performed on the LINE 1 or LINE 2 side of a full duplex circuit The other 23 channels of that side are transmit ted through without disruption All 24 channels ofthe other side are transmitted without disruption There will be a momentary hit on both sides when the SunSet T10 is plugged into the circuit and when it is unplugged There will also be a hit if the access modes are changed from one side to the other side even when the cords are not disturbed When
249. e mis match occurs When the SunSet T10 s code is AMI and the SunSet T10 detects B8ZS coding the SunSet T10 will display a message similar to the one in Figure 153 When the SunSet T10 s code is B8ZS and the SunSet T10 detects AMI coding as represented by a string of seven consecutive zero s the SunSet T10 will display the message as shown in Figure 153 When this message occurs two options are available Press the ENTER key on the keypad to change the SunSet T10 s transmit coding to match the received coding Pressthe ESCAPE key on the keypad to ignore the message and keep the same coding In this case the mismatch message is not displayed again until the AUTO key on the keypad is pressed or the SunSet T10 is turned off and then back on DISABLE This disables the visual warning This is the SunSet T1O s default condition 290 SunSet T10 Rev B 10 5 View Test Record 13 28 00 Figure 154 View Test Record VIEW TEST RECORD allows viewing of stored results and events The total event and total result numbers are shown in ac cordance with the events and results that are in memory EVENT refers to an alarm or error RESULT refers to all errors measure me 1 Ch nts etc To view events use the following procedure The cursor is automatically placed at VIEW FROM of the EVENT RECORD Press ALL F1 to view all events
250. e network service data units that need to be transmitted through the SS7 network Connectionless services provide the capability to transfer one data unit Segmentation and reassembly are not available in connectionless services ISUP The ISDN User Part is used in SS7 to support basic bearer services which involve the setup and release of 64 Kb s network switched circuit exchanges and supplementing services such as call forwarding calling line identification user to user signaling closed user groups and direct dialing Another service supported by ISUP is call switching of basic phone calls for both speech and data calls as specified by its standards for international semi automatic and automatic telephone and circuit switched traffic TUP The Telephone User Part is used with SS7 to support interna tional telephone call control signaling TCAP Transaction Capability Application Part refers to the building blocks of the Application layer network services used by SS7 users to provide a standard procedure of adding network services The current list of application uses includes mobile service application Operation and maintenance noncircuit control related exchange of signaling information registration and activation of supplementary services 456 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 8 3 SS7 Messages There are three basic message types Message Signaling Unit MSU The MSUs arethe units used by the ISUP TUP and TCAP mes
251. e network to declare this link inactive and discard any frames transmitted to or from this link The user device router or test set periodically sends a STA TUS ENQUIRY message to the network to check if the link is still active The network responds with a STATUS message If a number of STATUS messages are not answered the user de clares the link down The network also runs a timer to receive STATUS ENQUIRY message from the user If it does not receive a STATUS ENQUIRY as expected the network will declare the link down After a specified number of STATUS ENQUIRY STATUS cycles the user sends a FULL STATUS request this requests the status of all PVCs from the network The network sends a FULL STATUS including the status of all PVCs new deleted active inactive Parameters determine how often the KEEP ALIVE message is sent how often the full status enquiry response is sent and how much time should elapse when waiting for a response Figure 213 LMI Counters illustrates some of these parameters 420 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 4 0 HDSL Technology Overview HDSL High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line is a technology that provides high speed digital transmission over existing cop per lines HDSL is symmetric meaning it provides the same amount of bandwidth upstream and downstream HDSL is com monly deployed as an alternative to repeatered T1 lines HDSL has a speed of 1 544 Mbps over two copper pairs and has an operating distanc
252. e of 12 000 feet Investigated in the early 1990 s was the use of 2B1Q line coding to carry DS1 services By carrying half of the 1 544 Mbps DS1 rate on 2 line pairs allows delivery of DS1 service on loops up to 12 000 feet without repeaters The ANSI T1E1 group has endorsed both 2B1Q and CAP Carrier Amplitude Phase line cod ing for HDSL Placed on both ends of the twisted pair loop is a pair of HDSL transceivers The transceivers provide the interface between DS1 and HDSL full duplex links Loop 2 784K B Full duplex CO DSX 1 Central Office Remote HDSL CPE DSX 1 Interface HDSL Interface Interface Interface Loop 1 784K Full duplex HTU C High bit rate Terminal Unit Central Office HTU R High bit rate Terminal Unit Remote Distribution Figure 214 HDSL Span Illustrated in Figure 214 the HDSL system is composed of two pairs of CSA compatible loops Loops 1 and 2 Bi directional data at a rate of 784 Kbps is transmitted received on each loop The combined data from these loops forms a 1 544Mbps 051 bit rate Placed on each end of the HDSL system is an HTU High bit rate Terminal Unit The HTUs receive the DS1 signal and gen erate a line signal to place on the loop The receiving HTU takes this signal and recovers the original DS1 signal An HTU in the CO Central Office is the HTU C High bit rate Terminal Unit Central Office An HTU near the Cl Customer Installation is the HTU R High bit rate Terminal Unit Remote Dist
253. e total number of bit errors divided by the total number of bits during available time since the beginning of the test ES This is a count of the number of bit errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test ES is any second with at least one bit error There is no count during an unavailable second ES This is a percentage of bit errored seconds since the begin ning of the test SES This is a count of severely bit errored seconds since the beginning of the test SES is a second with a 10 bit error rate There is no count during an unavailable second Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 127 SES This is a percentage of severely bit errored seconds since the beginning of the test EFS This is a count of number of bit error free seconds since the beginning of the test EFS This is a percentage of bit error free seconds since the beginning of the test AS This is a count of bit available seconds since the beginning of the test Bit available seconds equals the length of the total test time minus any UAS AS This is a percentage of bit available seconds since the beginning of the test UAS This is a count of bit unavailable seconds since the begin ning of the test Bit UAS begins at the onset of 10 consecutive severely bit errored seconds and ends at the onset of 10 con secutive non severely bit errored seconds Loss of signal loss of frame and loss of pattern synchronization will also cause a bit UAS
254. e when thecircuit is provisioned for a specific type of framing thereisnoT1 signal available when the SunSet T10 is plugged in e the SunSet T10 will be used with another test set that is already configured for auto framing e the SunSetT10willcontrol the framing thatis put onthe line e the SunSet T10 will provide a signal to itself without first passing through network equipment that forces a specific framing Refer to Chapter 5 Reference for specific details on each framing type UNFRAME Select for no framing SF D4 This is the simplest framing consisting of 12 grouped frames ESF Extended Super Frame consists of 24 grouped frames SLC 96 Introduced by AT amp T and later standardized by Bellcore Note If the framing on the received signal does not match the framing specified in the FRAMING menu the SunSet T10 will show a frame loss If the received framing changes during the middle of a test the SunSet T10 will also show frame loss even inthe AUTO mode Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 59 CODING Options AMI F1 B8ZS F2 AMI Alternate Mark Inversion This requires that the terminal transmitting data have at least a 12 5 average 1 s density and a maximum of 15 consecutive zeroes B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution This uses a bipolar violation substitution which guarantees the 12 596 average with a maxi mum number of 7 consecutive zeroes B8ZS coding is preferred because it reduces transmission pro
255. econds and then turn the SunSet T10 on again 3 Try ERASE NV RAM Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEA TURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG gt ERASE NVRAM and follow the on screen instructions WARNING Performing an Erase NVRAM will erase all user programmed information measurement results and history buffers Note Be sure to turn the power off for at least 5 seconds after completing the ERASE NV RAM operation Ch 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 461 Problem The SunSet T1O does not power up properly Suggestions 1 Confirm that the battery is charged or the charger is con nected SunSet T10 s charger is powerful enough to power the SunSet T10 and recharge the battery simultaneously Confirm that a correctly installed software cartridge is in place A flickering screen usually indicates that the software cartridge is either loose or missing Refer to the cartridge installation procedure if necessary Problem The SunSet T10 displays a Security Violation when switched on Suggestion 1 Make sure the serial number ofthe software cartridge matches the serial number on the back of the SunSet T10 Each software cartridge is setup for a specific SunSet T10 If swapped between SunSet T10s the SunSet T10 may not work properly Problem Keypad keys do not work properly Suggestions 1 2 Verify the SHIFT status by pressing and releasing SHIFT key on the keypad Observe the SHIFT indicator on the displ
256. ected i e loop closure on a loop start cir cuit it removes the alerting signal and sends a CONNECT mes sage to the IDT Ch 5 Reference 427 5 3 Embedded Operations Channel The eoc Embedded Operations Channel uses LAP D proto col for Layer 2 operations For the application layer the eoc uses CMISE ASN 1 Common Management Information Services Ab stract Syntax Notation 1 The CMISE model is defined in TR 303 Supplement 3 and GR 2833 Although GR 2833 is replacing parts of TR 303 the TR 303 model is still in use For LAP D specific SAPI TEI combinations have fixed as signments in the eoc Shown in Table 21 is a quick reference table Data Link Function 1 EOC Path Switching Operations 1 RDT Provisioning Memory Administrative OS RDT Maintenance Surveillance OS RDT Testing OS RDT IDT RDT Test System Controller 1 RDT Test System Controller 2 RDT Test System Controller 3 User Assignable Table 21 SAPI TEI Valid Combinations Used as follows are these combinations e SAPI 1 TE1 0 used for eoc path switching operations In response to operations messages received from an OS the IDT or RDT will initiate a switch from the active eoc or TMC to the standby eocor TMC SAPI 1 TEl 4 used for operations interactions between the IDT and RDT e SAPI 1 TEl 1 used for provisioning and memory administra tion OS Operations System to communicate with the RDT when provid
257. ected timeslots and that TE 1 s pattern is on the other timeslots 19 This verifies the proper insert operation of the SunSet T10 Disconnect the SunSet T10s from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 377 4 0 ISDN Applications 4 1 ISDN PRI Call Setup This procedure outlines an ISDN call Verify that the span is notin service This ISDN call will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select SEND TEST PATTERN and choose 1 8 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note 1 8 should be used for all ISDN applications QRS may bring down the switch 4 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 194 if emulating TE terminal equipment Use Figure 195if emulat ing NT network terminal Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six consecutive ones together with two zeroes should be displayed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 or 11110011 If this is not seen then the D channel is not set up to handle ISDN messages Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until ISDN PRIMARY RATE is re
258. ed R The R bit is the SPRM flag This bit indicates if SPRMs are included in the PRM message A count indicates the number of seconds during which SPRMs have been added U1 The U1 bit carries information on the DS1 signal as received from the network side The count records the number of times that the U1 bit has been set to logical 1 indicating an error condi tion from the network direction These errors include CRC BPV SLIP Yellow Frame Synchronization Bit Error or Payload Loopback 300 SunSet T10 Rev B U2 The U2 bit carries information on the DS1 signal as received from the Customer Interface Cl side The count records the num ber of times that the U2 bit has been set to logical 1 indicating an error condition from the customer direction These errors include CRC BPV SLIP Yellow Frame Synchronization Bit Error or Pay load Loopback Pressing the SPRM F4 F key displays a graphic of the SPRM information Refer to Figure 161 13 28 00 T1 403 SPRM DE 234 U1 U2 0 ELAPSED TIME 000 00 25 SPRM FLAG SPRM ADDED RESTART HOLDSCR Figure 161 T1 403 SPRM Decode The U1 and U2 counts provide the reported number of times an error condition occurred from either the Central Office CO or Customer Interface Cl respectively Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 301 11 2 2 Monitor T1 403 NPRM NPRM information is contained within the MONITOR T1 4
259. ed with an OIM with a gateway function SAPI 1 TEl 2 used for a maintenance and surveillance OS to communicate with the RDT when provided with an OIM with a gateway function SAPI 1 TEl 3 used when a testing OS communicates with the RDT when provided with an OIM with a gateway function SAPI 1 TEl 5 used when a TSC communicates with the RDT when an OIM with provided with a gateway function 428 SunSet T1O 4 Rev B 5 4 TMC CSC Cause Values The following is a table of cause values that the switch and RDT must support as defined by GR 303 CORE Value Definition 16 Normal Clearing Sent by the RDT IDT to indicate that call clearing has begun after recognizing that the customer went on hook 27 Destination out of service Sent by the IDT to indicate that call clearing was initiated because the customer is in a permanent signal state 30 Response to Status Enquiry Sent by the RDT in Status messages which is sent in response to Status Enquiry messages 34 Channel Unavailable Sent by the IDT to reject a call setup when there is no DSO available to carry the call In addition the RDT may reject a call with this cause value if it believes that the DSO specified by the IDT is already in use or is unavailable the distribution channel as indicated by the CRV is blocked 41 Temporary Failure Sent by the IDT to initiate call clearing after recognizing that there is a c
260. edure 1 Connect the Sunrise Telecom DIN 8 to RS232C Printer Cable SS115 tothe serial port at the top ofthe SunSet T10 Connect the other end to a serial to parallel converter The Black Box PI 115A is recommended Order the converter through Sunrise Telecom Configure the Black Box PI 115A converter Set the Black Box for DCE since the SunSet T10 is set for DTE Make sure that the Black Box is set for the Serial gt Parallel Direction Check that the converter s DIP settings correspond to those of the SunSet T10 s serial port Configure the SunSet T1O s serial port settings in MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt GEN ERAL CONFIG The SunSet T10 s default settings are BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE STOP BIT 1 BIT BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CR LF Note The converter must supply its own power or receive power from the parallel port The SunSet T10 will not supply any power through the serial port 3 Connect the Centronix cable Black box BC 001 01 to the Parallel connector on the Black Box converter and to the Ch 2 Product Description 41 Parallel Portofthe printer The Centronix cable is a male male parallel connector 4 Usethis printer whenevera PRINT F key optionis available as inthe MEASUREMENT RESULTS ora VIEW PRINT TRACER screen Press the PRINT F Key and the results will print out Notes ThePRINT SCREEN key does not work with a parallel printer e Parallel printers are not able to handle the
261. edure 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1 DUAL Tx INSERT L1 TX Rx DROP L1 TX RxLVL 1 DSXMON RxLVL 2 DSXMON Tx SOURCE THRU FRAMING SF D4 Tx CODING B8ZS XMT CLOCK L1 RX TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 392 SunSet T10 7 Rev 2 Connectboth LINE 1 and LINE 2 Rxto the DSX Monitor jacks If red LEDs appear for framing press the AUTO key on the keypad The SunSet T10 will attempt to synchronize on the received framing 3 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt SS7 ANALYSIS gt CON FIGURATION and configure as follows Line 1 Rx T S 2 Line 2 Rx T S 2 SS7 VERSION ANSI TRUNK RATE 56k DISPLAY INPUT HEX When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the SS7 ANALYSIS menu In the above settings for both LINE 1 and 2 T S 2 was se lected since that is the timeslot for the SS7 link Also selected was a Trunk Rate of 56k since that is a common rate for the United States 4 Select SU ANALYSIS A high number of FISUs and a low number of MSUs should be observed unless this is a high traffic SS7 network 5 Escape to SS7 ANALYSIS and select MSU MONITOR gt START TRACER the SunSet T10 should start displaying messages Tocapture only aselect group of messages select the filtering fields within SETUP FILTER Refer to chapter 3 section 6 8 2 1 for more information on each of the fi
262. eport and pulse statistics however the bit mapped pulse graph is not drawn on the remote terminal screen e Talk listen is not supported for remote operation Ch 2 Product Description 45 46 SunSet T10 49 Rev Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions VF CHANNEL ACCESS VF MEASUREMENTS sec 7 1 VIEW SUPERVISION sec 7 2 DIAL SPRVIS SETUP sec 7 3 PLACE RECEIVE CALLS sec 7 4 DTMF MF DP ANALYSIS sec 7 5 NOISE ANALYSIS SW 183 sec 7 6 MF TRACER sec 7 7 SIGNALING ANALYSIS sec 7 8 GR 303 MONITOR SW 193 MONITOR TMC CSC sec 8 1 EOC VERIFICATION sec 8 2 sec 11 2 MONITOR T1 403 PRM sec 11 2 1 MONITOR T1 403 NPRM sec 11 2 2 MONITOR T1 403 BOM sec 11 2 3 SEND T1 403 PRM sec 11 2 4 SEND T1 403 BOM sec 11 2 5 RTRV 54016 PM CNTR sec 11 2 6 PRINT 54016 RESULTS sec 11 2 7 sec 11 1 MONITOR DATA LINK sec 11 1 1 SEND MESSAGE sec 11 1 2 VIEW DATA LINK sec 11 1 3 DATA LINK CONTROL ESF pa DATA LINK CONTROL SLC96 lq SunSet T10 MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION sec 2 0 LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL sec 3 0 SEND TEST PATTERN sec 4 0 MEASUREMENT RESULTS sec 5 0 OTHER MEASUREMENTS sec 6 0 VF CHANNEL ACCESS sec 7 0 GR 303 MONITOR SW 193 sec 8 0 FRAME RELAY SW 194 sec 9 0 OTHER FEATURES sec 10 0 DATA LINK CONTROL sec 11 0 CSU NI EMULATION sec 12 0 OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG sec 10 1 MEAS CONFIG
263. er with Layer 3 4 Make the following selections if selecting the INFO key from Figure 133 LAYER 3 TYPE SETUP F1 SET ACK F2 ALERTIN F3 CALPROC more F1 NOTIFY more F2 CONNECT more F3 CON ACK more F1 DISC more F2 RELEASE more F3 RELCOMP more F1 STATUS more F2 STA ENQ more F3 INFO more F1 5 Make the following selections if SETUP was selected for LAYER TYPE CALL REF INC 1 F1 DEC 1 F2 1 10 100 Use the 1 10 100 F key to determine increment decrement values for the F1 and F2 keys DS1 NONE F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 1 1 10 F4 Use the 1 10 F key to determine increment decrement values for the F2 and F3 keys DSO NONE F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 1 1 10 F4 Use the 1 10 F key to determine increment decrement values for the F2 and keys BEARER CAP Fixed at 64kbs Circuit SIGNAL NONE F1 NEXT F2 PREV F3 Use the NEXT or PREV F keys to select from 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 or 15 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 257 6 If not selecting SETUP in step 4 select CALL REF 051 and DSO from step 5 7 For all selections select SAPI and TEI SAPI INC 1 F1 DEC 1 F2 1 10 F3 Use the 1 10 F key to determine increment decrement values for the F1 and F2 keys TEI INC 1 F1 DEC 1 F2 1 10 F3 Use the 1 10 F key to determine increment decrement values for the F1 and F2 keys 258 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 2 EOC Verification
264. eslot assign ment and call supervision Allocated for operational functions is another DSO This is the eoc Embedded Operations Channel Assigned to channel 12 of one DS1 its backup is on channel 12 of another DS1 The eoc handles provisioning performance monitoring and alarm reporting Ch 5 Reference 423 5 1 TMC and Hybrid Signaling Used for dynamic timeslot assignment is TMC Its main func tion is to assign the timeslot used for each call Once assigned to the line unit for a call ABCD bits on a specified DSO handle the supervision In Figure 216 the IDT initiates the call IDT RDT Customer SETUP CRV DS1 DS0 CONNECT DISCONNECT cause 16 RELEASE RELEASE COMPLETE DSO RELEASED Figure 216 TMC Call Procedure Initiated by IDT The IDT sends a SETUP message identifying the called line termination via the Call Reference Value and allocates the DS1 DSO for the call Before it sends the SETUP message it also begins transmitting ABCD signaling on the allocated DSO When the RDT receives the SETUP message it connects the line termi nation unit to the designated DSO channel The RDT also begins transmitting responding to ABCD signaling on the DSO It responds on the TMC with a CONNECT message When the IDT receives an on hook indication for the call it sends a DISCONNECT mes sage to the RDT When the RDT receives the DISCONNECT mes sage it disconnects the line termination from the DS0 and sends a RELEASE me
265. eturn to the USER LOOPBACK CODE menu 4 Program a User Loopback Code Inthe CSU amp NI CONTROL menu select CODE and press the USER F4 F key Select a blank position on the user pattern list Press the CREATE F1 F key Displayed is the USER LOOPBACK CODE screen Press the TOGGLE F key The letter A will begin to flash on and off within the character grid A Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the flashing indicator to the desired character B Press the SELECT F4 F key The desired character will appear next to the LABEL line Repeatthis process until the desired LABEL name is complete When the LABEL is complete press the TOGGLE F3 F key to move out of the character grid A Press the down arrow key on the keypad to move to the CODE line B Press the SHIFT key on the keypad Using the keypad numbers enter up to 32 1s and Os to make up the desired pattern Press SHIFT when completed Press the ENTER key to return to the USER LOOPBACK CODE menu The new code is displayed SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 3 1 5 Correcting a Mistake While Entering the Label 1 Startfromstep 3 of Program a User Loopback Code procedure while in the character grid A letter within the grid should be flashing Press the TOGGLE F3 F key to move out of the character grid Press the left arrow key on the keypad until the cursor is over the incorrect character Pressthe DELETE F2 F key to remove the selecte
266. etwork to Customer Installation 051 Metallic Interface 7 1 5 DS1 Signal 3 0 V n 0 0 V v 3 0V Figure 223 DS1 Pulse Transmission The DS1 signal is a 1 544 Mbps 3V signal Like the DS3 signal it uses a bipolar format Unlike DS3 there are two line codes used in transmission AMI Alternate Mark Inversion and B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution When DS1 was first introduced AMI was the original line code However its use is not optimal in today s networks which mix data transmission with voice trans mission and which require near error free quality The drawback with AMI line coding is that it requires the terminal transmitting data to have at least a 12 596 average 1s density and a maximum of 15 consecutive zeroes This data content is impossible to guar antee when computer data is transmitted so transmission quality can suffer In comparison B8ZS uses a bipolar violation substitu tion which guarantees the 12 596 average with a maximum num ber of 7 consecutive 05 Consequently networks are moving to wards B8ZS line code usage Refer to Figure 223 DS1 Pulse Transmission for an illustration of the DS1 signal Ch 5 Reference 437 7 1 6 T1 Framing Channel 1 8 Bits Channel Channels 2 23 Frame ane sj a eame Channel 24 4 4 Frame 2 re Frames 3 11 or 3 23 e _
267. ev B These procedures assume that both EQUIPMENT 1 and EQUIPMENT 2 are set to loopback mode 5 Ifin talk and listen mode talking and listening on the selected channel and line is possible If you selected CHANNEL 1 setthe LISTEN SIDE toL1 Rx you should hear a voice conversation only on CHANNEL 1 from EQUIPMENT 1 EQUIPMENT 2 should also be able to hear only your voice on CHANNEL 1 since you aretransmitting out to LINE 1 on that specific channel see Figure 187 If you change the channel then you will be able to talk and listen on that specific channel The unselected channels of both EQUIPMENT 1 and 2 should be uninterrupted Fortones checkto see that the same tone frequency level is being received as was inserted onthe specified channel i e the TONE FREQ Hz specified should be the same as the Rx 1 FRQ LVL The transmitted A B C D bits should be the same as the received A B C D bits when the ONHOOK F1 OFF HOOK F2 and WINK F keys are pressed 6 Try sending two different tones A Have EQUIPMENT 1 send a 404 Hz tone on CHANNEL 1 B Have EQUIPMENT 2 send an 1804 Hz tone also on CHANNEL 1 C Fromthe SunSet T10 the different tones should be audible on CHANNEL 1 by looking atthe RXFREQ LEVEL from the line that was specified in TEST CONFIGURATION CHANNEL 1 of LINE 1 should be a 404 Hz tone CHANNEL 1 of LINE 2 should be at 1804 Hz For LINE 1 make sure that the Rx 1 A B C D bits for the SunSet
268. ey on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note 1 8 is the normal pattern to use for ISDN applications QRS may bring down the switch 4 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 195 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge the blinking LEDs Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six consecutive ones together with two zeroes should be observed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 or 11110011 If not observed then the D channel is not set up to handle ISDN messages 6 Escape to the MAIN MENU and select OTHER MEASURE MENTS gt ISDN PRIMARY RATE and setup the CONFIGURA TION and OTHER PARAMETERS screens according to the circuit Make sure to set up EMULATE TYPE to NT in CONFIGURATION 7 Escapeoutand select START LINK CALL SETUP verify thatthe READY indicator is atthe top ofthe screen This indicates thatthe D Channel is operational and the SunSet T10 now emulating an ISDN NT device capable of receiving or placing a call 8 Once finished escape out and disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 385 4 5 46B 2D Call Setup This procedure illustrates making an ISDN call on a 46B 2D ISDN line AT amp T requires NATL 2 protocol to perform this test 1 Central Office Primary D Channel Backup D Channel Switch Figure 199 Back up D Channel Perform this test while the line is out of service
269. f signal strength usually the relationship between atransmitted signal and a standard signal source dBdsx decibel referenced to dsx power level DCE Data Communication Equipment is the equipment that enables a DTE to communicate over a telephone line or data circuit DCS Digital Cross connect System DDS Dataphone Digital Service is a private line digital service with typical data rates of 2 4 4 8 9 6 and 56 Kbps DENS Density DGRM Degraded Minute DLF Data Link Frame DS1 Digital Signal 1 is the term for the electrical signal found at the metallic interfaces of T1 circuits where most testing is performed DSX Digital Signal Cross connect 406 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B DSXMON DSX Monitor signal DTE Data Terminal Equipment is a user device such as terminals and computers that connects to DCE DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency is atype of audio frequency signaling generated by touchtone telephones E amp M Signaling is a method of signaling between junction equipment in an exchange and a signaling unit associated with a transmission equipment using two leads a receive E lead and a transmit M lead ERR INJ Error Injection ES Errored Second ESF Extended Super Frame is a framing method with 24 frames grouped together ET Elapsed Time is the total time during which a circuit is occupied by a connected call EXTERN External EXZS Excess Zeroes Seconds F1 Function 1 FAC Facility
270. fer to Figure 124 TIME SLOT Options 1 24 Time slot determines which DSO channel the SunSet T10 will monitor in TMC Start Tracer and TMC Statistics The default channel is 24 this follows the GR 303 CORE specification If required a different channel maybe viewed Press the INC 1 F1 and DEC 1 F2 F keys to change the number The 1 10 F3 F key adjusts the increment decrement value of the F1 and F2 keys All other settings pertain to the send message feature only Ig nore these settings for monitoring Send Messages allows program ming a sequence of TMC messages layer 2 and 3 for transmission 242 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 1 2 TMC Filter 21 10 05 TMC FILTE CRC CHE ALL INC 100 DEC 100 1 10 100 Figure 125 TMC Filter TMC Filter allows selective capturing of messages by layer call reference DS1 DSO number or cause value The following settings are available CRC Check Options ON F1 OFF F2 CRC check determines if the SunSet T10 will detect and report Layer 2 CRC errors ON Allows the SunSet T10 to capture invalid TMC messages and report them as a CRC ERROR OFF This is the SunSet T10 s default setting Layer 2 Msg Options REJECT F1 ALL F2 REJECT Select REJECT if interested only in call processing messages Setup Connect and Release The SunSet T10 will not capture any Layer 2 messages RR RNR REJ DM SABME
271. figured using B8ZS line code or alternating channel assignment In the B8ZS case the line code ensures adequate pulse density regardless of the number of zeroes transmitted on the circuit In the alternating chan nel assignment case the idle pattern inserted into the alternating idle channels ensures adequate ones density regardless of the customer data transmitted in the alternating active channels The CSU must be configured to put the fractional T1 chan nels in the proper positions within the 24 T1 channels available in the T1 line Three formats exist sequential order alternating or der and random order Sequential order is different from alternat ing order in that all the fractional channels are located contigu ously within the T1 frame For example the same 384 kbps circuit might use channels 1 through 6 of the T1 line The alternating order format was described in the previous paragraph For ex ample a 384 kbps circuit 6x64 might use channels 1 3 5 7 9 and 11 Channels 2 4 6 8 10 and 12 might be filled with a 01111111 idle code Arandomly configured 384 kbps circuit might use channels 4 9 10 17 20 and 24 In a fractional T1 circuit such as a video circuit it is vital that each channel of the circuit arrives in the same order phase that itleaves If this does not happen the signal becomes scrambled and the receiver cannot properly decode the information The sig nal will generally arrive in phase only if the fr
272. finitions of all the Line result pages Refer to section 5 2 Datacom Measurement Re sults for a sample screen and definitions for the Datacom Bit Error screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 129 6 0 Other Measurements 21 T0205 ER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA PROPAGATION QUICK TEST QUICK TEST BRIDGE TAP PULSE MASK I I DETECT A DELAY I LYSIS DDS MEASURE MENTS ISDN PRIMA RY RATE SS 7 ANALYSIS GSM VOICE TRAU BERT SWITCHED 56 TESTING Figure 54 Other Measurements Menu Many of the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu items are soft ware options and may not be present in your SunSet T10 6 1 View Received Data 21 10 05 BINARY 01100010 11110010 00011010 00000100 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 E UP PAGE DN R HEX ASCII 62 b F2 1A 04 FF FF FF FF ESUME Figure 55 View Received Data 130 SunSet T10 7 Rev VIEW RECEIVED DATA displays the patterns in binary HEX and ACSII received on all 24 time slots Refer to Figure 55 View Received Data for a typical screen display Note VIEW RECEIVED DATAis not available in Datacom Mode To view the data use the following procedure 1 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER FEATURES gt VIEW RE CEIVED DATA 2 View the live presentation of the T1 data In Figure 55 Time slots 1 4 are selected in the Nx64K Selec
273. g STLA Signaling Link Test Acknowledgment SLTM Signaling Link Test Message Table 12 SNT Heading Codes 194 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 1 6 Layer 2 Filtering Items Layer 2 filtering options are at the bottom of the screen in Figure 91 These options remain the same for each SI FIELD Layer 2 the Signaling Link Control Layer defines the functions and procedures for transmitting signaling information over one in dividual data link Layer 2 along with Layer 1 provides a signal ing link for reliable transfer of signaling messages between two points The Layer 2 filtering options are BSN BIB Options BSN NONE F1 00 to 7F BIB NONE F1 0 F2 1 F3 Each message transmitted is numbered in sequence from 0 to 127 For backward signal units this number takes the form of the BSN Backward Sequence Number When a backward mes sage has been received correctly the receiving terminal sends back the BSN and the BIB Backward Indicator Bit retains its value If there is an error in this backward message the receiving terminal rejects this message sending back the BSN of the last correctly received signal as well as an inverted BIB FSN FIB Options FSN NONE F1 00 to 7F FIB NONE F1 0 F2 1 Each transmitted number is numbered in a sequence from 0 to 127 For forward signal units this number takes the form of the FSN Forward Sequence Number In a correctly received forward message the recei
274. g E8 Acknowledgment UBA Unblocking Acknowledgment Signal 57 UBL Unblocking Signal 47 UNN Unallocated Number Signal 75 Table 7 TUP Heading Codes 186 SunSet T10 Rev B 6 8 2 1 2 Filtering Fields for ISUP CIC CODE Options ANSI protocol NONE F1 0000 to 3FFF CCITT protocol 000 to FFF CHINA24 amp CHINA14 Use to select a Circuit Identification Code The CIC is used as alabelfor circuit related messages It identifies the telephone circuit among those interconnecting the Destination Point and the Originating Point NONE Use to capture all CICs ANSI protocol uses 14 bits for CIC ITU CHINA14 amp 24 uses 12 bits Therefore if ANSI was selected in the SS7 Configura tion Screen this field will be 4 hex digits long For all other versions this will be three hex digits long MESG TYPE Options NONE F1 00 to FF Used to select a Message Type Refer to Table 8 ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 Adder Signal allows filtering of messages by using address numbers CALLED Use to search for a specific called number Upon pressing the CALLED F2 F key a new line ADDR NUMB appears Enterthe specific number by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and using the number keys CALLER Use to search for a specific caller number Upon pressing the CALLER F3 F key a new line ADDR NUMB appears Enterthe specific number by pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad and using the nu
275. g SWITCH Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the keypad numbers to enter the desired numbers Use the following procedure to initiate the maintenance switch 1 Confirmanestablishedloopbackis at the maintenance switch A Pressthe ERR INJ key on the keypad and verify that those errors are returning If not press the ESCAPE key on the keypad and select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL WESTELL NIU PM amp MSS this will automatically loop up the T1 Maintenance Switch card or NIU 92 SunSet T10 p Rev B Select MSS SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH F1 the line if connected to the maintenance switch and ready to switch the circuit to the spare Or RELEASE F2 the line if connected to the customer s span and the customer is using the maintenance span If selecting RELEASE go to step 5 Otherwise choose which line to switch to the maintenance spare A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator and enterthe desired numbers using the keypad B Pressthe SHIFT key on the keypad and press the ENTER key on the keypad to begin the operation C If the control sequence is successful a message will be received indicating to go ahead and press the ENTER key on the keypad to activate the 10 second timer at the maintenance switch D Connect the customer s span to the maintenance spare for the duration of the switch If selecting RELEASE in step 3 there is no need to specify which line to release The line is au
276. ght may also be on e B8ZS coding can only be observed on a line if at least 8 consecutive data zeroes are transmitted on the line An AIS signal or other high ones density signal can make it impossible to determine whether the line is optioned correctly for AMI or B8ZS 34 SunSet T10 49 Rev ERRORS If any error occurs this LED lights red This could be a fram ing bit bit CRC 6 or other error SF ESF SLC 96 These LEDs show whether the framing found on the received signal matches the framing selected in the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen If the framing matches the appropriate framing LED will be green If the framing does not match then the framing LED selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen will be red Used on A DS1 with the SLC 969 system is SLC 96 fram ing The B and D DS1s use SF framing The C DS1 will show SLC 96 framing in mode 11 Although the SunSet T10 will recognize an SLC 96 signal from an SLC system it may not recognize SLC 96 framing from another test set For the SunSet T10 to recognize SLC 96 fram ing the other test set must include valid SLC 96 frame flags in its SLC 96 framing YEL ALM This LED lights if the SunSet T10 detects a yellow alarm An SF yellow alarm occurs when bit 2 is set to Zero in all channels An ESF yellow alarm is a data link message of 00000000 11111111 AIS This LED lights red if the SunSet T10 detects an all ones signal without framing on its active re
277. hannel bank equipped with indi cated channel card RCV refers to the signaling bits received by the channel bank means that either a 1 or a 0 may appear Ch 4 Applications 359 Dial Pulse Originating DPO Loop open 00 29 Loop closure 11 a 0 Normal batt 1 Reverse batt Dial Pulse Terminating DPT VFinputto DPI rRMT RCV AB AB Normal batt 00 Reverse batt 11 pid 2 or 4 wire E amp M E amp M Input oo M lead batt 11 xt ES 0 E lead open 1 1 grd or looped Loop open 00 ys Loop closure 11 iir A 01 Normal batt no RP 15 1 Reverse batt Normal batt 00 ys Reverse batt 11 iei t 0 Loop open yii 1 Loop closure Sleeve Dial Pulse Originating SDPO VFinputto SDPO TRMT SDPO VF output Loop open 00 25 No sleeve Loop closure 11 iid Sleeve gnd t 0 Normal batt e 1 Reverse batt On hook idle 00 5 Off hook busy pcd yt Off hook busy Equalized Transmission Only ETO or TO 4 or 2 wire VF input to ETO TRMT ETO VF output re 00 Normal batt amp RP AB AB No signaling ae No signaling Table 19 D4 Channel Bank Signaling part 1 of 2 360 SunSet T10 p Rev B Foreign Exchange Office End FXO Gnd Start mode VF inputtoFXO TRMT FXO output
278. he NSF Type and Code options 164 SunSet T10 p Rev B CALL TYPE Options VOICE F1 DATA 56 F2 DATA 64 more F1 Nx56K more F2 3 1k AUD more F1 Call Type determines whattype of call is placed Select CALL TYPE and press the ENTER key on the keypad Select the corre sponding F Key VOICE Allows the user to place a voice call DATA 56 Selects a 56 kbps data rate DATA 64 Selects a 64 kbps data rate Nx64 Refers to the multirate ISDN PRI with 64K for each chan nel For Nx64 select the 64k channels using the SELECT F2 F key The AUTO F1 F key may be used to automatically config ure onto active received Nx64 channels 3 1k AUD Selects the 3 1 kHz audio bearer service for voice ana log data Press the call F4 F key or the ENTER key on the keypad to begin the call Disconnecting If satisfied with the call after it has connected with the switch press the DISK F2 F key to disconnect and release the line Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 165 6 7 2 4 Viewing Call Information When a data voice call is successfully placed or received press the INFO F1 F key to see information about the call Refer to Figure 77 21 10 05 DIR SEND OUT ERM CHANNEL 1 DATA 56 363 8000 Figure 77 ISDN INFO Screen CALL NO Displays the called number CREF NO Call reference number identifies the active cells af fected by the message DIR Shows the direction of the call Dis
279. he number of error free seconds since the beginning of the test SES This is the number of severely errored seconds since the beginning of the test A severely errored second contains a 10 error rate UAS This is the number of unavailable seconds since the begin ning of the test An unavailable second begins after 10 consecu tive severely errored seconds SES It also occurs when there is a loss of signal LOSS Loss of signal seconds is a count of the number of sec onds with a loss of signal since the beginning of the test This refers to the loss of the entire 64 Kbps signal Ch 4 Applications 397 6 2 Monitoring Network Traffic amp Voice Quality 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 TX Rx DROP L1 RX RxLVL 1 DSXMON if a DSX Monitor access point is avail able RxLVL 2 DSXMON if a DSX Monitor access point is avail able Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L1 RX TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 2 Connect the SunSet T10 s Line 1 and 2 receive jacks to the DSX Monitor jacks 3 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt GSM VOICE TRAU BERT GSM MONITOR Refer to Figure 208 Indicates speach 00 13 12 frame uplink direction on T S 01 subchannel 1 DL A EN I D 97 Press
280. he other settings are correct TYPE IN BAND CODE NI or CSU as appropriate For ESF framing configure as follows MODE LOOP UP Do not select this item until the other settings are correct TYPE ESF DL CODE Network NIU or LINE CSU as appropriate Selectthe MODE line and press the LOOP UP F1 F key A Amessage stating LOOPING UP followed by a LOOP UP SUCCEEDED will be displayed B Press the GRAPHIC key on the keypad for a visual confirmation Note This can be done for any type of loopback hardware loopback repeater loopback and so on 334 SunSet T1O p Rev 6 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad four times to return to the MAIN MENU 7 Select MAIN MENU OTHER MEASUREMENTS PROPA GATION DELAY and the SunSet T10 will perform a propagation delay measurement on the looped up circuit A Read the value of circuit delay reported in kFt This shows how many kilofeet there are between the SunSetT10 and the loopback device This measurement is accurate to about 1000 feet and is useful for making sure that the looped repeater is in the expected apparatus case This measurementis valid only ifthe line does not pass through any network elements and or transmission elements that introduce appreciable delay Line repeaters will not cause a problem Fiber muxes 3x1 muxes 3x1 digital cross connect systems and office repeater bays that are equipped with dejittering circuits will cause a problem
281. he test Each CRC 6 block error indicates that there is at least 1 bit error within an extended super frame An extended super frame consists of 24 frames Each frame contains 193 bits CER This is the ESF CRC 6 block error rate since the beginning of the test CURCER This is the current ESF CRC 6 error rate since the be ginning of the test ES This is a count of ESF CRC 6 seconds since the beginning of the test that contain at least one ESF CRC 6 bit error There is no count during a CRC 6 unavailable second Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 121 ES This is a percentage of ESF CRC 6 Errored Seconds since the beginning of the test SES ESF CRC 6 severely errored seconds is a count of sec onds with at least 320 CRC 6 errors since the beginning of the test There is no count during a CRC 6 unavailable second SES This is a percentage of ESF CRC 6 severely errored sec onds since the beginning of the test AS ESF CRC 6 available seconds is a count of the CRC 6 error free seconds CRC 6 errored seconds and CRC 6 severely errored seconds since the beginning of the test AS This is a percentage of ESF CRC 6 available seconds since the beginning of the test UAS This is a count of ESF CRC 6 unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test CRC 6 UASs are counted at the onset of 10 consecutive CRC 6 severely errored seconds or immedi ately on LOF or LOS CRC 6 UAS continues counting until the onset of 10 CRC 6 error free or CR
282. he timing of the SunSet T10 s transmit signal by either advancing or delaying the time The default is no delay to the voice signal Tochange the delay time use the F keys INC 1 F2 increments the delay in steps of 500 us DEC 1 F3 decrements the delay in steps of 500 us INC 10 F4 increments the delay in steps of 10 x 500 us RCV CBITS Displays the received C bits 210 SunSet T10 Rev 6 9 3 16k BERT 16k BERT allows observation of the quality of transmission for a selected time slot subchannel Running a BERT test at 16 kbps accomplishes this Since this is a BERT test verify in the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen that Tx SOURCE NORMAL or TEST PAT 21 10 05 GSM 16K BI LINE NUMBER LINE TIME SLOT 02 SUB CHANNEL 2 PATTERN ELAPSED E 000 08 37 ERROR RATE 0 0e 06 ES EFS 0 ES UAS 0 LOSS STOP 2047 more PRINT Figure 104 GSM 16K BERT The following two F keys are constant within this screen STOP RESUME F1 Press the STOP F1 F key to stop the cur rent measurement Pressing the RESUME F1 F key causes a new measurement cycle to begin and resets the elapsed time to zero PRINT F4 This F key sends the data to a connected printer Configure the following items LINE NUMBER Options LINE 1 F2 LINE 2 F3 Line Number corresponds to the line used for the BERT test This will be the line used for transmitting the test
283. here cross talk problem If the signal level is lower than 12 dB another signal could becrosstalking onto the received T1 line Are there repeaters and are they at the right spacing Isthere aspan power problem 60 mA span power needs to be deliveredto all repeaters onthe span all repeaters should have their power switches properly set to LOOP or THRU The central office automatic span powering repeater should be delivering the proper voltage to powerthe span All the repeat ers before the farthest one away from the central office should setto THRU Is the farthest repeater or the NIU set to LOOP Too many repeaters will overload the central office repeater Is the span to power the NIU and is it providing the proper power Is the central office repeater transmitting a 6V signal that is not being padded to 3V before it gets to the next equipment Is the test cord broken or dirty This can cause misleading test results Is the test set working properly This can also cause confusion when troubleshooting problems A quick way to checkthe test set isto loop the test cord from transmit to receive checking both the cord and the set atthe same time Common testset problems are wrong termination TERM BRIDGE DSXMON wrong clock setting INTERNAL is right for most cases wrong framing wrong line code wrong Nx64 selection and wrong test pattern 448 SunSet T10 4 Rev
284. hey also determine which electrical load the SunSet T10 will place on the circuit TERM This terminates the received signal and has no effect on the transmitter BRIDGE The SunSet T10 applies high impedance resistors to the circuit under test this isolation will protect the signal from disruption DSXMON Choose DSXMON when plugging the SunSet T10 into a DSX monitor jack that has isolated the monitor signal from the live signal with a high impedance circuit XMTCLK T1 MUX Mode uses a loop timing clock For loop timing chose the same line for TX INSERT and XMTCLK Therefore XMTCLK is forced automatically to the Tx INSERT choice LBO 1 amp 2 Options OdB F1 7 5dB F2 15dB F3 22 5dB F4 Choose the desired line build out for both lines 1 and 2 Set this to 0 dB under most conditions The T1 Test Configuration Menu descriptions in sections 2 1 and 2 2 provide information on selecting the proper dB level 66 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B DATACOM Column The Datacom settings configure the multiport The multiport automatically configures for DCE Press the right arrow key on the keypad to move the cursor over to the right side of the screen TYPE Options V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 RS232 F4 TYPE determines the electrical interface at the multiport Tx SRC Options PATRN F1 TT DRP F2 Tx Source sets the transmit source for the multiport Set TxSRC to either PATRN or T1DRP and choose PATRN F1 to senda te
285. hile a subscriber roams or is stationary the MS transmits a radio signal to one of the many BTSs Base Transceiver Station These BTS cells are equipped with radio transceivers to send and receive signals using a radio link protocol via an Um inter face 430 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B The BTSs are in turn managed by a BSC Base Station Con troller Using the A bis interface the BSC handles radio channel setup frequency hopping for security measures and handovers In some instances a TRAU Transcoder Rate Adaptation Unit is placed at a BTS to perform transcoding between 64 Kbps A law speech and 13 Kbps RPE LTP speech The TRAU may also be located at or in conjunction with the BSC The BSC then connects the MS to the MSC Mobile Switching Center using the A inter face Using four registers the MSC handles subscriber registra tion authentication location updates handovers and call roam ing The HLR Home Location Register is the central database for all subscribers holding the identity of the subscriber services accessible to the subscriber and current location of the MS Given a MS ISDN MSISDN number a call is routed by looking up the corresponding IMSI found in the HLR The VLR Visitor s Location Register contains information about all MSs within the area served by the MSC Found in the VLR is information such as MS identity the area in which it was last registered additional information pertaining to the subscriber and an
286. hould generally show a result of about 20 dB For this example we will use TERM mode Verify that the span is not in service Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 176 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS Pressthe PAGE DN F2 F key twice to access the LINE 1 SIGNAL screen Read the signal level Separate readings are given for the positive and negative signals for more accurate information on a faulty regenerator 324 SunSet T1O p Rev 5 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2 X LINE 1 x RX T Equipment Facility MON T1 Device with Suspect Signal Output Figure 176 Measuring Signal Level Ch 4 Applications 325 1 8 Running a Timed Test Many network tests require the use of an exact period such as 15 minutes 1 hour or 24 hours over which to conducta test To set the timer for one of these tests use the following procedure 1 Use the desired procedure in this chapter from section 1 2 or 1 3 as the basis for the testing
287. icates a problem on the other side of the circuit e An active AIS LED may indicate a trouble condition where a network element transmitting to the SunSet T10 has lost its incoming T1 signal and has replaced it with the AIS signal A If additional information is required proceed to step 4 otherwise disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 5 Make a basic measurement by selecting MEASUREMENT RESULTS Verify that the span performs to requirements for the delivered service 6 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 318 SunSet T10 Rev 1 4 Stressing a T1 Line 1 4 4 Using SEND TEST PATTERN 1 2 Set up the span for testing as outlined in section 1 2 of this chapter Proceeduptothe pointof performing measurements Before performing MEASUREMENT RESULTS selectastress pattern for the line A Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to reach the MAIN MENU B Select SEND TEST PATTERN C Select the desired stress pattern The SunSet TIO will immediately begin transmitting the highlighted test pattern Once the pattern is sent check if the BPV and or ERRORS LEDs are on If they are the customer could be having a problem with the circuit Try additional stress patterns as desired QRSS is the original stress pattern and is used as the default stress pattern in the SunSet T10 Other stress patterns and their applications are listed in chapter 5 When finished release the loopback and disconnec
288. iety of DCSs Digital Cross connect Switches connect to DS1 lines DCSs commonly reduce the space required for achieving channel cross connection eliminate the manual labor associated with cross connection and can provide fast comput erized rerouting of facilities in the event of a network outage The common DCSs are type 1x0 1x1 and 3x1 A 1x0 DCS has DS1 ports interfacing the network Internally it cross connects DSOs between the DS1s according to instructions entered through an administrative terminal The 1x0 DCS takes the place of many racks of 1x0 multiplexes combined with a DSX 0 manual cross connect bay Another name for a 1x1 DCS is an electronic DSX 1 Designed as a replacement for the DSX 1 a 3x1 DCS has DS3 ports and possibly DS1 ports facing the network This replaces a bank of M13 multiplexes and the DSX 1 436 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B Deployed in the network is a wide variety of SONET Synchro nous Optical Network equipment This equipment operates at higher rates and introduces a wide variety of new signal formats both opti cal and electrical Designed to interface to an embedded network most SONET equipment also has DS1 and DS3 interfaces SONET equipment replaces equipment like M13 multiplexes and 3x1 DCSs 7 1 4 DS1 Standards Many standards govern various parts of DS1 transmission and network elements The two most important standards are e ANSIT1 102 1987 Digital Hierarchy Electrical Interfaces e ANSIT1 403 N
289. iew print buffer Press the CLR ALL F key and follow the on screen instructions PRINT F2 Press the PRINT F key to print the contents of the buffer VIEW F3 VIEW displays the contents of the buffer as specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings Configure these settings then press the VIEW F key The received messages will be shown individually on screen A sample screen is shown in Figure 85 174 SunSet T10 p Rev B 21 10 05 EIVE MESG NO 11 RECEIVED MESSAGE LINE 1 95 01 01 01 13 51 18 02 01 06 04 08 01 00 46 18 03 A9 83 97 79 01 80 10 22 E UP PAGI Figure 85 ISDN HEX View Screen The ISDN HEX View screen displays one message To view the other pages of messages press the PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 F keys The message shown in Figure 85 is in hexadeci mal code The DECODE F3 F key will decode the hexadecimal digits Figure 86 displays the decoded version of Figure 85 s hexa decimal message If an informational element is present InfoElm F4 F key appears Refer to the D Channel Information Element Decoding section and Figure 87 21 10 05 ESG NO 11 E UP PAGI Figure 86 ISDN VIEW Message Screen Decode View Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 175 The decoded view displays a RESTART message with a call reference number 0 In this screen the HEX F key allows the option of showing
290. ilable service condition then there will be less than 30 available seconds Note that a declared ES errored second occurs when there are one or more errors during an AS available second Per ANSI and Bellcore standards an ES is not counted during an UAS unavailable second To run this test use the following procedure 1 Aloopback must bein place on the circuit to be tested Confirm that the SunSet T10 is properly configured in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 2 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt BRIDGE TAP DETECT The testing will begin immediately 3 To observe the progress of the test refer to either the LINE 1 or LINE 2 LOGICAL screen Use the PAGE DN F2 F key to see the summary results There are 21 patterns in all Each listed pattern is in the order sent IN PROG means that the 30 second measurement for that test pattern is still in progress 4 Whenfinished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note Only a few of the results are stored in the summary listing The information listed includes the pattern number 1 to 21 the pattern name the number of bit errors detected the number of errored seconds detected and the number of available seconds detected Table 4 lists the transmitted patterns 140 QRSS Name Pattern 1 ALL 1 11111 2 1 in 2 010101 3 1 in 4 0100 4 1 in 6 010
291. impedance 100 Q termination There should never be two or more receivers apply ing a low impedance termination Warning If uncertain as to which option to choose select BRIDGE This will protect the 1 544 Mbps signal TERM Use this mode when the SunSet T1O will send and receive a T1 signal It requires that the circuit be disrupted for testing The received signal is terminated by the SunSet T1O and is not ob tained through a MONITOR jack The received signal can have up to 36 dB of cable transmission loss this is a different kind of loss than the 20 dB of resistive loss provided by a DSX MON jack Note When plugging the SunSet T10 into a DSX MON jack in the TERM mode the BPV LED will probably light Use DSXMON mode instead BRIDGE The BRIDGE monitor is similar to the DSXMON moni tor However in BRIDGE the SunSet T10 taps into a live in ser vice terminated DS1 signal with up to 36 dB cable loss The SunSet T1O applies isolation resistors to protect the circuit from a hit Select BRIDGE before clipping onto a live circuit This will put the isolation resistors in place to ensure that the SunSet T10 does not place a hit on the circuit Notes IfBRIDGE mode is used ona DSXMON jack there will be a 40 dB resistive isolation and the SunSet T10 will likely report loss of signal In some cases it may not be clear if the monitor jack being used provides a bridged access or a 20 dB isolation monitor access In this case try BR
292. indicates a loss of signal If the circuit uses ESF framing then CRC is in the diagram Likewise if C bit parity error is listed this is only if C bit parity framing is used Ch 5 Reference 449 7 2 2 Bipolar Violations and Loss of Signal If seeing DS1 or DS3 bipolar violations or loss of signal then the fault is close to the tester DS1 bipolar violations pass through line repeaters office repeaters and NIUs but cannot pass through multiplexes DCSs switches signal format changes i e from op tical to electrical and some types of CSUs DS3 bipolar viola tions indicate that the problem is between the test set and the nearest DS3 equipment within a few hundred feet The 053 format only exists at interconnections between equip ment Different formats are for transmission over long distances In comparison transmitting a DS1 electrical signal through re generative line repeaters for hundreds of miles is possible Thus a DS1 bipolar violation indicates a transmission problem between the test set and the last multiplex DCS or other element that stops bipolar violations Figure 230 illustrates the DS1 case 7 2 3 Frame Bit Bit CRC 6 and C Bit Parity Errors Test at DSX 1 Trouble Here or Here Channelized DS1 Test at DSX 3 Figure 231 FBE and CRC in DS1 Testing Frame Bit Bit CRC 6 and C Bit Parity Errors travel with the DS1 circuit for the entire length
293. ing by more than 100 to 300 bps a digital switch may even put the DS1 out of service and declare an alarm Synchronization is achieved when all signals can have their fre quency traced back to the same clock When installing a network ele ment its timing relationship is one of the items that need consideration This is usually one of master slave For instance if connecting a PBX to a central office switch via a T1 line usually the central office switch is synchronized to the network Therefore the DS1 signal received by the PBX from the central office is synchronized to the network Thus the PBX should be setup for slave timing mode with the DS1 signal received from the central office used as the timing source In turn a D4 channel bank that is connected to the PBX should be slaved to the PBX Illus trated in Figure 226 is one possible distribution of clocking in the network Note that a network element which is slave timed to another network element may also be the master to other network elements attached to it Also note that loop timing or receive timing is the same as slave timing Loop timing because the received timing is looped out the transmitter Receive timing because the timing source is from the received signal 442 SunSet T10 4 Rev B Another method is internal timing The advantage of this is that the element will always be able to generate a signal so no clock signal is required Test sets performing acceptance testi
294. ing the last aver aging interval of one second Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 123 ES This is a count of line 1 logical bit errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test A bit errored second is a second with at least 1 bit error There is no count during bit un available seconds ES This is a percentage of line 1 logical bit errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test SES This is a count of line 1 logical bit severely errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test A bit severely errored second is a second with at least 1 544 bit errors 10 error rate There is no count during bit unavailable seconds SES This is a percentage of line 1 logical bit severely errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test AS This is a count of line 1 logical bit available seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test A bit available second is any bit error free bit errored or bit severely errored second AS This is a percentage of line 1 logical bit available seconds since the beginning of the test UAS This is a count of line 1 logical bit unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test A bit unavailable second is a second during which the test pattern has lost synchronization UASs start counting at the onset of 10 consecutive bit severely errored seconds UASs continue counting until the onset of 10 bit non severely errored seconds UAS
295. interface STANDARD Options ANSI617 F1 Q 933 F2 LMI F3 AUTO F4 Selectthe proper protocol for the interface tested Ifthe protocol is unknown press the AUTO F4 F key and the SunSet T10 will poll the switch to determine the proper protocol used ANSI617 refers to ANSI standard T1 617 REV D Q 933 refers to ITU standard Q 933 REV A LMI refers to the LMI standard FRF1 1 266 SunSet T10 Rev B DLCI LENGTH Options 2 F1 3 F2 4 F3 AUTO F4 Enter the number of octets for the DLCI length Ifthe DLCI length used on the interface is unknown press the AUTO F4 F key The SunSet T10 will poll the switch to determine the proper DLCI length DLCI VALUE Select the DLCI value to use for testing This DLCI value is only for PING testing send and echo response It is not for LMI analysis as LMI uses the reserved DLCI value 0 or 1023 to carry signaling information TIMER The last 4 settings T391 N391 N392 N393 determine how often the full status enquiry response is sent how much time should elapse and error thresholds Use the default values un less a specific test is required to check these parameters The default values are T391 10 N391 6 N392 3 N393 4 After configuring these settings press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the FRAME RELAY screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 267 9 2 LMI Analysis Link management interface signaling was developed to carry impo
296. into the SunSet T10 s serial port Configure Microsoft HyperTerminal as follows Connecttab Connect using Direct to COM1 Configure button Bits per second 9600 Data bits 8 bits Parity none Stop bits 1 Flow control Xon Xoff Setting tab Use defaults Emulation VT100 Onthe PC type logon The HyperTerminal window should display the remote control On the PC press Q for ESCAPE Press ENTER for enter W and other commands are displayed at the left of the Screen The LEDs are displayed as a table of current and history conditions The menus and graphics duplicate the SunSet T10 Alocaluser and a remote usercan work on a problem together The display of objects and graphs i e configurations shown in Figures 4 and 5 are not supported in VT100 emulation SunSet T10 Rev B 33 The check out procedure is now complete If there are any questions or if any of the verification steps failed please contact Customer Service at Sunrise Telecom Inc 302 Enzo Drive San Jose CA 95138 USA Toll Free 1 800 701 5208 24 hours per day 7 days a week Fax 1 408 363 8313 Internet http www sunrisetelecom com E Mail support sunrisetelecom com Ch 1 Initial Set up 25 26 SunSet T10 4 Rev B Chapter 2 Product Description This chapter describes the general features of the SunSet T10 It explains the LEDs keypad functions and the connector panel Shown in Figure 7 is the front view of the SunSet T10
297. ion element coded incorrectl GR 303 CORE Cause Values 429 6 0 GSM TRAU Technology Overview 6 1 GSM Network Architecture Governed by the ETSI standards series 12 is GSM Global System for Mobile Communication GSM technology uses a digital standard for voice and data applications Figure 219 shows a typi cal GSM network EIR VLR MSC Network hud Subsytem 09 os a B PBSC AUC Authentication Center A Interface BSC Base Station Controller BTS Base Transceiver Station EIR Equipment Identity Register HLR Home Location Register MSC Mobile Switching Center VLR Visitor Location Register Um Interface Abis Interface Figure 219 GSM Network The three major components of a GSM network include the MS Mobile Station BSS Base Station Subsystem and NS Network Subsystem It is then connected to a fixed network like a PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network A MS consists of a ME Mobile Equipment and SIM Sub scriber Identity Module The SIM is physically a smart card that identifies the subscriber to the GSM network It also authenti cates and encrypts a subscriber s voice identified by the IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity Once a SIM card is inserted to a GSM terminal or ME it becomes a MS Like the SIM the ME can also be identified using the IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity W
298. ired to be about 20 to 50 ppm of center frequency for error free transmission After adopting digital plesiochronous sometimes called asyn chronous transmission technology switches began converting from analog to digital technology Unfortunately the original DS1 framing concept never anticipated a need to cross connect DSOs directly from one DS1 to another DS1 which is what happens inside a digital switch A call that comes in one channel of a DS1 goes out on another channel of another DS1 8000 times a second a switch takes 1 received frame from each of the DS1s connected to it The switch disassembles each frame into the 24 independent timeslots It checks its call map to see where to send each of the received timeslot bytes Then it sends each byte to the appropriate 051 transmit port It then assembles all the bytes for each transmit DS1 inserts any idle code on timeslots that are not actively in the middle of a call and inserts an appropriate framing bit for the frame type being used Finally it transmits each DS1 frame every 1 8000 of a second There are several 125 mS periods of delay for a byte as it moves through the switch Not all DS1s will have frames ending at exactly the same moment in time For this reason the switch maintains a buffer for each transmitted and received DS1 signal Each buffer provides an elastic store of bits so that the switch will always have bits available to transmit or receive at the required mome
299. is completed ESCAPE This key has two functions 1 It moves back toward the MAIN MENU one screen at a time 2 Itis used to abort an unwanted action A V P 4 Cursor Keys The cursor keys move the highlighted cursor in the indicated direction 32 SunSet T10 49 Rev 2 0 LEDs POWER 1 ed B8ZS e LOW BATT _ 2 B8ZS ERRORS SunSet T10 Figure 9 LED Panel The LEDs light emitting diodes indicate the status of the received signal An LED lights continuously when the condition for that LED occurs on the received signal After an alarm red LED condition ends the LED will begin to blink This blinking provides a history in case no one was present when the condition occurred Pressing the HISTORY key at anytime clears the flashing LEDs Note As various operations are performed on the SunSet T10 the LEDs automatically stop flashing BIT ERROR The Bit Error LED lights if a Bit Error has been detected This LED refers to the line selected L1 Rx or L2 Rx as Rx DROP in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen PAT SYNC The pattern synchronization LED lights green if the SunSet T10 receives the same pattern it transmits Select this pattern in the SEND TEST PATTERN menu View the transmit and receive pattern in the MEASUREMENT RESULTS and GRAPHIC screens The PAT SYNC LED will not light if there is no pattern syn chronization When synchronization occurs the pattern synchro Ch
300. is fast charging is non damaging to the battery When the charger recognizes that the battery is nearly fully charged it converts to trickle charging mode This completes the charging process for maximum battery output The trickle charging mode is also non damaging to the battery over extended periods How ever to get maximum life from the battery remove it from the charger when it is fully charged Here are some tips for getting the best performance out of the battery fnot needed turn the screen backlight off Switch the power off on the SunSet T10 when it is not in use Usethecigarette lighter battery charger when driving This will help keep the battery charged when AC power is not available Ifrunningan extendedtest and uncertain if the battery will last plugthe charger in atthe beginning ofthetest so thatthe SunSet T10 will run indefinitely Plugging the charger in while the battery is low during a test may cause the SunSet T10 s processor to reset and drop the current test Recharge the battery between uses even ifthe time available forarechargeis short The AC battery chargeris a special two stage design that charges the battery to approximately 8096 of its capacity in just a few hours The battery will fully charge overnight Ifthe LED ison continuously then the chargeris in high output mode andis either fast charging the SunSet T10 or powering it during normal operation When the LED blinks regularly the
301. is pattern is BF HEX or 1011 1111 BINARY 100 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 4 1 Sending a USER Test Pattern 1 Select MAIN MENU gt SEND TEST PATTERN and press the USER F1 F key The USER TEST PATTERN screen ap pears TheSunSetT1O will display alist of USER patterns Use the up down arrow keys on the keypad to select the desired pattern Press the ENTER key on the keypad to transmit the selected pattern A The SunSet T10 offers two pre programmed user defined patterns Line 9 contains the IDLE pattern and line 10 the YELLOW pattern 4 2 Viewing a User Test Pattern 1 2 3 From step 1 of Sending a USER Test Pattern select the desired test pattern and press the VIEW F1 F key The selected pattern will be displayed on the screen in hex binary and ASCII When finished viewing press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the USER TEST PATTERN screen 4 3 Programming User Defined Patterns 1 2 From step 1 of Sending a USER Test Pattern select a blank position Press the CREATE F1 F key Press the TOGGLE F3 F key The letter A will begin to flash within the character grid Usethearrow keysonthe keypadto selectthe desired character Pressthe SELECT F4 F key The character selected will appear on the LABEL line Continue until the label is completed Press the TOGGLE F3 F key to escape out of the character grid and back to the LABEL line Press the down arrow key on the keypad
302. is that it cannot measure the quality of transmission on the two outgoing directions from the SunSet T10 to the end of the circuit It can only measure the quality on the two incoming direc tions of transmission CRC This is the number of CRC 6 errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test CRC displays N A when the SunSet T10 cannot synchronize on an ESF signal Usage CRC is a valuable complement to the BPV measure ment BPVs identify errored in service transmission in the local part of the T1 path and CRCs identify errored in service trans mission on the entire path from the origination point to the SunSet T1O If the number of BPV errors is about the same or a little bit less than the CRC errors then there is a problem on the local span However if there are no BPV errors but many CRC errors then the problem is on the other side of the multiplexers or other line terminating equipment 110 SunSet T10 7 Rev Note For in service testing both CRC and BPV give information about errors on the incoming signals but not on the outgoing sig nals To test the line with these measurements take the line out of service and initiate a far end loopback ES This is the number of errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test An errored second is any second with at least one BPV bit error FBE or CRC 6 error There is no count of ES during unavailable seconds Usage Errored seconds are a key tariff par
303. it should now display Stand by Wait until it changes to In Service Escape to the BACKUP D CHNL TEST and press the CALL F3 F key Now enter the specific parameters related to the call making sure to select either LINE 1 or LINE 2 for the B channel B CHNLLINE When the settings are complete press the CALL F3 F key After successfully placing and receiving the call the screen will display SEND L1 CONNECTION ACKNOWLEDGE 10 When finished with the call press the DISC F2 F key to disconnect 11 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 387 4 6 47B D Call Setup This procedure illustrates making an ISDN call on a 47B D ISDN line Perform this test while the circuit is out of service Central Office D Channel Switch Figure 200 47B D 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB or as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 2 Connectthe SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 200 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the flashing LEDs 3 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA use the PAGE DN F2 F key to view T S 24 Six c
304. ith the MAIN MENU and other information Ifa mistake is made while typing logon retype it 12 Use the SunSet T10 just as if it would be used locally The same menus will be displayed There will be a prompt on the screen to show which keys to press to move the cursor the terminal cursor keys will probably also work to inject errors and soon Refresh means that pressing the s key causes the screen to refresh Press the enter key on the terminal to simulate pressing the ENTER key on the SunSet T10 13 When finished type in logoff and press enter on the computer orterminal s keyboard 14 Terminate the phone connection by hanging up the near end modem A variety of asynchronous communications in addition to modems can be used over a public switched telephone network Direct local connection dedicated line and packet are other com munication alternatives Provided in remote control is access to most of the SunSet T10 s capabilities However there are a few differences such as the following The MEASUREMENT RESULTS screen is updated about once every five seconds instead of once each second Donotuse the local print commands during a remote control session because both the printer and the remote control use the same printer port For instance a local user presses the PRNT SCRN key on the keypad while a remote user is logged on This causes the remote user to log off The pulse mask feature is supported for pass fail r
305. itry STATUS The Status bar displays the current looping status of the span Span The Span control line shown ARMED in Figure 31 shows what span control function is currently under process or has been completed 78 SunSet T10 p Rev B Configured in this screen are the items appearing below the diagram in Figure 31 They are SPAN CTRL The exact options available depend upon the FRAMING se lected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen ESF framing ARM DL F1 UNARMDL F2 TOUTDIS F3 LPBkQRY more F1 POWR DN more F2 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 DUAL LB more F3 UNBLOCK more F1 CLR FT1 more F2 ARM INB more F3 SF D4 framing ARM INB F1 TOUTDIS F3 LPBkQRY more F1 POWR DN more F2 UNIVLDN more F3 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 DUAL LB more F3 UNBLOCK more F1 CLR FT1 more F2 ARMDL INB This arms the office repeater and the other repeat ers on the span In most cases ARMDL and ARM INB have the same function Arming is required before the repeaters will actu ally loop up UNARMDL This unarms the data link TOUTDIS Time out disable will turn off the automatic time out of the repeaters on the span If selected be sure to loop down all the repeaters on the span when finished LPBkQRY Loopback query will query all repeaters on the span to see which one is actually looped back If found the repeater num ber will be displayed in the graphic Otherwise LPBK
306. ive a proper response from the network it reports errors Refer to Figure 141 268 SunSet T10 Rev B 21 210 205 LMI ANALYSIS ED TIME 000 01 43 ERRORS Eus LOK ESSAGES ERROR TOTAI TOTA Figure 141 LMI Analysis LMI Analysis displays the following information ELAPSED TIME This is the elapsed time of the test The LMI Analy sis restarts when accessing this screen but the LMI link stays up TIMEOUT ERRORS This counter increments when a proper sta tus or full status message is not received from the network After sending the status inquiry message the SunSet T10 waits for a response per the T391 setting before a declaring a timeout error RESP SEQ NUM Count of response sequence number errors where the received frames are out of sequence WRONG MESSAGES Counts the number of frames containing an invalid message LINK ERROR TOTAL Total number of link errors LINK OK TOTAL Counts when receiving a proper status or full status message from the network Upon starting the test the SunSet T10 waits until receiving a full status message this takes approximately 40 seconds depending on the parameters After receiving a full status message the SunSet T10 counts LINK OK every time it receives a status message Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 269 Press the PVC F1 F key to view the DLCI activity on the PVC Figure 142 reports all configured PVCs and gives a
307. key Since pressing the AUTO key on the keypad Note In the LOGICAL results screens LET replaces ET LET refers to logical elapsed time LET starts counting after achieving PAT SYNC RT This is the remaining time of the test The test runs continu ously by default until stopped by the user For this reason CONTINU continuous is displayed in the RT field However a specific run time can be entered from MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION For a run time you can enter up to 999 hours and 59 minutes FRM transmitted framing TxCd transmitted line coding CNFG test mode configuration RCV received test pattern XMT transmitted test pattern 106 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 Measurement Result Screens T1 SINGL Measurement Results can contain up to seven screens of results Access the pages using the PAGE UP and PAGE DN F keys These screens are Line 1 Summary or No Errors Line 1 Line Line 1 Signal Line 1 Frame Line 1 ESF CRC 6 Line 1 Logical Line 1 Frequency 5 T1 Dual Measurement Results can contain up to eleven screens of results These screens are Line 1 amp 2 Summary or No Errors Line 1 Line Line 2 Line Line 1 Signal Line 2 Signal Line 1 Frame Line 2 Frame Line 1 ESF CRC 6 9 Line 2 ESF CRC 6 10 Line 1 or 2 Logical 11 Line 1 or 2 Frequency Note The ESF CRC 6 screens appear only if ESF framing has been selected in the TEST CONF
308. key and numbers on the keypad to enter the signaling bits for an ON HOOK condition For ESF framing there are four bits for SLC96 and SF framing there are two bits When the settings are correct press the ENTER key on the keypad Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 215 6 10 2 SW56 Call Setup Use this screen to place a SW56 call 21 10 05 SW56 CALL 51 METHOD NUMBER 2124596543 Rx A B 0 Tx A B E 0 KP ST STI ST2 Figure 107 SW56 Call Setup Screen METHOD Options MF F1 DTMF F2 DP F3 Use the F keys to select the dial method multi frequency dual tone multi frequency DP dial pulse NUMBER To enter the number to dial use the following procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad 2 Use the keypad to enter the numbers to dial Use the keypad letters A B etc to enter the special MF tones For MF and DP dialing a pause for one second is entered with the F key on the keypad 3 If a mistake is made while entering the number A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator B Use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the digit to be changed C Press the SHIFT key and enter the number using the number keys on the keypad 216 SunSet T10 p Rev B Note All digits to the right will be erased Enter a USER number either by entering the digits on this line and pressing the STORE more F2 F key or by pressing the USER more F1 F key and
309. key for Entering up to 32 digits is permitted C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator Note For MF dialing A KP B ST C ST1 D ST2 E ST3 F PAUSE 3 Aftera numberis entered pressthe ENTER key onthe keypad to dial the number remember to be OFFHOOK andlisten for a dial tone This will sendthe indicated digits with DIAL PERIOD and SILENT PERIOD as indicated in VF CHANNEL ACCESS DIAL SPRVIS SETUP Use this procedure to speed dial a preprogrammed user number 1 2 Select MAIN MENU VF CHANNEL ACCESS DTMF MF DP DIALING and select the dialing method then NUMBER Press the USER F1 F key to get the list of USER DIAL NUMBERS This is the speed dial list Selectthe desired number and press the ENTER key on the keypad twice to dial the number Remember to be OFFHOOK and listen for a dialtone The SunSet T10 automatically returns to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS screen 336 SunSet T10 p Rev B 1 14 Entering amp Editing Speed Dialing Numbers The SunSet T10 allows for storing of up to 10 DTMF DP or MF USER numbers Each USER number can contain up to 32 digits An character label up to ten characters long can be pro grammed for each phone number The label makes it easier to remember what the number is used for Follow this procedure to program the number 12345ABCD 0 with a label of TESTO1 1 Select MAIN MENU gt VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt PLACE RECEIVE CALLS 2 Select the
310. l SUNRISE TELECOM INCORPORATED Figure 2 Cartridge After Installation 7 Plugthe AC Battery Chargerinto an appropriate AC wall outlet 110V 60 Hz for the SS128 B 8 To install the instrument stand refer to Figure 3 and the following procedure Note Do not install the instrument stand if the protective jacket is used A Remove the two center screws from the rear of the SunSet T10 Save these screws if the instrument stand is to be removed at a later date B Remove the two bottom screws from the rear of the SunSet T10 These screws are slightly longer than the ones removed in step A Save both of these screws for step E C Fit the instrument stand onto the back of the SunSet T10 D Use the two long screws provided with the instrument stand to attach the instrument stand onto the SunSet T10 at the two bottom screw positions 14 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B E Usethe screws saved from step B to attach the instrument stand onto the SunSet T1O at the two center screw posi tions Center Center Screw Screw Bottom Bottom Screw 9 Screw SunSet Before Stand Installation Bottom Screw 1 Screw Bottom Screw 1 Screw SunSet After Stand Installation Figure 3 Instrument Stand Installation 9 Switch the SunSet T10 on and verify that it passes the SELF TEST If the SunSet T10 does not turn on immediately it may need to charge for up to
311. l T1 blocking capability to allow the telephone company to sell a reduced price T1 that only carries a certain number of channels They also may have automated loopback capability and span power down power up capability Found at the ends of DS1 lines is a variety of equipment D4 channel banks are a traditional form of multiplexer that converts ordinary telephone wires to 64 kbps channels for multiplexing onto a DS1 Newer D4 banks offer a wide variety of channel plug ins to handle DDS style circuits private line circuits and even ISDN Found in the Bell environment are AT amp T SLC 96 and SLC 5 sys tem These Bell systems are enhancements to the older D4 style M13 multiplexes are a traditional higher order multiplexer for DS1s These multiplexers take up to 28 DS1s and multiplex them into a single DS3 Note that the DS1 framing and payload still exist inside the DS3 signal but not passed through is the DS1 line coding Often found at the end of T1 lines are toll switches and PBXs class 5 switches central office switches connected to local sub scribers These elements use DS1s as a way of concentrating their connections to local subscribers and interoffice trunks The function of these elements is to take supervision and addressing information from subscribers set up a call throughout the world network for the subscriber connect the subscriber through when the path is setup and terminate the call when the subscriber is finished A var
312. l cause the message to stop Note for ESF NIU Loopbacks This function can be used to loop back a far end NIU from the customer premises side of the near end NIU Set the message to NLPK UP set the repetition to 7 times Seven repetitions will allow the far end NIU to loop up with out letting the signal last long enough to loop up the near end 306 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 11 2 6 RTRV 54016 PM CNTR The performance monitoring data in Pub 54016 conforming CSU can be retrieved with this menu item Select MAIN MENU gt DATALINK CONTROL RTRV 54016 PM CNTR Refer to Figure 166 Note The line must be out of service to retrieve the information 213 t005 RTRV 54106 PM CNTR CSU STATUS NONE CURRENT 15 minutes MEASURE TIME sec 602 ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC 0 584 0 0 0 0 PAST 24 hours VALID INTERVAL 96 ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC 0 1 0 0 0 0 Figure 166 Retrieve Counter The following items appear within this screen PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 Use to view other pages of available information ES Count of errored seconds UAS Count of unavailable seconds BES Count of bit error seconds SES Count of severely errored seconds CSS Controlled Slip Seconds LOFC Loss of frame count 11 2 7 Print 54016 Results Allows printing of 54016 PM results Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 307 12 0 CSU NI Emulation SW181 The CSU NI Emulation software option allows for
313. lO sLine 1 transmit and receive jacks to the circuit under test 3 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS GSM VOICE TRAU BERT VOICE TRAU XMT and configure as shown in Figure 209 Determines the 00 04 49 transmit line Determines the NOTE E S ERAS SMT timeslot 1 24 Determine which subchannel LINE NUMBER LINE 1 1 4 inside the timeslot TIME SLOT 7 SUB CHANNEL 1 Set the idle code inserted IDLE CODE 11111111 on non selected channels LINK DIRCTN UPLINK Transmit in the uplink TIME ALGMNT DELAY 0 x500us BTS to BSC or downlink BSC to BTS direction RCV CBITS Configure the time alignment delay or advance PAUSE UPLINK DNLINK Figure 209 Voice amp TRAU XMT Configuration Screen 4 The 13K RPELTP coded message Sunrise Telecom a step ahead will be transmitted on the selected line timeslot and sub channel 400 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 7 0 Installing a Frame Relay Circuit 7 1 PING Test Every Internet device has its own IP Internet Protocol address Multiple LAN segments can be connected via a Frame Relay net work A common way to discover whether two remote LAN seg ments using the TCP IP protocol are connected is to send a PING Internet Control Message Protocol message from one segment to another When a PING message is received Internet devices ac knowledge the message by sending an echo message back 1 Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TE
314. lable seconds since the beginning of the test An unavailable second begins after 10 consecutive SESs Severely Errored Seconds UAS also occurs when there is a loss of signal LOSS Loss of synchronization seconds is the number of sec onds with pattern loss since the beginning of the test 212 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 10 Switched 56 Testing SW187 Switched 56 Testing is a 56 kbps digital transmission that stuffs 1s into the eight bit to gain the DS1 ones density required for AMI lines Switched 56 Testing checks the operation of switched 56 services at a DS1 access point This allows the technician to setup a call to a digital loopback choose a test pattern and verify BER bit error rate performance It also allows the technician to observe a Teleos call setup in process monitoring both directions in sequence Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt SWITCHED 56 TESTING 21 10 05 SWITCHED 56 TESTING TEST CONFIGURATION SW56 CALL SET UP MEASUREMENT RESULTS TELEOS CALL MONITOR Figure 105 Switched 56 Testing Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 213 6 10 1 Test Configuration 20210205 TEST CONFIGURATION MT CHANNEL 24 CV CHANNE 24 SER PATTERN 00000000 N HOOK AB 0 0 OFF HOOK AB 11 X R TEST PATTERN U 2047 511 Figure 106 SW56 Test Configuration Configure the following items for SW56 testing XMT CHANNEL Options 1 24
315. lar DS1 number ALL F1 Captures all 051 numbers INC F2 amp DEC F3 Use the INC and DEC F keys to enter a specific call reference value The SunSet T10 will now only cap ture messages containing this value GR 303 specifies valid call reference values from 1 28 1 10 F4 Changes the increment decrement value of the F2 and F3 keys 244 SunSet T10 Rev B DSO Number Options 1 24 Allows the SunSet T10 to capture call control messages associated with a particular channel Depending on the DS1 number setting this will be either one channel on all DS1 lines or one channel on a particular DS1 ALL F1 Captures all DSO numbers INC F2 amp DEC F3 Use the INC and DEC keys to enter a specific DSO number The SunSet T10 will capture messages only containing this DSO number GR 303 specifies valid DSO values from 1 24 1 10 F4 This key changes the increment decrement value of the F2 and F3 keys CAUSE VALUE Allows the SunSet T10 to capture messages containing a specific cause value Use this feature to monitor the GR 303 link and look for a protocol error Invalid Information Content or a release mes sage saying channel unavailable ALL F1 Captures all cause values SELECT F2 To filter on a particular cause value 1 Press the SELECT F2 F key A Cause value screen is displayed showing all of the available cause value definitions 2 Use the up down arrow keys on the keypad to and
316. ledgment Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 155 Make sure that either a UA or RR and a Receive Reagy has been received before placing a call To stop ISDN messages 1 Press the more F4 F key 2 Pressthe STOP F1 F key Pressing STOP removes all connec tions to the D channel and the layer 2 messages will stop Toseethe previous or next messages press the NEXT F2 or PREV F3 F keys Torestart the messages press the RESTART F1 F key 156 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 7 2 1 Sequential Call SW186 Sequential Call is an automated stress test In the Sequential Call test the SunSet T10 places a call on all 23 B channels sequentially 1 From the MAIN MENU select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt ISDN PRIMARY RATE START LINK CALL SETUP and press the SEQTEST F2 F key The sequential call setup screen as shown in Figure 72 appears 21 10 05 ENTIAL CALL E S 10 UMBE 3638000 i TYPE DATA 56 NUMBER DIAL 3638313 Figure 72 Sequential Call Setup Configure the following setup items Press the call F3 F key when you are ready to make your call HOLD TIME Options 0 255 seconds Hold Time determines how long the SunSet T10 will hold each call before releasing Choose from 0 255 seconds Use the F keys or the SHIFT key with the keypad to enter in the hold time NEXT F1 Advances by one second PREV F2 Decrements by one second Ch 3 Menu Descrip
317. ll ISUP Messages IAM contains the essential information required for the call It has the flexibility to expand with additional parameters as new service is required Figure 239 illustrates the typical information in an IAM message Message Type IAM Nature of Connection Continuity Check Forward Call Indicator National no interworking caller ISDN Calling Party s Category Ordinary Uses Service Info Speech Circuit _ Called Party Number 14158552301 Calling Party Number 14083638000 presentation allowed Table23 Typical IAM Information Fields 460 SunSet T1O P4 Rev B Chapter 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 1 0 Troubleshooting The following are suggestions for when the SunSet T10 is not performing as expected Problem Continuous BPVs show on screen even though there should be no problem with the signal Suggestion Check the line interface donotuse DSXMON for a full 3V signal do not use TERM for a monitor jack try both BRIDGE and DSXMON for a mon jack do not use BRIDGE or DSXMON on a signal that has been opened and is no longer properly terminated Problem The SunSet T10 performs improperly Suggestions 1 Perform a SELF TEST and see if the problem has been resolved If the SELF TEST shows an ERROR CODE repeat the test to see if the SunSet T10 was able to automatically correct the problem 2 Try turning the SunSet T10 off wait 10 s
318. loopback regenerates the signal but does not reframe the signal Hence BPVs andframe errors will pass through the line loopback unchanged Once invoked the line loopback UNLLB 1 replaces the LLPBK 1 command In this case pressing the UNLLB 1 F2 F key will undo the loopback LLPBK 2 operates a line loopback from L2 Rxto L1 Tx Aline loopback regenerates the signal but does not reframe the signal Hence BPVs andframe errors will pass throughthe line loopback unchanged Once invoked the payload loopback UNPLB 2 command replaces the PLPBK 2 command In this case pressing the UNPLB 2 F3 F key will undo the loopback 6 Whenfinished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU This drops all loopbacks Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 311 312 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B Chapter 4 Applications 1 0 Basic Applications WARNING Plugging into a live T1 circuit may cause a loss in service for multiple customers Proper training is required before proceeding Hazardous voltage is present on T1 spans When plugging in at a repeater housing plug the cord into the SunSet T10 before plugging into the repeater extender or repeater housing To perform a BRIDGE monitor access select BRIDGE in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen before plugging into the circuit This ensures that the isolation resistors are in place before the accessing the circuit Ch 4 Applications 313 1 1 Connecting the Cords Figures 169 170 and 171 display v
319. ltering types In this application ISUP messages are captured therefore SI FIELD ISUP was selected 6 To view each message individually escape back to the MSU MONITOR and select VIEW PRINT TRACER To begin view ing press the VIEW F3 F key Figure 203 shows a sample screen Ch 4 Applications 393 LINE ISUP DCP 9c cc 00 1 9 OC 02 47 00 00 PAGE 02 08 58 RCV MESG NO 65 ANSI 01 01 03 42 51 08 26 00 90 01 9575 85 01 98 06 00 20 24 24 1B 18 00 00 0A 03 05 07 61 31 37 11 09 2D 20 Figure 203 View Message Hexadecimal From Figure 203 observe this is message number 65 and it was received on LINE 1 This message shows the DPC in hexa decimal 7 Pressthe DECODE F3 F key to see the decoded message Refer to Figure 204 SI DPC mesg NOC FRW CLN US CALL CALL 5 02 15 34 RCV MESG NO 65 ANSI 95 01 01 03 42 51 08 INE 1 MSU ISUP SSF 8 BSN 1C 1 FSN 41 1 CIC 0019 036 032 000 OPC 027 024 000 type 01 DI DI GY IAM 10 98 161373740 00 00 09 2D 20 E DN HEX L4deco Figure 204 View Message Decoded 394 SunSet T10 7 Rev B The decoded scre in decimal format Thi message type is IAM en in Figure 204 displays the DPC and OPC s is an ISUP Message Signaling Unit The Initial Address Message Also shown on this screen are the hex values for nature
320. lues as to the nature of an out of service condition For example a break in the line causes a loss of signal at the SunSet T10 if there are no line terminating elements in between the break and the SunSet T1O However if there is a line terminating element then the same break in the line will cause an AISS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 115 LDNS Signal low density seconds is a count of the number of seconds when the 8 n 1 rule is broken Usage This measurement can give an indication as to whether the customer is transmitting illegal strings of data or if B8ZS en coding equipment is working properly For example if line code is set for B8ZS at the SunSet T10 but the SunSet T10 is receiving LDNS counts then a transmitter is not correctly sending the B8ZS code Or if testing an AMI line and getting excessive LDNS counts this indicates that the customer is sending an unusual signal and perhaps that customer should be switched to a B8ZS line EXZS Excess zero seconds is a count of the number of seconds in which excessively long strings of zeroes are detected For AMI coding this is 16 or more consecutive zeroes for B8ZS this is 8 or more consecutive zeroes This measurement is different from LDNS in that it looks for individual strings of zeroes rather than an average ones density over a large number of bits Usage Refer to the usage for LDNS AISS Alarm indication signal is a count of the number of sec onds in which AIS was detecte
321. ly by personnel familiar with the T1 test procedures described earlier in this sec tion This test may require assistance at the far end 1 2 Verify that the fractional circuit is not in service This accep tance test will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 Tx or L2 Tx Rx DROP opposite of Tx INSERT RXLVL 1 DSXMON RXLVL 2 DSXMON Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK INTERN if facing the Fractional CSU otherwise loop through L2 Rx if facing the 1x0 DCS TEST RATE Nx56 or Nx64 setup the desired channels for Ch 4 Applications 347 transmit and receive Press the ENTER key on the keypad when completed The SunSet T10 will return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen LBO 1 amp 2 0 dB or as required When done with press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Notes When selecting Nx56 or Nx64 the screen will switch to the FT 1 TIMESLOT screen Manually set up the timeslots to the configuration indicated in the circuit record If the timeslot configuration is unknown press the AUTO F1 F key to configure the active channels AUTO configuration may not yield the proper channels if any of the active channels are transmitting an idle code It will also not work properly if the idle code set in OTHER FEATURES gt OTHER PARAMETERS gt IDLE CHANNEL COD
322. mber keys Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 187 Code Message Type CCITT ANSI Code in Onl ACM Address Complete Message 06 ANM Answer 09 BLA Blocking Acknowledgment 15 BLO Blocking 13 CCR Continuity Check Request 11 CFN Confusion 2 CGB Circuit Group Blocking 18 CGBA Circuit Group Blocking Acknowledgment 1A CGU Circuit Group Unblocking 19 CGUA Circuit Group Unblocking Acknowledgment 1B CMC Call Modification Completed X 1D CMR Call Modification Request x 1C CMRJ Call Modification Reject X 1E CON Connect X 07 COT Continuity 05 CPG Call Progress 2C Circuit Query 2A CQR Circuit Query Response 2B CRA Circuit Reservation Acknowledgment X E9 CRG Charge Information X 31 CRM Circuit Reservation X EA CVR Circuit Validation Response x EB CVT Circuit Validation Test X EC DRS Delayed Release X 27 EXM Exit X ED FAA Facility Accepted X 20 FAR Facility Request X 21 FOT Forward Transfer 08 FRJ Facility Reject X 1F GRA Circuit Group Reset Acknowledgment 17 GRS Circuit Group Reset 29 IAM Initial Address Message 01 INF Information 04 INR Information Request 03 _ Loop Back Acknowledgment 29 OLM Overload X 30 PAM Pas
323. mea sured during the previous averaging interval The interval is for one second Usage CURBER is useful conducting long term measure ments In this case a single period of high errors can skew the average error rate high It is then useful to know if the errors are still occurring Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 113 ES Errored seconds is a count of seconds with at least one bipo lar violation since the beginning of the test There is no count during BPV UASs ES This is a percentage of BPV ESs that has occurred since the beginning of the test There is no count during BPV UASs SES Severely errored seconds is a count of seconds with at least a 10 bipolar violation error rate since the beginning of the test There is no count during BPV UASs SES This is the percentage of BPV SESs that have occurred since the beginning of the test AS This is the number of available seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test A BPV AS is any second that is not a BPV UAS AS This is a percentage of available BPV seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test UAS This is the count of bipolar violation unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test A UAS is counted if there is a loss of signal or at the onset of 10 consecutive BPV SESs BPV UAS continues counting until the onset of 10 consecutive available non SESs UAS This is a percentage of BPV UASs that have occurred since the beginning of the test
324. means that LINE 2 s transmitter and receiver are disabled Observe the LEDs on the SunSet T10 If the ERRORS LED is red the TEST CONFIGURATION screen is most likely setup for BRIDGE or DSXMON instead of TERM PULSES B8ZS PAT SYNC and ESF LEDs should be green If any are red check the TEST CONFIGURATION screen and cable setup 8 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen A Select TEST RATE and press the 1 544M F1 F key B Press the GRAPHIC key on the keypad and notice the changes Refer to Figure 5 Ch 1 Initial Set up 17 08 21 36 TISINGL ESF G B8ZS T ORSS RCV ORSS E 1544kbps Figure5 T1SINGL Test Rate 1 544 kbps For LINE 1 Rx is the SunSet T10 s receiver For LINE 1 Tx is the transmitter LINE 2 is disabled This means that LINE 2 s transmitter and receiver are disabled If the ERRORS LED is red TEST CONFIGURATION is most likely setup for BRIDGE or DSXMON instead of TERM PULSES PAT SYNC and ESF LEDs should be green If any are checkthe TEST CONFIGURATION screen andcable setup C Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until the MAIN MENU is displayed Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL and configure in the order shown TYPE IN BAND CODE NI MODE LOOP UP Note Pressing the LOOP UP F1 F key starts this function high light MODE and then press ENTER A
325. ment Vault Notes 1 Plug the cords in the order shown 2 Two sets are required for this setup 3 Atermination plug may be needed in each OUT jack Otherwise the MON signal may be unreadable Figure 186 SLC 96 A Digroup Data Link Transmission 354 SunSet T10 47 Rev B 2 3 In Service Hitless Dual Drop amp Insert THRU Testing e 7 SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2 LINE 1 NimH 15V TX is i M T1 Equipment 1 T1 Equipment 2 Figure 187 In Service Full Duplex THRU Drop and Insert Warning Only experienced technicians should attempt this procedure Any mistakes will disrupt service By entering the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu the SunSet T10 will start sending a tone or sound from the microphone to the specified channel that is set in VF MEASUREMENTS Make sure these settings are correct before continuing In service drop and insert testing is useful for placing a telephone call on a single channel sending and receiving tones to test channels Use the following procedure 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L2 Rx RxLVL 1 DSXMON or BRIDGE RxLVL 2 DSXMON or BRIDGE Tx SOURCE THRU FRAMING as specified by the circuit Ch 4 Applications 355 Tx CODING as specified by the circuit XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE 1 544M LBO
326. ment is that the 1 second averaging interval is so short that it is not useful for finding error rates below 10 OOFS This is a count of out of frame seconds that have oc curred since the beginning of the test Note that the conditions for out of frame may be adjusted in the MEASUREMENT PARAM ETERS screen An out of frame condition occurs when either 2 in 4 or 2 in 5 framing bits have been in error OOFS starts counting when an out of frame condition occurs OOFS continues to increment until framing has reestablished or until 3 consecutive seconds have been out of frame In this case LOF is declared OOFS is decremented by 3 and LOFS is incremented by 3 Once an out of frame condition occurs the SunSet T10 begins searching for a new framing position The out of frame condition ends when framing has been reestablished If the framing remains in the original position then no further action takes place If the framing moves to a new position then a COFA change of frame alignment is declared Usage A large OOFS count is an indication of significant transmission problems COFA This is a count of changes of frame alignment that have occurred since the beginning of the test Refer to OOFS for the conditions that result in the declaration of a COFA YELS This is the count of yellow alarm seconds since the begin ning of the test A yellow alarm takes different forms depending onthe framing of the signal For an SF signal a zero in bit
327. mething is heard D Talk into the microphone located below the keypad You should hear your voice through the speaker located on the LED panel INSERT TYPE mustbe setfor TALK in order to hear your voice through the speaker E Continue to configure VF MEASUREMENTS as follows INSERT TYPE TONE atone will sound after selecting TONE reduce volume as needed TONE FREQ Hz 1004 TONE LVL dBm 0 dBm lfoptioned for LEVEL FREQUENCY verify the RxFRQ LVLis 1004 Hz 2 and 00 0 dBm 0 3 Ch 1 Initial Set up 21 F Select Tx 1 A B C D and press the OFFHOOK F2 F key Verify that the Rx 1 A B C D bits are all 1s Press the ON HOOK F1 F key and verify that the Rx 1 A B C D bits are all Os G Set INSERT TYPE to TALK H Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 19 Select PLACE RECEIVE CALLS A Select METHOD and press the DTMF F2 F key B Select NUMBER and press the SHIFT key on the keypad Observe the SHIFT lock indicator on the display C Enter the number 4083638000 by using the keypad D Press the SHIFT key again to remove the SHIFT indicator E Pressthe ENTER key onthe keypad to dial the number and verify that the dialing can be heard F Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 20 Select VIEW SUPERVISION Note that the speaker turns off A Verify the signaling of all columns are 0000 exceptfor 1111 in column 1 row 1 B Press the
328. mmary 138 Quick Test Results 139 Pulse Mask Analysis 141 DDS Measurements Menu 143 DDS Configuration amp Send Pattern Screen 144 DDS Loop Back Access Screen 146 DDS Measurement Results 148 Send Receive Control Code 149 ISDN Primary Rate Menu 151 ISDN Configuration 152 Emulate Type 152 Call Setup Screen 155 Sequential Call Setup 157 Sequential Call Results 159 BERT Test 160 Sequential BERT Results 161 Start Link Call Setup 163 ISDN INFO Screen 166 ISDN BER Measurements 167 Receiving a Call Screen 168 Backup D Channel Status Screen 169 L STAT Screen 170 D Channel Filter Setup Screen 172 Start Tracer Screen for ISDN 173 ISDN View Print Tracer Screen 174 ISDN HEX View Screen 175 ISDN VIEW Message Screen Decode View 175 Information Element 176 ISDN Other Parameters 177 SS7 Analysis Menu 180 SS7 Configuration 181 Setup Filter 183 SCCP Setup Filter 189 View Print Tracer 197 ANSI SCCP Message Hex View 198 ANSI SCCP Message Decode View 199 Layer 4 Decoded TCAP Message 200 Component Decode Screen 203 SU Analysis Count Screen 204 SU Analysis Statist Screen 205 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT Menu 206 473 Figures con t 101 GSM Monitor Screen 207 102 VOICE TRAU XMT Screen 209 103 Uplink Downlink Directions 210 104 GSM 16K BERT 211 105 Switched 56 Testing Menu 213 106 SW56 Test Configuration 214 107 SW56 Call Setup Screen 216 108 Measurement Results Screen 218 109
329. n T1DUAL Before entering CSU NI Emulation screen configure the TEST CONFIGURATION screen as follows TEST MODE T1DUAL TXINSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx RXLVL 1 AND 2 TERM BRIDGE or DSXMON TXSOURCE THRU or TESTPAT FRAMING as appropriate for the circuit under test Cannotbe AUTO framed CODING as appropriate for the circuit under test XMTCLK L1 Rx or INTERN RATE 1 544 M CSU NI Emulation screen is not available for fractional rates LBO 1 amp 2 as appropriate for the line under test Note If setting TXINSERT and Rx DROP to Line 2 the following message is displayed Support L1 Tx L1 Rx Only 2 Plug the cords into the SunSet T10 and circuit under test Confirmthatsignal coming from the network is connected to the Line 1 jacks The SunSet T1O will respond to loopback codes fromthe network and the CSU NI Emulation screen will appear as shown in Figure 168 310 SunSet T10 Rev B 3 Setup the SunSet T10 for either NI emulation or CSU emulation Do this by selecting TYPE and choose either CSU F1 or NIU F2 4 Observe any circuit error counts and verify that the SunSet T10 is receiving aremote loopback command Note thatthe framing of the remote loopback command must be the same as the framing selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 5 If desired operate any of the local commands as follows RESET F1 resets the SunSet T10 to a through mode LLPBK 1 F2 operates a line loopback from L1 Rxto L2 Tx Aline
330. n Figure 33 They are SPAN CTRL The exact options available depend upon the FRAMING se lected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen ESF Framing ARM DL F1 UNARMDL F2 TOUTDIS F3 LPBkQRY more F1 POWR DN more F2 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 SEQLPBK more F3 SF D4 Framing ARM INB F1 TOUTDIS LPBKQRY more F1 POWR DN more F2 UNIVLDN more F3 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 SEQLPBK more F3 ARM DL INB This key arms the office repeater and line repeaters on the span In most cases ARM INB and ARM DL have the same function UNARMDL This unarms the data link TOUTDIS Time out disable will turn off the automatic time out of the repeaters on the span If pressed be sure to loop down all the repeaters on the span when finished LPBkQRY Loopback query will query all the repeaters on the span to see which one is actually looped back and if found a repeater number will be displayed in the graphic Otherwise LPBK will display either the looped or the unlooped mode POWR DN Power down commands the office repeater to cut power to the span The power will remain cut until another function is chosen or the MAIN MENU is accessed Powering down the span resets all the repeaters Arm the office repeater before selecting POWR DN 84 SunSet T10 p Rev B UNIVLDN This causes the SunSet T10 to transmit the universal loop down code to loop down any looped repeaters Pressing the LOOP UP
331. n the transmission line induces repeated errors on the service The CSU at the end of the line sees the errors as CRC 6 errors and generates a PRM in the other direction The installed performance monitoring equipment in the central office and the tech nician using their SunSet T10 can both see the message 446 SunSet T10 8 Rev B 7 2 Troubleshooting and Fault Sectionalization This section will help locate problems on T1 circuits First is a checklist on various problems that often happen with T1 circuits followed by information about errors and alarms to help quickly find the problem Is the circuit properly wired Check for loose wire wraps bad splices connections to wrong pairs etc Are there any cable problems For example bridge taps wet cable paper insulated cable shorts or grounds Is the cable T screened Ideal T1 transmission cables use a screen to separate the two directions of transmission to prevent cross talk Are the T1s in the screened cable properly sepa rated into transmit and receive binder groups Is the circuit properly connected at all of the offices along its route Is transmit and receive plugged in backwards A surprising number of circuits are backwards Try the other way Are there any AMI B8ZS mismatches AMI and B8ZS line codes are incompatible Both ends of a T1 line must use the same coding If all ones work correctly QRS has errors and 3 in
332. nd Os signal Verify that there are no errors with any of these signals If there are any errors then the problems are not associated with a B8ZS AMI mismatch Transmit a 3 in 24 signal If any equipment in the line has optioning that disagrees with the SunSet T10 a loss of pattern synchronization will occur Verify the diagnosis by transmitting QRSS QRSS will also cause errors when there is an AMI B8ZS mismatch in the circuit but it will not cause a loss of pattern synchronization 320 SunSet T10 p Rev Note Referring to the setups of section 1 2 of this chapter the customer s T1 terminating equipment is isolated from the circuit Thus if the customer s equipment has the optioning problem this procedure will not expose it while the circuit is looped up If the circuit tests OK while looped up but fails when looped down check if the line code monitored in one direction is not the same as the line code monitored in the other direction If it is not then the customer s equipment may be at fault Perform a loop back from the central office to the network equipment customer premises as shown in Figure 174 If the problem still is not evi dent from the central office then testing at the customer s pre mises will be required Ch 4 Applications 321 1 6 Checking for Frame Slips amp Frequency Sync Frequency synchronization can be a problem when the customer purchases a channelized T1 circuit the customer s
333. nds 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator RATE Options 1e 3 to 9e 9 For RATE MODE choose the error RATE number and expo nent The errors are inserted at a continuous rate as specified To start error injection press the ERRINJ key on the keypad and the SunSet T10 will insert errors as specified If the error injection is set for RATE mode an ERINJ indicator will be dis played on screen 10 3 1 Programming a Burst of 10 Errors 1 Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES ERROR INJECTION 2 Select TYPE and then press the LOGIC F2 F key 3 Thecursor automatically moves to MODE selection Press the BURST F2 F key 4 Thecursor automatically moves to COUNT A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator B Using the number keys on the keypad press the 1 key followed by the 0 key The COUNT should show 10 C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 5 Press ENTER on the keypad The SunSet TIO is programmed to inject 10 CODE errors each time the ERRINJ key on the keypad is pressed 286 SunSet T10 Rev B 10 3 2 Programming a 1e 06 Bit Error Rate 1 Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES ERROR INJECTION 2 At TYPE press the LOGIC F2 F key 3 The cursor automatically moves down to MODE selection Press the RATE F1 F key 4 The cursor automatically moves down to RATE A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIF
334. ne goes on hook and off hook 10 times per sec ond in order to dial a given number To dial the number 7 the Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 229 SunSet T10 starts in the off hook condition and then goes on hook off hook seven times This type of addressing is used in Switched 56 services TX AB Options ON HOOK F1 OFFHOOK F2 WINK FLASH F3 TX AB selects the transmit signaling bits Theexactsupervision will depend onthe supervision trunktype and equipment settings in the DIAL SPRVIS SETUP screen OFF HOOK When in the OFF HOOK state you may select FLASH FLASH transmits supervision bits creating a momentary on hook state the set automatically returns to off hook ON HOOK When in the ON HOOK state you may select WINK WINK transmits supervision bits creating a momentary off hook state the set automatically returns to on hook NUMBER Toenter the digits to be dialed 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator appears 2 Enter the desired numbers and letters if applicable using the keypad A For DTMF and MF dialing a legend appears at the bottom of the screen showing which keypad letters correspond to which control codes 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator Tx CHNL F keys NEXT F1 PREV F2 SCAN F3 NEXT amp PREV Assigns the transmit channel Use NEXT or PREV to choose the desired transmit time slot for the T1 Line Select from 1 24 If selecting T1
335. ng usually use internal timing Note that internal timing is not accept able when the test set will be transmitting toward a switch for Nx64 kbps testing the switch is drawing its timing from something other than the test set In this case the test set should be loop timed 7 1 10 Supervision Common T1 framing methods transmit supervisory information through robbed bit signaling Every 6 frames the least significant bit in the PCM byte for every channel is robbed This robbed bit transmits the signaling information In SF framing the robbed bits in the sixth and twelfth frames form the Aand B signaling bits for each channel The type of circuit carried in the channel determines the bit interpretation For instance on an E amp M circuit when A 0 and B 0 the circuit is idle the user is on hook When 1 and B 1 the circuit is seized the user is off hook In ESF framing there are 24 frames grouped together with bit 8 of each channel in frames 6 12 18 and 24 as the ABCD signaling bits Most ESF signaling is identical to SF signaling the C and D bits are copies of the A and B bits The SLC 96 data link handles SLC 96 supervision 7 1 11 Addressing Addressing is the process of sending a telephone subscriber address to setup a call The oldest addressing technique in use today is pulse dialing With pulse dialing the phone goes on hook and off hook 10 times per second in order to dial a number For example to dial a
336. ng the parity bit is even ODD The total number of ones including the parity bit is odd NONE Signifies no parity Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 71 3 0 LPBK amp Span Control The Loopback amp Span Control screen can operate many kinds of loopback devices on a T1 line With the circuit looped back it is possible to measure the transmission performance on the trans mission path between the SunSet T10 and the loopback device Displayed in Figure 29 are the various options 21 10 05 LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL SU amp NI CONTROL TREND OFFICE TREND LINE RPTR ELL OFFICE RPTR LINE RPTR iLL NIU PM amp MSS END MSS PAN CONTROI Q TE TE WE WE WE TE H Figure 29 Loopback and Span Control Menu Before proceeding find out if the line to be tested has one or more loopback devices installed If so find out what type of loop back it is and how it operates 72 SunSet T10 p Rev B 3 4 CSU amp NI Control Use the CSU amp NI Control screen to loop up down a CSU or NI 201 10205 CSU amp NI CONTROL MODE TYPE IN BAND CODE NI LOOP UP LOOP DN Figure 30 CSU and NI Control The following items appear in the CSU and NI Control screen MODE Options LOOP UP F1 LOOP DN F2 Note Select this item last Pressing the F1 or F2 F keys causes the SunSet T10 to begin the specified procedure therefore if needed change
337. nt The received and transmitted DS1s must be at the same fre quency of the switch Any received DS1 that is going too slowly will eventually run out of bits in its buffer This is because the switch is taking bits out of the buffer faster than the DS1 is filling the buffer When the buffer is empty the switch must insert extra data in each of the transmitted timeslots on the cross connected channels An error has now occurred because the transmitted bits do not match the received bits Likewise if any of the received DS1 s frequency is higher than the switch the receive buffer will overflow This is because the bits are coming in faster than they are leaving Once the buffer overflows some of the received bits are not transmitted on the cross connected channel An error has again occurred this time because data has been lost The deployment of digital switches has resulted in an effort to synchronize all DS1s so that errors will not occur in switched circuits that use DS1 for transport Ch 5 Reference 441 7 1 9 Synchronization Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave Figure 226 Timing Distribution 051 circuits need synchronization with each other to avoid the switch ing problems described in the previous section Minor frequency devia tions will cause only pops and crackles on a voice circuit Rendered virtually useless by the regular errors resulting from frequency slippage are data circuits If a DS1 is slipp
338. of the circuit They pass through higher order multiplexes They also pass through changes in line format from copper to fiber fiber to radio etc If they are occur ring with bipolar violations then the problem is local and if occur ring without bipolar violations then the problem is behind the last format change Figure 231 shows what these errors mean when seen without BPVs 450 SunSet T1O P4 Rev B 7 2 4 AIS and Yellow Alarm Yellow Alarm at DSX 1 Loss of Signal Here or Here ES AIS 04 gt M13 Yellow AIS at DSX 1 Loss of Signal Here or Here LLLI Jg ER Figure 232 DS1 Yellow and AIS AIS indicates that the line problem is somewhere behind the last multiplex DCS fiber mux or other device that replaces a loss of signal with AIS Yellow alarm means the received signal has been lost at the end of the line that generated the monitored signal When moni toring in the other direction if itis a framed signal then the prob lem must exist between the test set and the end of the line gener ating the Yellow alarm If it is an unframed signal i e AIS or loss of signal the problem is between the test set and the other end of the circuit Figure 232 shows how the AIS and Yellow alarms show up in 051 DS3 fault sectionalization Ch 5 Reference 451 7 2 5 FEBE or ESF PRM Errors ESF PRM Errors Loss of Signal Here or Here
339. oice channels in one 4 wire circuit End users have migrated their pri vate networks onto leased T1s as a means of reducing their net work operation costs DS1 is a universal digital access point to traditional digital networks and newer fiber optic synchronous net works 7 1 2 T1 Services Telephone companies are now selling T1 point to point cir cuits in a variety of formats Channelized T1 circuits are often sold as a means of connecting PBXs Private Branch Exchanges or ACDs Automatic Call Distributors to a central office switch In this case the telephone company may also install and maintain a channel bank for the customer at their premises T1 pipes are sold to more sophisticated users who only require point to point connectivity of a T1 circuit from the telephone company 434 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 7 1 3 DS1 Network Elements Customer Premises Figure 222 DS1 Network Elements As shown in Figure 222 a rich variety of equipment is avail able for T1 circuits CSUS Customer Service Units can convert a V 35 or other computer based synchronous signal format into the DS1 format and insert the appropriate DS1 framing CSUs also provide loop back capability indicator lights monitor jacks and split access for troubleshooting and installation debugging Installed by the telephone
340. on SLC 96 testing Refer to the digital loop carrier maintenance manual for detailed information also see TR TSY 000008 for SLC 96 reference infor mation Note that most SLC 96 systems come with maintenance capabilities built into the system Use these maintenance fea tures as a first step in troubleshooting SLC 96 problems T1 test equipment should be only be used when the SLC 96 maintenance features are not available WARNING SLC 96 systems carry up to 96 channels of customer traffic Properly trained personnel should only use the test setups described here Use these test setups only in conjunction with a SLC 96 maintenance manual Verify with the manual that the planned maintenance activities will not cause a disruption in service Three typical SLC 96 maintenance applications are discussed in this section The applications cover in service data link moni toring out of service testing and in service digroup testing Use Figure 183 as a guide for each of these applications Controlled Central Office Environment Vault Central Office Switch Central Office erminal Terminal 4 z MUS m A DIGROUP SLC 96 FRAME ALL MODES NOTE 1 BDIGROUP MODE 1 ONLY D4 FRAME 1 C DIGROUP D4 MODES SLC 96 MODE II 1 D DIGROUP MODE 1 D4 FRAME 888 1 358 P DIGROUP SLC 96 FRAME I
341. on the keypad and verify that the SunSet T1O is in THRU Mode F Connectthe cord from LINE 2 Tx to the IN jack of TE 1 The circuit will be disrupted for two or more seconds when the cords are connected G Connectthe cord from LINE 1 Txto the IN jack of TE 2 The circuit will be disrupted for two or more seconds when the cords are connected Ch 4 Applications 373 3 4 SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT fLINE2 LINE1 NimH15V PES TX RX TX RX es o e ele eO S TE1 Test Pattern All Zeros OUT IN Figure 192 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge any blinking LEDs Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is green Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA A Since Rx DROP L2 Rx in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen has been selected the data displayed is from LINE 2 Rx B Verify that the pattern sent by TE 2 is shown on all of the timeslots According to Figure 192 the 1 4 pattern should be seen This confirms that the SunSet T10 is receiving the LINE 2 signal properly C Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the MAIN MENU Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and change Rx DROP to L1 Rx A Pressthe ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select MAIN MENU OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA A
342. onfiguration Menu 275 General Configuration Screen 278 Version Option Screen 282 Measurement Configuration 283 Error Injection Screen 285 Other Parameters 288 Coding Mismatch Message 290 View Test Record 291 Data Link Control SLC 96 293 Monitor Data Link SLC 96 294 SLC 96 Send Message 295 View Data Link 297 Data Link Control ESF 298 Monitor T1 403 PRM 299 T1 403 SPRM Decode 301 Monitor T1 403 NPRM Screen 302 Monitor T1 403 BOM 303 Data Link Transmit T1 403 PRM 304 Data Link Send Message 305 Retrieve Counter 307 CSU NI Emulation T1 SINGL 308 CSU NI Emulation T1 DUAL 310 Plugging in DSXMON Mode 314 Plugging in BRIDGE Mode 314 Plugging in TERM Mode 314 Accepting a New T1 Span 315 Monitoring an In Service Circuit 317 Verify Proper B8ZS AMI Optioning 320 Frequency Synchronization Problems 323 Measuring Signal Level 325 Checking DSX Wiring 327 Ten Bit Pattern 329 Monitoring an In Service Voice Frequency Channel 339 Simple Talk Listen 341 Fractional T1 Circuit 345 Plugging into the FT1 Circuit 347 Typical SLC 96 System Configuration 349 Monitoring the SLC Data Link 351 SLC 96 Out of Service Testing 353 SLC 96 A Digroup Data Link Transmission 354 In Service Full Duplex THRU Drop and Insert 355 Modem Testing with Datacom 364 Datacom Interface Screen 365 Local and Remote Loopback 367 475 Figures con t 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201
343. ong and is mandatory for all TCAP messages Table 13 lists the package types Package Type Identifiers H G F E D C B A HEX Code Unidirectional 1 11 0 5 1 Query with Permission fitif1f ofof of 1 o0 E2 Query without Permission 1 11 140 1 Response 11 1 110o0 ol 1 o o E4 Conversation with Permission 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 E5 Conversation without Permission 1 1 1 o o 1 1 o0 Ee Abort 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 pe Table 13 TCAP Package Type Identifiers The Package Type in Figure 96 is Query with Permission In Figure 94 the hex message is E2 the corresponding hex code in the second row Messages with these package types do the fol lowing e Unidirectional sends information in only one direction no reply is expected There is no interaction made with TCAP Query with Permission initiates a TCAP transaction informs the TCAP node that it may end the TCAP transaction Query without Permission initiates a TCAP transaction but informsthe destination node thatit may notendthe transaction Response ends the TCAP transaction Conversation with Permission a continuation of a TCAP transaction informs the destination node that it may end the TCAP transaction Conversation without Permission a continuation of a TCAP transaction but informs the destination node that it may not end the TCAP transaction Abort inform
344. onsecutive ones together with two zeroes should be displayed for ex ample 00111111 11001111 or 11110011 If not observed then the D channel is not set up to handle ISDN messages 388 SunSet T10 7 Rev B Escape and select ISDN PRIMARY RATE CONFIGURA TION Set up according to the circuit making sure the EMU LATE TYPE is set for TE Escapeandselect ISDN PRIMARY RATE OTHER PARAM ETERS Setup LINE 1 D Channel Setup for 47B D emulation by setting the 47B D CONFIG to ENABLE Note that the L2 INTERFACE ID will automatically change to 2 when 47B D is enabled Escape and select ISDN PRIMARY RATE gt START LINK CALL SETUP Press the call F3 F key Now enter the specific parameters related to the call making sure to select either LINE 1 or LINE 2 to place the B channel call found in B CHNL LINE Press the call F3 F key to place the call After successfully placing and receiving the call the SunSet T10 will display SEND L1 CONNECTION ACKNOWLEDGE When finished with the call press the DISC F2 F key to disconnect Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 389 4 7 Receiving Two Simultaneous B Channel Calls This procedure illustrates receiving two simultaneous B Channel calls 1 2 Verify that the span is notin service This ISDN call will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING
345. or all signaling and timeslot assignments the CSC is used Robbed bit ABCD signaling is not used In the first example the customer initiates the call Refer to Figure 218 When the RDT detects that a customer is requesting service it sends a SETUP message to the IDT indicating the Call Refer ence Value of the customer requesting service The IDT responds with a SETUP ACKNOWLEDGE message indicating which DS1 DSO to use for the call When the RDT receives this SETUP AC KNOWLEDGE the RDT connects the line unit to the indicated DSO When the IDT initiates call clearing it sends a DISCON NECT message The RDT then disconnects the line unit from the DSO and sends a RELEASE message The IDT then sends a RELEASE COMPLETE message and the DSO is disconnected If the RDT initiates call clearing it sends a DISCONNECT to the IDT The IDT sends a NOTIFY message to the RDT while the LDS determines if it can clear the call If the LDS can clear the 426 SunSet T1O Rev B call the IDT disconnects the DSO and sends a RELEASE mes sage The RDT responds with a RELEASE COMPLETE mes sage and disconnects the line unit from the DSO When initiating the call from the IDT the IDT sends the SETUP message identifying the 051 050 to use for the call When the RDT determines it can complete the call The RDT then sends a CALL PROCEEDING message to the IDT informing the IDT that customer alerting has begun When the RDT detects that the cus tomer has been conn
346. or rate measurements sending and receiving special network control codes From the MAIN MENU OTHER MEASUREMENTS DDS MEASUREMENTS The screen shown in Figure 63 appears 21 10 05 DDS MEASUREMENTS CONFIG amp SEND PATT LOOP BACK ACCESS MEASUREMENT RESULTS SEND RCV CTRL CODES Figure 63 DDS Measurements Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 143 6 6 1 Configuration amp Send Pattern 1 From the DDS MEASUREMENTS menu select CONFIG amp SEND PATT andconfigurethe TEST CONFIGURATION screen asrequired ZA Os 05 TEST CONFIGURATION Tx T S Rx T S 0 TEST RATE 9600 SEND PATT 511 USER PATT 00000000 Figure 64 DDS Configuration amp Send Pattern Screen The DDS Configuration amp Send Pattern Screen contains the following setup items Tx T S Options 1 24 Use the F Keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to select Tx time slot and where the DDS control codes will be transmitted Rx T S Options 1 24 Use the F Keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to select Rx time slot and where the DDS control codes will be received TEST RATE Options 2400 F1 4800 F2 9600 F3 19 2k more F1 56k more F2 64k more F3 Press the appropriate F Key to specify the test rate 144 SunSet T10 7 Rev SEND PATT Options 2047 F1 511 F2 127 F3 63 more F1 1111 more F2 0000 more F3 DDS 1 more F1 DDS 2 more F2 DDS 3 more
347. ore Figure 40 HDSL Span Control The HDSL Span Control screen contains a graphic that up dates according to circuit status To send commands use the F key options for the COMMAND line Found in this screen are the following features Screen Graphic The box at the far left represents the SunSet T10 The indicates the L1 Tx signal R indicates L1 Rx signal Thenetworklabeled boxes are HTU C HTU R and NIU When looping up a network element the graphic updates For ex ample Figure 40 shows a loopback at the NIU TIME Indicates the amount of time that has elapsed since arming the span STATUS Indicates the span s status This reports either Span IDLE or Span ARMED COMMAND Options ARM INB F1 UNARMIN F2 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 TOUTDIS more F3 ARM DL more F1 UNARMDL more F2 ARM INB Arm in band sends an in band arming code Arm most equipment before responding to loopback commands UNARMIN Un Arm in band sends an in band disarming code 98 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B LOOP UP LOOP DN These F keys send a loop command for the specific network equipment specified in EQUIPMENT TOUTDIS Time out disable will disable the automatic time out of the span equipment If selected be sure to loop down all of the repeaters on the span when finished ARM DL Arm data link sends an arming command in the Datalink This arms the equipment on the span Arm most equipment be fore
348. ormation from the NIU Select DEACTIV when you are finished viewing the data LINE Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the keypad num bers to enter the desired number Use the following procedure to send the control codes to re trieve the performance information 1 Select MSS RAMP ACCESS 2 Press the ACTIVAT F1 F key 3 Choose the line to read the RAMP A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator on the screen 94 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B B Enter the number of the line to read using the numbers on the keypad C Press the ENTER key on the keypad 4 When the RAMP control has completed message is shown pressthe ESCAPE key onthe keypad until WESTELL NIU PM amp MSS is reached 5 Select RTRV VIEW ALL PM REPORT A Press the DELETE F4 F key B Retrieve the performance monitoring data as described in the RTRV VIEW ALL PM RPT procedure C View and print the data as desired 6 When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad until MSS RAMP ACCESS appears 7 Select DEACTVAT F2 and press the ENTER key on the keypad When the control sequences finish the procedure is completed Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 95 3 7 Teltrend MSS Switch Control SW 184 21 10 05 MSS SWITCH CONTROL ACTION Bg LINE 01 SWITCH RELE Figure 39 Teltrend MSS Switch Control Configure the following items in the Teltrend MSS Switch Con trol screen ACTION Options SW
349. ot set up to handle ISDN messages Escape to the MAIN MENU and select OTHER MEASURE MENTS gt ISDN PRIMARY RATE and setup the CONFIGURA TION and OTHER PARAMETERS screens according to the circuit Escape out and select START LINK CALL SETUP A Wait and verify that the READY indicator is at the top of the screen This indicates that the D Channel is operational B Set up the call by pressing the CALL F3 F key C Enter the desired parameters making sure that CALL TYPE is DATA 56 or DATA 64 D Press the call F3 F key to place the call A SEND L1 CONNECTION ACKNOWLEDGE message should be displayed After the message is displayed press the BERT F2 F key to display the BERT measurements After finishing the call press the DISC F2 F key to discon nect Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 384 SunSet T10 7 Rev 4 4 Emulate a ISDN Network Terminal or PBX This procedure illustrates how the SunSet T10 can replace a NT or PBX 1 Verify that the span is notin service This ISDN call will disrupt service 2 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 3 Select SEND TEST PATTERN and choose 1 8 Press the ENTER k
350. out box in order for the re mote control to work To begin remote operation follow this procedure 1 Connect the Sunrise Telecom DIN 8 to RS232C Printer Cable 55115 to the SunSet T10 2 Connect the Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter SS122B to the free end of the Printer Cable The ends are labeled Test Set Cord and Printer Terminal 3 Connectthe null modem adapter to a gender changer Normally this will be a female to female conversion 4 Connect the gender changer to the cable which connects to a computer or terminal Ch 2 Product Description 43 5 Confirm that the SunSet T10 s serial port settings correspond to those of the communications software or terminal The SunSet T10 s default settings are BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE STOP BIT 1 BIT BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CR LF 6 To configure the SunSet T10 s serial port settings use this lettered procedure A Select MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES SYSTEM CONFIG GENERAL CONFIG B Select BAUD RATE Four options are available 1200 F1 2400 F2 and 9600 F3 These settings determine the rate at which the SunSet T10 transmits data to the computer or terminal This setting must match the setting on the target computer or terminal otherwise random characters will appear on the remote screen C Select PARITY Three options are available NONE F1 EVEN F2 and ODD F3 This setting must match the setting on the target computer or terminal
351. p Rev 6 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad four times to return to the MAIN MENU 7 Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt PROPA GATION DELAY and the SunSet T10 will perform a propagation delay measurementon the looped up circuit Read the value of circuit delay reported in uS 8 When finished press the ESCAPE key on the keypad twice to return to the MAIN MENU 9 Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL gt CSU amp NI CONTROL select the MODE line 10 Pressthe LOOP DN F2 F key to release the loopback Verify that the LOOP DOWN SUCCEEDED message is displayed 11 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad three times to return to the MAIN MENU 11 Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 333 1 12 Determine Distance to Loopback 1 2 Verify that the span is not in service This test will disrupt service Select MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by your design Tx CODING as specified by your design Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Connectthe SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 172 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking LEDs Select LPBK amp SPAN CONTROL CSU amp NI CONTROL For SF framing configure as follows MODE LOOP UP Do not select this item until t
352. pattern and receiving the results This applies only to T1 Dual mode TIME SLOT Options 1 24 Select the time slot to use for the BERT test Choose from 1 24 using the F keys INC 1 F2 increments the time slot number by one DEC 1 F3 decrements the time slot number by one Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 211 SUB CHANNEL Options 1 4 Select the 16k sub channel used for the BERT test Change the selection using the following F keys INC 1 F2 increments the sub channel number by one DEC 1 F3 decrements the sub channel number by one PATTERN Options 2047 ALL 1 ALLO ALT10 Use the more F3 F key to choose the pattern When the desired pattern appears press the F2 key to begin transmitting the pattern The following measurements are displayed in the lower por tion of the screen shown in Figure 104 ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time since the beginning of the test This begins counting upon accessing the 16K BERT screen or when the STOP RESUME F1 F key is pressed ERROR The number of bit errors that have occurred since the start of the test RATE This the average bit error rate since the beginning of the test ES Number of errored seconds since the beginning of the test EFS The number of error free seconds since the beginning of the test SES The number of severely errored seconds since the begin ning of the test A severely errored second contains a 10e 03 error rate UAS The number of unavai
353. plays either SEND OUT for placing a call or RECEIVE for receiving a call Bch CFG Displays the B channel configuration TERM or LOOP BEARER Displays the type of call VOICE DATA 56 or DATA 64 CHANNEL Displays the B channel used to make or receive the call CLED ID Displays the called ID 166 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 7 2 5 Performing a BERT Test After successfully placing a data call the BER more F2 F key is available Pressing this F key displays the BER measure ment screen This screen presents the measurement parameters specified in G 821 Only DATA 64 DATA 56 and NX64 CALL TYPEs in the CALL mode can give BER measurements Refer to Figure 78 Note When viewing BER measurements verify that both the PAT SYNC LED and the appropriate framing LED are green These two LEDs signify that the patterns and framing match for the trans mitting and receiving patterns 21 10 05 ET 000 00 40 TX 1 RX B 1 PATT 2047 RATE 56K RESULTS ESTART HOLDSCR Figure 78 ISDN BER Measurements The following F keys are available in this screen RESTART F1 This restarts the measurements clearing all re sults and resetting the elapsed time to 00 00 HOLDSCR CONTINU F2 This freezes the measurement screen to allow viewing of the results The SunSet T1O will continue to take measurements in the background but the measurements are not be updated until the CONTINU F key is pressed Ch 3
354. ppear in Figure 95 Message number in this example the number of the message is 1 Receive line in this example the line receiving the message is line 2 Thedate andtime ofthe message as received In this example the date is 01 10 02 and the time is 00 10 48 77 e MSU Message Signaling Unit in this example it is SCCP DPC Destination Point Code and the OPC Originating Point Code displayed in decimal form View the following information mesg type Displays both the hexadecimal form Figures 95 and 96 and the message type in parentheses In Figure 95 the mes sage type is DT1 DT1 is the Dataform 1 message and is sent by either end of a signaling connection to pass SCCP user data be tween two SCCP nodes Referring to Figure 94 the hex code is 06 in the second row Table 9 lists the different SCCP message types DEST REF The Destination Local Reference field is three octets long This reference number is included in the SCCP message to allow the receiving node to identify the message with one particular connection session It identifies a signaling connection in a node SEG RES The Segmenting Reassembling parameter field is in cluded in the data to serve a segmenting reassembling function This is the more data bit M bit In this octet bits 2 8 are spare Bit 1 is the More Data indication and coded as Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 199 0 data 1 data In Figure 95 the
355. press the ENTER key on the keypad to select the desired cause Refer to Table 15 Code Cause Value Definitions 016 Normal Clearing 027 Destination Out of Service 034 Channel Unavailable 035 Destination Channel Unavailable 041 Temporary Failure 044 Line Unit Unavailable 047 Ring Failure 081 Invalid Call Reference 096 Mandatory Element Missing 099 Information Element Unimplemented 100 Invalid Information Contents Table 15 Cause Values Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 245 8 1 2 1 Pre and Post Filtering The SunSet T10 provides for pre and post filters for GR 303 tracing Apre filter captures only specified messages in the buffer it ignores the rest A post filter captures all messages in the buffer then allows selective viewing of the messages To configure the SunSet T10 for pre filtering Select MAIN MENU gt GR 303 MONITOR gt MONITOR TMC CSC gt START TRACER Press the more F4 F key and press the FLTR ON F1 F key Ahighlighted FIL indicator appears at the top of the screen The SunSet T10 is now pre filtering messages It captures and stores only those messages matching the filter specified To disable the pre filter press the FLTR OFF F1 F key the FIL indicator disappears To post filter messages Note Make sure the Filter is off in the Start Tracer screen 1 2 3 Select MAIN MENU GR 303 MONITOR M
356. r Lines 1 and 2 are activated The PAT SYNC LED BIT ERROR LED and the logical frequency screens in MEASUREMENT RESULTS refer to the Line selected as RX DROP in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 08 21 36 EST CONFIGURATION T TEST MODE Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx RxLVL 1 ERM RxLVL 2 ERM Tx SOURCE ESTPAT FRAMING 5 EOF Tx CODING B8ZS XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 amp 2 OdB TISINGL T1DUAL T1 MUX DATACOM Figure 20 T1DUAL Test Configuration 08 21 36 Tx RX LINE TERM EST RATE 1544kbps RCV ORSS Figure21 T1DUAL Graphic Test Mode 56 SunSet T10 p Rev B Figure 21 displays the graphic associated with the configura tion of Figure 20 Access this graphic screen by pressing the GRAPHIC key on the keypad The following setup parameters are associated with T1DUAL mode Tx INSERT Options L1 Tx F1 L2 Tx F2 Tx INSERT determines the line on which the SunSet T10 will transmit a test pattern or insert the dropped signal This deter mines where the 1 544M test pattern Nx64Kbps test pattern Nx64Kbps multiplexed signal Nx56Kbps test pattern Nx56Kbps multiplexed signal or voice frequency channel will be inserted For example if configuring Tx INSERT for L2 Tx while talking on the SunSet T10 then your voice will be inserted on Line 2 Rx DROP Options L1
357. r for a description of message type and information element contents Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 247 The following F keys are within the Start Tracer screen Options RESTART F1 PAUSE RESUME F2 HEX F3 FLTR ON FLTR OFF more F1 SCROLL more F2 CLR ALL more F3 RESTART Clears the current screen display and resets the cur rent number to 0 RESTART does not erase any messages stored in the buffer PAUSE Stops the live capture mode After pressing the F2 key a PAUSE indicator appears at the top of the screen When this indi cator is present the SunSet TIO is not capturing messages Press the RESUME F2 F key to start capturing messages again HEX When a message is present pressing the HEX F key dis plays the message in hexadecimal format FLTR ON This F key sets a pre filter When the FLTR ON F1 F key is pressed a FIL indicator appears at the top of the screen When this is present the SunSet T10 captures only those mes sages that match the TMC FILTER settings To turn off the pre filter press the FLTR OFF F1 F key SCROLL Allows paging through the messages stored in the buffer Upon pressing the SCROLL F key a SCR indicator appears at the top of the screen and two F key options appear PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 These allow viewing of all of the mes sages Press the RETURN F4 F key to exit the scroll mode Note that messages are captured and stored in scroll mode CLR ALL Clears all messages
358. r future use A value of 0 is normally used Layer 2 TEI Options 0 127 F Keys INC 10 F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 10 F3 DEC 1 F4 The Terminal Endpoint Identifier identifies the terminal to which the message is intended Select a value between 0 127 The val ues are grouped as follows e 0 63 fixed TEI assignment 64 126 automatic assignment e 127 group TEI for broadcast data link connection Note A value of 0 is normally used L1INTRFACE ID Options 0 127 F Keys INC 10 F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 10 F3 DEC 1 F4 Used to select the L1 INTRFACE ID number Enter a value from 0 127 178 SunSet T10 p Rev B L2 INTRFACE ID Options 0 127 F Keys INC 10 F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 10 F3 DEC 1 F4 Used to select the L1 INTRFACE ID number Enter a value from 0 127 47B D CONFIGURE Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 Select ENABLE F1 to configure for a 47B D ISDN emula tion or DISABLE F2 for 23B D or 46B 2D ISDN emulation Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 179 6 8 SS7 Analysis Option SW189 The software option SW189 SS7 ANALYSIS can be accessed from the MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt SS7 ANALYSIS Refer to Figure 89 Note The SunSet T10 must be in T1DUAL Mode to enter SS7 ANALYSIS 213105205 SS7 ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION MSU MONITOR SU ANALYSIS Figure 89 SS7 Analysis Menu 180 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 1 Configuration 2151005 CONFIGURATION Line 1 Rx T S 1 Line 2 Rx T S 1 S
359. re is en abledforthe HDSL span the arming sequence will activate the NIU loopback in the HTU R n some cases the HTU R can be configured to react to smartjack loopback commands in which case the loop could be from the HTU R instead of an NIU Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 99 4 0 Send Test Pattern Access the SEND TEST PATTERN screen from the MAIN MENU Refer to Figure 41 21 10 05 EST PATTERN QRSS 2047 1 8 2e20 511 1 16 L 2e15 127 3 24 L ALT10 63 T1 1 TI 3 T1 4 TLAS DDS 1 DDS 2 DDS 3 DDS 6 SENDING 2e23 Figure 41 Send Test Pattern Menu Use the following procedure to select and send a test pattern 1 Select MAIN MENU SEND TEST PATTERN and use the arrow keys onthe keypad to select the desired pattern You can also select USER F1 Note The SunSet T10 transmits a new test pattern each time a pattern is highlighted with the cursor For a description of the Test Patterns refer to Chapter 5 Reference USER This selection allows a user defined pattern with a maximum length of 2048 binary characters or 512 hexadecimal characters Ten such patterns may be stored in the USER TEST PATTERN screen The SunSet T10 offers two pre programmed user patterns which are stored in slots 9 and 10 of the USER TEST PATTERN screen Slot 9 is an IDLE signal also known as Customer Dis connect Indicator CDI The IDLE pattern is 17 HEX or 0001 0111 BINARY Slot 10 is the YELLOW pattern Th
360. repeaters on the span to see which one is actually looped back If found the repeater number will be displayed in the graphic Otherwise LPBK will be displayed in either the looped or the unlooped mode PWLPQRY Power loop query will query all repeaters on the span to see which one is looping the span simplex power A message will appear if the power loop query finds a repeater in the power loop PWCUTTH Power cut through will tell the repeater which has looped the span power to attempt to cut that power through the other repeaters on the span UNIVLDN This causes the SunSet T10 to transmit the universal loop down code to loop down any looped repeaters LOOP UP This key loops up the specified line repeater Arm the repeater before using this function Enter the RPTR number be fore selecting the LOOP UP command Note Arming is required before the repeaters will actually loop up LOOP DN Loop Down loops down any line repeater it does not loop down the NIU RPTR NO Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and use the keypad num bers to enter the desired repeater number 82 SunSet T10 p Rev B 3 4 Westell Office Repeater SW 184 21 10 05 ELL OFFICE RPTR TIME 001 50 STATUS Span ARME SPAN CTRL MERE RPTR No 01 RPTR TYPE 31xx 56 ARM DL UNARMDL TOUTDIS more Figure 33 Westell Office Repeater Westell repeaters are looped back similarly to the Teltrend but ther
361. ribution With HDSL T1 service can be provided wherever transceiv ers can be installed at both ends of the twisted pair loop This is more simple and cost effective than repeater installation Deploy ing HDSL circuits can be much quicker than traditional T1 cir cuits Another benefit of HDSL is that bridge taps do not need to be removed if they total less than 2 500 ft Ch 5 Reference 421 5 0 GR 303 Technology Overview GR 308 is a Bellcore defined interface between the central office switch and a remote terminal to handle all call management and operation functions for the DLC Digital Loop Carrier system Known formerly as TR 303 GR 303 CORE has replaced it GR 303 is an IDLC Integrated Digital Loop Carrier system that con sists of an IDT Integrated Digital Terminal and a RDT Remote Digital Terminal The IDT is part of the LDS Local Digital Switch in the Central Office Figure 215 provides a basic illustration of a GR 303 IDLC system Serving Central Office RDT Distribution network analog xdsl copper wireless etc Cos LDS Local Digital Switch IDT Integrated Digital Terminal OS Operations System RDT Remote Digital Terminal LTE Line Terminal Equipment Figure 215 GR 303 System The GR 303 Interface IDT RDT can range from 2 28 DS1 lines The 2 line minimum meets small sized applications while allowing for a back up system The 28 line maximum meets large sized application
362. riod and direction using the F keys 4 When all the numbers and entries are as desired press the ENTER key on the keypad to retrieve and view the data 3 6 3 Reset PM Counters Occasionally the data at the NIU may become corrupted This command allows resetting all of the NIU performance regis ters to zero 1 Whenthe warning message is displayed press the ENTER key on the keypad All counters will reset to zero 3 6 4 Retrieve NIU Header This command displays the date and time set at the PM NIU 3 6 5 Set NIU Time amp Date This command allows setting the NIU time and date in year month day and hour minute second format Note Setting NIU time and date will cause all the registers to be reset to N A not available Retrieve the available performance information before resetting the time and date Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 91 3 6 0 MSS Switch Control This command sends the control sequence to initiate the main tenance switch Refer to Figure 37 21 10 05 MSS SWITCH CONTROL ACTION BS LINE seu SWITCH RELE Figure 37 MSS Switch Control Configure the following items in the MSS Switch Control Screen ACTION Options SWITCH F1 RELEASE F2 SWITCH Select if connected to the maintenance switch and ready to switch a circuit over to the spare RELEASE Select if connected to the customer s span and the customer is using the maintenance span LINE Specify a line number if selectin
363. rom 000 00 mmm ss as soon as the span is armed This indicates how much time is remaining until the repeater automatically drops its loopback This usually occurs because of the repeater s time out circuitry STATUS The Status bar displays the current looping status of the span SPAN The Span Control line here displaying ARMED in Figure 34 displays what span control function is currently under process or complete Configured in this screen are the items appearing below the diagram in Figure 34 They are SPAN CTRL The available options depend upon the FRAMING selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 86 SunSet T10 p Rev B ESF Framing ARM DL F1 UNARMDL F2 TOUTDIS F3 LPBkQRY more F1 PWR QRY more F2 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 SEQLPBK more F3 SF D4 Framing ARM INB F1 TOUTDIS LPBkQRY more F1 PWR QRY more F2 UNIVLDN more F3 LOOP UP more F1 LOOP DN more F2 SEQLPBK more F3 ARM DL INB This arms the office repeater and the line repeaters on the span In most cases ARM INB and ARM DL have the same function UNARMDL This unarms the data link TOUTDIS Time out disable will turn off the automatic time out of the repeaters on the span If selected be sure to loop down all the repeaters on the span when finished LPBkQRY Loopback query will query all the repeaters on the span to see which one is actually looped back and if found a repeater number will b
364. ronization Problems 6 Select MAIN MENU MEASUREMENT RESULTS and press the PAGE UP F key once to view the LINE 1 FREQUENCY screen If there is a problem the frequency slip bar will be moving across the screen If there is no bar drawn then no slippage is occurring 7 Ifusing an external signal source be sure to check both sides ofthe circuit If using one side of the circuitasthe reference and the other side as the tested signal then the test is completed Disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 323 1 7 Measuring Signal Level Signal level may be measured while performing one of the other tests or by itself At a DSX OUT jack the level should be 2 7 to 3 3 volts At repeater outputs the voltage should be 2 4 to 3 3 volts The loss atthe repeater inputs should generally be 10 to 35 dB The signal strength at the input of an office repeater bay CSU or NI should be from 0 dB to 15 dB If there is a signal on the OUT jack use the setup shown in Figure 176 to measure the level Otherwise use the setup shown in Figure 172 1 Determine the type of access mode to use This measurement can use TERM DSXMON or BRIDGE modes TERM and BRIDGE provide the most accurate results but DSXMON may be the most convenient mode TERM will disrupt service BRIDGE is accurate but the results can be degraded by a low quality termination at the network element terminating the T1 line ADSXMON measurement s
365. ror Injection Screen This screen configures the type of errors and the number of errors to be sent when the ERRINJ key on the keypad is pressed TYPE Options BPV F1 LOGIC F2 LOG BPV FRAME F4 e Specifies the type of errors to be inserted BPV Bipolar violation LOGIC Logic type error LOG BPV Bipolar violation with logic error FRAME Frame type error MODE Options RATE F1 BURST F2 e Specifies the mode of error injection Thethirdline will vary depending upon the mode selected For rate mode this line will be RATE for burst mode this line will be COUNT RATE This mode inserts errors at a specified rate When inject ing errors at a rate an ERRINJ message is displayed at the top of the screen This message specifies the type of errors inserted To stop injecting errors press the ERRINJ key on the keypad again and verify that the error indicator no longer appears on the screen BURST This mode inserts a specified number of errors each time the ERRINJ key on the keypad is pressed Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 285 COUNT Options 1 to 9999 ForBURST MODE choose the number of errors to be inserted each time the ERRINJ key on the keypad is pressed Use this procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator 2 Using the keypad enter in any number between 1 and 9999 The errors will be inserted in approximately 1 second or less and will cause from 1 to 3 errored seco
366. rors have occurred or at least one out of frame has occurred There is no count during a frame unavailable second SES This is the percentage of frame severely errored seconds since the beginning of the test AS This is a count of the frame available seconds since the be ginning of the test A frame available second is any frame error free second frame errored second or frame severely errored sec ond AS This is the percentage of frame available seconds since the beginning of the test UAS Aline 1 frame unavailable second occurs at the onset of 3 consecutive OOFSs or 10 consecutive SESs UASs continue counting until the onset of 10 consecutive frame error free sec onds or frame errored seconds UAS This is the percentage of frame unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test 120 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 5 1 5 ESF CRC 6 Screen The ESF CRC 6 screen displays all of the results derived from the CRC 6 cyclic redundancy check code 6 bits within the ESF signal They appear only with an ESF signal Shown in Fig ure 50 is the LINE 1 ESF CRC 6 screen 21 10 05 ET 000 37 50 RT CONTINU FRM ESF TxCd B8ZS CNFG TE RCV QRSS XMT ORSS ESE RC 6 ER 0 0e 03 00 000 00 000 100 00 000 Figure 50 Line 1 ESF CRC 6 Screen Defined as follows are the measurements in Figure 50 CRC This is a count of ESF CRC 6 block errors that have oc curred since the beginning of t
367. rotocol Architecture 455 SunSet T10 49 Rev Figures con t 236 MSU Message Structure 457 237 LSSU Message Structure 458 238 FISU Message Structure 459 239 Typical Phone Call ISUP Messages 460 Fractional T1 345 Frame Relay Configuration ANSI617 266 DLCI LENGTH 267 DLCI VALUE 267 INTERFACE 266 LMI 266 N391 267 N392 267 N393 267 Q 933 266 STANDARD 266 T391 267 TIMER 267 UNI 266 Frame Relay LMI Analysis ELAPSED TIME 269 heartbeat 268 keep alive 268 LINK ERROR TOTAL 269 LINK OK TOTAL 269 PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit 268 RESP SEQ NUM 269 TIMEOUT ERRORS 269 virtual circuits 268 WRONG MESSAGES 269 Frame Relay PING TEST DEST IP 272 IP Internet Protocol address 271 401 LMI MESSAGE 272 LOCAL IP 271 NLPID 272 NO OF PINGS 272 RFC 1490 272 TCP IP protocol 271 401 TIMEOUT 272 Frame Relay PING TEST Response ECHOED IPS NO 274 Frame Relay PING TEST Results AVG 273 CUR 273 Index 477 Frame Relay PING TEST Results con t ERROR 273 MAX 273 MIN 273 PINGS 273 RECEIVE 273 ROUND TRIP TIME 273 SENT 273 STATUS 273 UNREACH 273 Frame Relay Structure BECN 416 C R 416 D C DLCore Control 417 DE 417 DLCI 416 417 EA 416 FECN 416 FRAMING SLC 966 52 UNFRAME 52 G General Configuration Screen BACK LIGHT 279 BAUD RATE 279 BITS CHAR 280 CR LF INSRT 280 DATE Y M D 278 MEAS DURATION 283 OUT OF FRAME 284 PARITY 279 PRINT EVENT 284 PRINT PERI
368. rtant status information between UNIs user network links LMI defines special management frames with a unique DLCI ad dress passed between the network and local access device Link management signaling confirms that the UNI is connected and active and informs the user on the status of all virtual circuits at the interface LMI reports on whether the interface is active this is often called a heartbeat or keep alive signal all valid DLCIs defined at that interface the status of each PVC permanent virtual circuit new active and inactive This shows the addition deletion of virtual circuits and the availability of new virtual circuits To do the analysis use the following procedure Select MAIN MENU gt FRAME RELAY gt LMI ANALYSIS Upon accessing this screen the SunSet T10 begins sending and responding to the link management signaling to check the status of the UNI The SunSet T10 sends a status enquiry message per the T391 setting The network must respond with astatus message for each inquiry message After sending and receiving the right number of inquires perthe N391 setting the SunSet T10 sends a full status inquiry to the network When the SunSet T10 receives a full status message from the network it reports OK Note Upon entering the screen wait approximately 40 seconds depending on parameters If the SunSet T10 receives a proper response form the network it reports OK If the SunSet T10 does not rece
369. s the type of messages to filter e SCCP Useto search for messages belonging to the Signaling Connection Control Part SUP Use to search for ISDN User Part messages SNM Use to search for Signaling Network Maintenance mes sages SNT Use to search for Signaling Network Testing messages TUP Useto search for messages belonging to the Telephone User Part Since ANSI protocol does not use the Telephone User Part TUP will not be an available option if ANSI was selected as the SS7 Version in the SS7 Configuration screen Upon selecting a particular SI Field more filtering choices will appear in the lower portion of the screen They are described in the following sections 184 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 1 1 TUP Filtering Fields CIC CODE Options NONE F1 000 to FFF F keys NONE F1 INC 1 F2 DEC 1 F3 1 10 50 F4 Use to enter a Circuit Identification Code in hexadecimal form The CIC is used as a label for circuit related messages identify the telephone circuit connecting the Destination Point and the Originating Point For TUP the least significant 4 bits of the CIC field are the SLS Signaling Link Selection is used to perform load sharing when needed HEAD CODE Options NONE F1 00 to FF The TUP Heading Code indicates the group to which the message belongs as well as the name of the message Table 7 lists the TUP Head codes ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3
370. s Along 28 REL Release 0 RES Resume RLC Release Complete 10 RSC Reset Circuit 12 SAM Subsequent Address Message X 02 505 Suspend oD UBA Unblocking Acknowledgment 16 UBL Unblocking Signal 14 USIS Unequipped Circuit Identification Code 2E USR User to User Information 2D Table8 ISUP Message Types 188 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 1 3 Filtering Fields for SCCP Selecting SCCP the screen shown in Figure 92 appears Note Enter Layer 2 information before selecting SCCP Follow this order because layer 2 information is not available ifthe SCCP F key is used in the SI FIELD 2143 10205 SCCP SETUP FILTER iS CODE NONE ESG TYPE 006 DDR SIGNL CALLED 083638000 UBSYS NO 03 IG PT COD XXX XXX CAP FILTR ON RIG TRXID XXXXXXXX EST TRXID XXXXXXXX S M A 4 S S T D g EC 1 1 10 50 Figure 92 SCCP Setup Filter Select the following filtering items SLS CODE Options 0 to F The Signaling Link Selection Code is a 4 bit long code It is used where appropriate in load sharing MESG TYPE Options 000 to 255 in decimal Usetoselecta Message Type The SCCP message types are shown in Table 9 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 189 Codes SCCP Messages ANSI Decimal Only Code AK Data Acknowledgment 8 CC Connection Confirm e CR
371. s MESSAGE if the SunSet T10 is currently receiving a message on the data link This is displayed under the LAST MESSAGE line If the SunSet T10 is not receiving a message the MESSAGE line will say IDLE and the last message received is displayed under the LAST MESSAGE line Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 303 11 2 4 Send T1 403 PRM 13 DATA LINK TRANSMIT T1 403 ELAPS TIME 000 32 21 RC 1 lt 5 10 lt 100 lt 319 C gt 320 FE FSBEE PV SLIP LBsec YELsec Figure 164 Data Link Transmit T1 403 PRM Configure the SunSet T1O to send the T1 403 performance report message by entering SEND T1 403 The SunSet T1O will broadcast the message on the currently selected TX jack accord ing to the quality of the received signal It does this on the cur rently selected received jack The SunSet T10 will display a count of all the various errors recorded and transmitted since entering this menu The SunSet T10 sends this message continuously until escaping from this menu 304 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 11 2 5 Send T1 403 BOM 13 28 00 DATA LINK SEND MESSAGE ESF T1 403 ESSAGE 111111110 101000 EPETITION CONTINU EL ALM PLPK UP PLPK DN Figure 165 Data Link Send Message Use SEND T1 403BOM to send data link bit oriented mes sages In this screen select a message and specify the number of repetitions Use the following proced
372. s and is consistent with higher rate facilities DS3 GR 303 s main advantage is its flexible concentration GR 303 may support up to 2048 subscribers sharing between the 2 and 28 051 lines This reduces the hardware requirements at the LDS The level of concentration is provisioned by the telco Assigned for call processing operations is one DSO The TMC Timeslot Management Channel occupies channel 24 There is a primary TMC possibly though not necessarily on DS1 1 and a back up on a separate 051 line thereby robbing two DSO s for call management When a customer goes off hook the TMC is used to dynamically assign a DSO for the call Once assigned a DSO the robbed ABCD bits for that DSO are used for call super vision When the customer goes on hook ABCD bits the IDT releases the DSO through TMC messages The TMC uses a sub set of Q 931 protocol for its messages Q 931 is the standard used by ISDN In fact if ISDN is known most of the GR 303 messages and call procedures should be familiar 422 SunSet T1O Rev B GR 303 has an alternative method of call management In stead of a TMC a system might use a CSC Common Signaling Channel to handle call processing Found on channel 24 and backed up on channel 24 of a different DS1 line isthe CSC CSC verses TMC is an either or situation The CSC differs from TMC because it does not use ABCD robbed bit signaling Accomplished by the protocol messages in the CSC are both tim
373. s application is useful if you suspect a faulty multiplex By successfully sub stituting the SunSet T10 for a MUX you can isolate the problem to that replaced MUX 1 From the MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION and config ure as follows TEST MODE T1 MUX T1 section Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx FRAMING As specified by the span design CODING As specified by the span design RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLK L1 Rx Note In T1 MUX the set is forced to received timing LBO 1 amp 2 As specified by the span design DATACOM section TYPE Select the datacom interface that will provide a 64 kbps frame TxSRC T1DRP MODE DCE in T1 MUX the SunSet T10 is forced to DCE MUX section BERT T1DRP T1INS The same as DATACOM TYPE i e RS232 T1T S Select the 64 kbps timeslot s to be multiplexed from the datacom to the T1 side see step 3 3 Select the 64Kbps timeslot s to be multiplexed A Press the Nx64K F1 F key to enter the T10 TIME SLOT screen B Use the arrow keys to move the flashing cursor to the desired receive timeslot and press the SELECT F2 F key As you select your receive timeslots the respective trans mit timeslots will also be highlighted This is because the receive andtransmittimeslots should normally be setto the same numbers 370 SunSet T10 Rev B If you want these timeslots to differ select the transmit section and manually set up the desired timeslots You may also press UN
374. s or SLC 96 framing errors 4 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to escape from MEASUREMENT RESULTS and select DATA LINK CON TROL gt MONITOR DATALINK Observe if a protection switch is in place If there is one note which digroup and the direction of transmission Observe if a far end loop is in place on any of the digroup this will be signified by ALM next to the FELP category 5 Reposition the plug into the remote terminal monitor jack Plug Position 2 in Figure 184 Observe the mode of the remote WP1 WP1B if there is a SLC 96 system alarm if any of the remote shelves are in alarm e if there is a protection line switch in place ifthere is a far end loop in place 6 Takeappropriate maintenance action 7 When done disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 352 SunSet T10 p Rev 2 2 2 Out of service SLC 96 Testing Central Office SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE2 LINE 1_ NmH45V TX Rx Rx o p Central Office Terminal Remote or Terminal Direct MON Switch Controlled Environment Vault Remote A Digroup Terminal Figure 185 SLC 96 Out of Service Testing This procedure is for out of service testing on an SLC 96 sys tem This test cannot be performed on a live circuit 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING SLC 96
375. s the destination node that the originating node has terminated the TCAP transaction ORIG TRX ID The originator assigns the Transaction ID It con sists of 4 octets and is indicated by the h at right Figure 94 shows the hexadecimal form COMP TYPE Table 14 lists the TCAP Component Types Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 201 Component Type H G F E D C BY A HEX Identifiers Code Invoke Last 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 9 Return Result Last 171 1 o0 1 0 1 0 EA Return Error fifilifo ifof 1 1 Reject Lifififo if1f o o cEc Invoke Not Last 11 1 11 o 1 1 0 41 ED Return Result Not Last 1 1 1 0o0 1 1 1 0 EE Table 14 TCAP Component Type Identifiers In Figure 96 the ED HEX code is decoded under COMP TYPE In Figure 94 ED is near the end of the third row Invoke Not Last invokes an operation and indicates that further responding com ponents are expected The Component Types are defined as Invoke Last Starts an operation and indicates that there are no further responding components Return Result Last Retrieves the results of an invoked opera tion This indicates that there are no further responding compo nents Return Error Reports the unsuccessful completion of an opera tion Reject Reports the rejection of an incorrect package or compo nent type Invoke Not Last Starts an operation and indicates that further responding components are expe
376. s used for stress testing T1 circuits and network elements The framing bit is inserted at octet bound aries The following is the actual pattern 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 80 F5 55 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF F5 55 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF FF 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF D3 414 SunSet T10 8 Rev B T1 6 55 octet This is the original 55 octet pattern It is used for stress test ing T1 circuits and network elements If transmitted in a framed signal with AMI coding it will violate the 15 zero constraint It does not violate the zeroes constraint in an unframed signal If framed the framing bit is inserted at octet boundaries The follow ing is the actual pattern 80 80 80 80 80 80 00 80 80 80 80 80 80 CO 80 80 80 80 EO 80 80 80 80 AA AA AA AA 55 55 55 55 80 80 80 80 80 80 FF FF FF FF FF FF 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 01 80 2 1 DDS Pattern Notes The DDS test patterns were developed specifically for DDS ap plications DDS 1 DDS 2 and DDS 6 should not be used as 1 544 Mbps T1 test patterns on AMI coded lines because they have an excess of 150 consecutive zeroes This will cause the T1 line to record a loss of signal These patterns are used for DDS fractional Nx56 T1 applications and special laboratory applications DDS 3 01001100 DDS 4 00000010 DDS 6 F
377. sages They provide the structure to house the messages A description of each field is shown in Figure 236 Flag Flag Te Tes LT Te Feet First BIT Received Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last message received Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgement of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent Forward Indicator Bit Bit is inverted to indicate the retransmission of negative acknowledgement messages Length Indicator Signalling Info Octet Identify various types of messages ie ISUP SCCP Signalling Info Field Section that contains the message max 272 octets Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 236 MSU Message Structure Ch 5 Reference 457 Link Status Signal Unit LSSU LSSUs are used to indicate the status of a node s level 2 message handling capabilities over aspecific link They are usedtoinform other nodes in the event of congestion outage link reset etc A description of each field is shown in Figure 237 Flag Flag First BIT Received Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last message received BIB Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgement of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent ie Forward Indicator Bit Bit is inverted to indicate the retransmission of negative acknowledgement messages
378. said specified warranty term Ch 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 467 D Only for CUSTOMER COMPANY makes this warranty only for the benefit of CUSTOMER and not for the benefit of any subsequent purchaser or licensee of any merchandise E LIMITATIONONWARRANTY THISCONSTITUTESTHESOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY MADE BY COMPANY WITH RESPECT TO HARDWARE SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IM PLIED COMPANY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE COMPANY S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TO A PRODUCT IN CLUDING COMPANY S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE AFTER RE PEATED EFFORTS TO INSTALL EQUIPMENT IN GOOD WORKING ORDER OR TO REPAIR OR REPLACE EQUIP MENT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OR LICENSE FEE FOR THAT PRODUCT NOR SHALL COMPANY IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDEN TAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT ORSPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER ARISING FROM ORRELATED TO THE SALE OF THE MERCHANDISE HERE UNDER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES ARIS ING FROM OR RELATED TOLOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFIT LOSS OF GOODWILL INJURY TO REPUTATION OVERHEAD DOWNTIME REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OR CHARGE BACKS OR OTHER DEBITS FROM CUSTOMER OR ANY CUSTOMER OF CUSTOMER G No Guaranty Nonapplication of Warranty COMPANY does not guaranty or warrant that the operation of hardware soft ware or firmware will be unin
379. screen should indicate NO ERRORS Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Select VF CHANNEL ACCESS gt VF MEASUREMENTS 10 Select the Rx 1 T S line and use the NEXT F1 or PREV F2 F keys to select the 05 0 to be tested 1 24 11 Select the INSERT TYPE line and press the TALK F1 F key 362 SunSet T10 9 Rev B 12 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to VF CHANNEL ACCESS 13 Select DIAL SPRVIS SETUP and select the TRUNK TYPE line Choose the appropriate trunktype E amp M G START orL START f selecting either G START or L START then select the EQUIPMENT line Choose FXO or FXS as appropriate EQUIPMENT is not applicable for Type E amp M 14 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 15 Select PLACE RECEIVE CALLS select the METHOD line Press the DTMF F2 F key 16 Select the NUMBER line A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad B Enter the number to be dialed using the keypad C Press the SHIFT key again to release the SHIFT 17 Selectthe Tx ABCD line and press the OFF HOOK F2 F key lIfadialtone is not received the trouble is at the control office e Lookatthe Rx ABCD bits If using G START orL START trunk type OFF HOOK should be observed If using E amp M trunk type a wink should be received 10 Select the NUMBER line and press the SEND F2 F key e DIALING should be displayed DTMFtones should be he
380. scription 29 1 2 White Label Keys 1 4 Use these keys to select choices at the bottom of the LCD display If more than four F key options are available a more indicator will appear in the F4 position Pressing the more F4 F key will display the other available keys n most instances when the desired F key is pressed the cursor will advance to the next display line automatically If the settings of a previous line need to be changed press the Up Arrow key on the keypad then select the option using the appropriate F key At the bottom of the screen are options associated with a particular setup parameter within that screen Changing the position of the cursor within that screen the available F key options will also change RESYNC The RESYNC key re synchronizes on the transmit pattern and restarts the in progress measurement Ifthe transmit pattern is not found the measurement begins in a live mode with the PATSYNC light off e Ifthe transmit pattern is found then the PATSYNC LED turns green and bit measurements are made Bit measurements are discontinued during some operations like ISDN PRI Call Setup and VF Channel Access LIGHT Use the LIGHT key to turn on and off the display backlight Turning the backlight off can extend the run time of the battery The backlight timer can be set in OTHER FEATURES gt SYSTEM CONFIG gt GENERAL CONFIG If the timer is set the backlight will automatically turn i
381. se YES F1 or NONE F2 A If YES is chosen connect the printer to the serial port if a printer is not connected the data cannot be retrieved for latter printing B If NONE is chosen the results can only be viewed while in the QUICK TEST screen Escaping out erases the results If you wish to use the default test patterns and their durations press the ENTER key on the keypad to start the test and go to step 9 If you wish to change these defaults continue with the following steps Select the first TEST PATTERN Select a new TEST PAT TERN by using one of the following F keys NONE F1 QRS F2 ALL 1 F3 1 8 more F1 1 16 more F2 3 24 more F3 55DLY more F1 ALT10 more F2 ALL 0 more F3 After selecting the TEST PATTERN by pressing the corre sponding F key the cursor moves to the DURATION field Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 137 9 If necessary change the DURATION using this procedure A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad so that the SHIFT indicator is in the upper left hand corner of the screen B Enterinany number between 00 and 99 minutes The cursor will automatically advance to the next line Do not press the ENTER key on the keypad C Forthe other patterns and durations repeat steps 7 and 8 10 Whenthe QUICK TEST is configured press the ENTER key on the keypad to begin testing ASUMMARY screen is displayed duringthe test see Figure 60 This screen shows elapsedtime ET remaining time
382. ss the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 5 Whenfinished configuring these items press the CALL F key to begin the Sequential Call test 158 SunSet T10 Rev A Sequential Call Results screen appears showing the status of each B channel Refer to Figure 73 21 10 05 ENTIAL CALL PASS 3 PASS 6 PASS 9 PASS 12 ACTIVE 15 18 21 24 Figure 73 Sequential Call Results Shown on this screen are all 23 B channels Each channel may display one of the following status messages PASS A call has been successfully connected and released FAIL A call was attempted on the channel but was not successful ACTIVE The call is still in progress for this channel Notes Channel 24 is marked as the D channel Ablank indicates thata call has not yet been attempted for that channel Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 159 6 7 2 2 Sequential BERT Test For data calls the SunSet T1O runs a BERT test on each channel and provides results Figure 74 is an example of a live display 21 10 05 CH OX CONNECT ET 000 00 14 INE 1 Tx B 1 1 PATT 2047 56K Figure 74 BERT Test The BERT Test screen provides a running account of the test for the data call The features in this screen are CH Channel displays the B channel currently used and the call status It has two possible states CONNECT the call has successfully connected FAIL
383. ssage to the IDT The IDT then disconnects this 424 SunSet T1O Rev DSO and sends a RELEASE COMPLETE message to the RDT This DSO is now available for other calls When the RDT initiates the call the procedure differs Refer to Figure 217 IDT RDT Customer CONNECT CRV DS1 DS0 OE y CONNECT Ack DSO CONNECTED DISCONNECT cause 16 RELEASE RELEASE COMPLETE DS0 RELEASED Figure 247 TMC Call Procedure Initiated by RDT When the RDT detects a service request from a customer the RDT sends a SETUP message indicating the line termination by the CRV When the IDT receives this SETUP message it responds with a CONNECT which tells the RDT which DS1 DSO to use for the call The IDT also begins transmitting ABCD signal ing on this designated DSO When the RDT receives the CON NECT message the RDT determines that this DSO is available for the call If the DSO is available the RDT begins transmitting responding to ABCD signaling on this channel The RDT also sends a CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE message on the TMC to the IDT When the IDT receives the CONNECT ACK it begins responding to ABCD signaling on the DSO The clearing procedure is the same as described previously Ch 5 Reference 425 5 2 CSC and Out of Band Signaling IDT RDT Customer INFORMATION CONNECT DISCONNECT cause 16 RELEASE RELEASE COMPLETE Loop open Figure 218 CSC Call Procedure Customer Initiated In this case f
384. ssful Signal 38 COA Changeover Acknowledgment Signal 21 COO Changeover Order Signal 14 CSS Connection Successful Signal 28 DLC Signalling Data Link Connection Order Signal 18 Emergency Changeover Acknowledgment Signal 22 Emergency Changeover Order Signal 12 LFU Link Forced Uninhibit Message 66 LIA Link Inhibit Acknowledgment Message 36 LID Link Inhibit Denied Message 56 LIN Link Inhibit Message 16 LLI Link Local Inhibit Test Signal 76 LRI Link Remote Inhibit Test Signal 86 LUA Link UninhibitAcknowledgment 46 LUN Link Uninhibit Message 26 RCP Signalling Route Set Test Cluster Prohibited Signal 35 Signalling Route Set Test Cluster Restricted Signal 45 RCT Signalling Route Set Congestion Test Signal 13 RSP Signalling Route Set Test Prohibited Signal 15 RSR Signalling Route Set Test Restricted Signal 25 TFA Transfer Allowed Signal 54 TFC Transfer Controlled Signal 23 TFP Transfer Prohibited Signal 14 TFR Transfer Restricted Signal 34 TRA Traffic RestartAllowedSignal 17 UPU User Part Unavailable Signal 1 Table 11 SNM Heading Codes Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 193 6 8 2 1 5 Layer 3 Filtering Items for SNT SLS CODE Options NONE F1 0 to F Use to select a Signaling Link Selection Code HEAD CODE Options NONE F1 00 to FF Use to select a Heading Code Refer to Table 12 e Code SNT Headin
385. st data LATCH For Latched loopback it is not necessary to continue to send the loopback code A latched loopback will remain activated until receiving a release code 146 SunSet T10 7 Rev B DEV NO Options 1 8 Use the F Keys NEXT F1 and PREV F2 to select a de vice number from 1 8 This item applies only to the DSO DP Code For all other codes this line will remain N A CODE Options For LATCH CSU F1 DSU F2 OCU F3 USER more F1 DSO DP more F2 For NON LAT CSU F1 DSU F2 OCU F3 USER more F1 Specify the loop up down code for a specific equipment type to be looped up down The F Keys available will depend upon the TYPE selected The following codes are available e CSU Channel Service Unit DSU Data Service Unit e OCU Office Channel Unit DSO DP DSO Dataport To transmit a user loopback code use the following procedure Press the USER more F1 F key Select the USER loop back code Enter an 8 bit loop back code by first pressing the SHIFT key on the keypad D Enter the 0 1 values directly from the keypad Press the SHIFT key on the keypad when finished F The entered USER pattern will have no effect unless USER was specified for the CODE OUT m Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 147 6 6 3 Measurement Results 21 10 05 P TIME 000 01 23 E SF D4 CODE AMI E 56k PATT 2047 ER 1 04e 07 UAS 00 000 Figure 66 DDS
386. st pattern out the multiport Choose T1DRP F2 to send the dropped NX64 kbps signal out the multiport MODE For T1 MUX Mode DCE is automatically set MUX Section The MUX settings define the multiplexing configuration for the SunSet T1O BERT Options T1DRP F1 F2 isthe Datacom TYPE selected above i e RS232 BERT determines which direction of the multiplexed circuit is bit error tested T1 DRP means that the Nx64 kbps signal dropped from the 1 544 Mbps signal is bit error tested V 35 means the signal received coming from the low speed side is tested T1INS Options LOOP F1 DATACOM TYPE i e RS232 F2 PATRN F3 T1 Insert determines which signal is inserted into the 1 544 Mbps line T1 Insert can change only if TXSRC T1DRP LOOP All 24 channels will be looped through from 1 544 Mbps receive to 1 544 Mbps transmit nothing will be inserted DATACOM TYPE This means that the low speed Nx64 kbps sig nal will be inserted on the 1 544 Mbps transmit PATRN This means that a test pattern will be inserted on the 1 544 Mbps transmit signal Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 67 Note When setting TxSRC Datacom transmit source for PATRN pattern T1INS is set for the Datacom type F2 there is no option to change this In this case the SunSet T10 is transmitting the pattern out the multiport and inserting the received multiport low speed signal onto the T1 line T1T S Options Nx64K F1 T1 T S allows selection of whi
387. stored in the buffer Upon press ing CLR ALL a warning message appears to prevent accidentally erasing the buffer contents As the instructions indicate press the ENTER key to continue and erase or the ESCAPE key to cancel and keep the messages 248 SunSet T10 Rev B 8 1 4 View Print Buffer 21 10 05 VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 371 EW FROM EW TO 371 POST FILTER IS OFF CLR ALL PRINT EW FLTR ON Figure 127 View Print Tracer The View Print Tracer screen allows viewing or printing of all messages stored in the buffer Figure 127 shows the initial screen F keys CLR ALL F1 PRINT F2 VIEW F3 FLTR ON F4 CLR ALL Clears all messages stored in the buffer Upon press ing a warning message appears this prevents accidentally eras ing the buffer contents As the on screen instructions indicate press the ENTER key to continue or the ESCAPE key to cancel PRINT The buffer contents are sent to the SunSet T10 s serial port for printing Only those messages specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings are sent They may be sent to a serial printer or PC set for terminal emulation The print out con tains a time and date stamp full decode and hexadecimal for each message VIEW Displays the messages as specified by the VIEW FROM and VIEW TO settings FLTR ON Enables post filtering This allows viewing only those messages that match the filter parameters set in TMC FILTER
388. t ware media and firmware materials against defects in materi als and workmanship During the warranty period COMPANY will at its sole option either i refund of CUSTOMER S purchase price without interest ii repair said products or iii replace software or firmware products which prove to be defective provided however that such products which COM PANY elects to replace must be returned to COMPANY by CUSTOMER along with acceptable evidence of purchase within twenty 20 days of request by COMPANY freight prepaid In addition during the warranty period COMPANY will provide without charge to CUSTOMER all fixes and patches to the original product specifications sold which COM PANY issues during the warranty period COMPANY does not warrant or represent that all software defects will be corrected any case where COMPANY has licensed a software product AS IS COMPANY S obligation will be limited to replacing an inaccurate copy ofthe original material This warranty does not cover upgrade or enhancements to product software and firmware C Period The warranty period for Hardware Software and Firm ware will be One 1 Yearfrom date of shipmentto CUSTOMER The COMPANY may also sell warranty extensions or provide a warranty term of three years with the original sale which provide a longer coverage period for the test set chassis software and firmware in which case the terms of the express limited warranty will apply to
389. t point when there is 132 feet or less of cabling between the SunSet T10 and the DSX under most conditions Use 7 5 15 and 22 5 dB whentransmitting toward the T1 span from a central office or customer premises and a 7 5 dB 15 dB or 22 5 dB attenuator is not in series with the SunSet T10 e whenthesignal shouldbe transmitted at a lower level to prevent near end crosstalk problems when the signal should be attenuated so that it arrives at the next repeater at approximately 31 dB dsx level whentestingthe sensitivity of the network elements s receiver to which the SunSet T10 is transmitting 64 SunSet T10 p Rev B 2 3 T1 MUX Test Configuration T1 MUX provides for a multiplexing capability between the T1 line and multiport datacom signals Use this mode to perform a synchronous Nx64K test through both a Datacom connector and a 1 544 Mbps connector at the same time Refer to Figure 27 21720705 EST CONFIGURATION EST MODE T1 MUX T1 DATACOM Tx INST 1 TYPE Rx DROP 1 TxSRC TIDRP FRAMING E MOD CODING MUX RxLVL 1 TE BERT V 35 RxLVL 2 TE T1INS PATRN XMTCLK T1T S Nx64K LBO 1 amp 2 E DCE 39 21 RS232 Figure 27 T1 MUX Mode Configuration The T1 MUX Configuration screen is divided into three sec tions The T1 column at left provides the setup parameters for the 1 544Mbps T1 transmit and receive jacks The Datacom section a
390. t Time slot screen in TEST CONFIGURATION Therefore the live pattern which happens to be FOX can be seen in time slots 1 4 while the IDLE pattern FF is seen in the other time slots The IDLE pattern can be determined in OTHER FEATURES gt OTHER PARAMETERS 3 Press PAUSE F3 to trap the current data on the T1 line 4 Press either PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 to view more data Note the PAGE number in the upper left hand portion of the screen 60 screens 20 T1 frames of data are available 5 When finished press the ESCAPE key twice to return to the MAIN MENU Defined as follows are the items in Figure 55 PAGE Indicates the displayed page number of the available 60 Screens T S Specifies the current Time Slot BINARY This column shows the binary data actually received on the line Each line represents the 8 bit time slot HEX This column shows the hexadecimal representation of the 8 bits transmitted in each time slot ASCII Displays the received ASCII representation of the 8 bit binary framing word The character displayed to the left of the parentheses represents the 8 bit framing words translated in their current order The character displayed within the parentheses rep resents the 8 bits translated in reverse order Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 131 The following F Keys are available in this screen PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 Allows access to the 60 pages of data PAUSE RESUME F3 Pause traps the c
391. t the SunSet T10 from the circuit 1 4 2 Using Bridge Tap Detect 1 2 Setup the span for testing as outlined in Section 1 2 of this chapter Proceeduptothe pointof performing measurements Select MAIN MENU gt OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt BRIDGE TAP DETECT BRIDGE TAP DETECT is a collection of patterns that are known to show the presence of bridge taps Observe the test in progress by looking atthe RESULTS LOGICAL screen and the BRIDGE TAP DETECT screen by pressing the PAGE DN F key A performance score of 0 bit errors 0 errored seconds and 30 available seconds is ideal When finished release the loopback and disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit Ch 4 Applications 319 1 5 Verify Proper B8ZS AMI Optioning CENTRAL OFFICE NETWORK EQUIPMENT CUSTOMER PREMISES Figure 174 Verify Proper B8ZS AMI Optioning fault in new circuits is a BBZS AMI optioning mis match in one or more network elements This procedure will de termine if this exists in the circuit 1 Setupthe SunSet TIO andcircuit as described in section 1 2 of this chapter If testing one end of the circuit first as in section 1 be sure to repeat the procedure on the other end ofthe circuit as well Make sure the SunSet T1O s line CODING is set to the same line coding as present on the circuit Loop up the circuit for testing Transmit an all 1s signal and an alternating 1s a
392. t top of the right column configures the multiport The MUX set tings at the bottom of the right column determine the SunSet T10 s multiplexing operation T1 Column If necessary refer to sections 2 1 and 2 2 T1 Test Configura tion descriptions for details of each T1 setup option Tx INSERT Options L1 Tx F1 L2 Tx F2 Select the 1 544 Mbps line 1 either L1 Tx or L2 Tx for the test signal insertion using the appropriate F key This is where the Nx64 kbps multiplexed signal is inserted For example if the SunSet T10 inserts the received V 35 signal on L2 Tx the in serted signal is on line 2 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 65 Rx DROP Options L1 Rx F1 L2 Rx F2 Select the 1 544 Mbps line either L1 Rx or L2 Rx to use for dropping an Nx64 kbps signal to the multiport This selection also configures 1 544 Mbps line frequency and determines the VIEW RECEIVED DATA selection For example choose Rx DROP as L1 Rx to drop a 64 kbps signal to V 35 from Line 1 FRAMING Options SF D4 F2 ESF F3 SLC 96 F4 Choose the desired framing type by pressing the appropriate F key CODING Options AMI F1 B8ZS F2 Choose the desired coding type by pressing the appropriate F key RxLVL 1 amp RxLVL 2 Options TERM F1 BRIDGE F2 DSXMON F3 RxLVL 1 and RXLVL 2 configure the two 1 544M receivers These settings let the SunSet T10 electrically decode a 1 544 Mbps signal under a wide range of resistive or cable losses T
393. take While Entering the Label 77 3 1 6 Deleting a User Loopback 77 3 2 Teltrend Office Repeater SW 184 78 3 3 Teltrend Line Repeater SW 184 81 3 4 Westell Office Repeater SW 184 83 3 5 Westell Line SW 184 86 3 6 Westell NIU PM amp MSS SW 184 88 3 6 1 RTRV VIEW All PM 89 3 6 2 Retrieve PM 91 3 6 8 Reset PM Counters 91 3 6 4 Retrieve NIU 91 3 6 5 Set NIU Time amp 91 3 6 6 MSS Switch Control sss 92 3 6 7 MSS Ramp ACCESS 94 3 7 Teltrend MSS Switch Control SW 184 96 3 8 HDSL Span Control 98 4 0 Send Test Pattern sessssseeeee 100 4 1 Sending a USER Test 101 4 2 Viewing a User Test 101 4 3 Programming User Defined Patterns 101 4 4 Correcting a Mistake in the Label
394. ted 99 110 0011 Information element non existent or not implemented 100 110 Invalid information element contents 101 110 otoi Message incompatible with call state 102 110 0110 Recovery on timer expiry 111 110 E 1 Protocol error unspecified Class Internetworking Cause No Class Value Cause Name 127 111 1111 Interworking unspecified Table 6 Q 931 Cause Values 6 7 2 3 Placing a Call Press the call F3 F key to set up a call and then place it Refer to Figure 76 21 10 05 START LINK CALL SETUP CALLED No 3638000 CALLER No 7771111 B CHANNEL NSF CODE NSF TYPE CALL TYPE EXT PRE Figure 76 Start Link Call Setup To configure the call setup review the following CALLED No The SunSet T10 will prompt for a CALLED No This is the number to dial to place the call The number is entered directly from the keypad To do so 1 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enter the numbers directly from the keypad if a mistake is made A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator B Use the arrow keys on the keypad to select the incorrect entry C Press the SHIFT key onthe keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear D Enter the correct number directly from the keypad 3 When finished press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator Ch 3 Men
395. terrupted or error free Further the warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from 1 Improper or inadequate maintenance by CUSTOMER 2 CUSTOMER supplied software or interfacing Unauthorized modification or misuse Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product 5 Improper site preparation or maintenance or 6 Improper installation by CUSTOMER 3 4 468 SunSet T10 9 Rev B Index A Abbreviations 405 B BPV AS 114 ES 113 C Calibration 464 CODING AMI 52 B8ZS 52 Connector Panel Line 1 36 Line 2 36 MULTI PORT 36 NimH 15V 36 SERIAL PORT 36 Contrast Control 42 CSU and NI Control CODE 74 ESF DL Codes 74 In Band Codes 74 MODE 73 TYPE 73 CSU NI Emulation LLPBK 1 309 311 LLPBK 2 311 PLPBK 1 309 Customer Service 466 D Data Link Control ESF BPV 300 C lt 10 300 C lt 100 300 C lt 319 300 C lt 5 300 C gt 320 300 CRC 1 300 DETEC TIME 300 ELAPS TIME 300 FSBEE 300 Index 469 Data Link Control ESF con t PLB sec 300 R 300 SEFE 300 SLIP 300 SPRM 301 SPRM PRM 299 U1 300 U2 301 YEL sec 300 Datacom Bit Error Screen 5 128 DGRM 128 EFS 128 ES 127 SES 128 UAS 128 AS 128 BIT 127 DGRM 128 EFS 128 ES 127 RATE 127 SES 127 UAS 128 Datacom Test Configuration BIT CHAR 71 MODE 70 PARITY 71 REF CLOCK 70 STOP BITS 71 TEST RATE 70 TYPE 69 DCS 346 DDS Loop Back Access Screen COD
396. th the caller as determined by the Operation Speci fier In Figure 97 the Operation Specifier is Play Announcement this identifies the announcement played to the caller Refer to ANSI T1 114 5 specification for the definitions of other Operation Families and specifiers Appearing in Figure 97 is a SCROLL indicator This indicates that more information is available Use the up down arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor as needed to view other data Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 203 6 8 3 SU Analysis 21210205 SU ANALYSIS 1 INE 2 0 FISU 0 0 LSSU 0 MSU 0 TOTAL 0 ESSAGES SNM 0 SNT 0 TUP 0 ISUP 0 SCCP 0 STATIST Figure 98 SU Analysis Count Screen The SU Signaling Unit ANALYSIS selection is in the SS7 ANALYSIS menu This screen seen in Figure 98 shows the Sta tistics type and number of SS7 messages The Statist screen shown in Figure 99 displays additional information The SunSet T10 captures all types of signaling units based on the specified filtering setup First the analysis breaks the messages into the three basic message types FISUs LSSUs and MSuUs Then it further divides the MSU messages into five types SNM SNT TUP ISUP and SCCP In the Statistics screen FIB Forward In dicator Bit and BIB Backward Indicator Bit counts are also avail able There are three function F key options PAUSE RESUME F1 Pause freezes the display so the data
397. that the user to network UNI link is active and properly configured A PING test takes installation one step further and confirms con nectivity to the Internet provider Select from the MAIN MENU gt FRAME RELAY upon enter ing four menu choices are available as shown in Figure 139 21 10 05 FRAME RELAY CONFIGURATION LMI ANALYSIS PING TEST PING RESPONSE Figure 139 Frame Relay Menu Configure the SunSet T10 for Frame Relay testing by using the following procedure 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure the settings as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING per circuit or press the AUTO key on the keypad to configure TxCODING per circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK L1 Rx TEST RATE Nx64K or Nx56K LBO 1 0 dB 264 SunSet T10 Rev B Note It is critical to select the proper test rate for the frame relay data If the configured rate is unknown press the AUTO F1 F key The SunSet T10 automatically configures to the active chan nels showing them as highlighted Press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the TEST CONFIGURATION screen Press the ENTER key on the keypad when completed 4 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit using its Line 1 Rx and Tx jacks Once connected the PULSES and framing e g ESF LEDs should both be green Flashing LEDs indicate a history condition Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear 5 Select MAIN M
398. the monitor function if framing is unavailable 340 SunSet T10 p Rev B 1 16 Simple Talk Listen TX RX TX RX 9 SERIAL PORT MULTI PORT LINE 2_ LINE 1_ NimH 15V N JJ j Customer Premises Figure 180 Simple Talk Listen This is the simplest procedure for talking and listening on a T1 circuit 1 Verify that the span is not in service This test will disrupt service for the 23 channels that are not in use 2 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit except UNFRAME Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Note UNFRAME cannot be selected for the framing type It is not possible to perform talk and listen functions on an unframed signal One of the framing LEDs must be lit for this procedure to work 3 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 180 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge the blinking history LEDs 4 Select MAIN MENU gt VF MEASUREMENTS choose the receive listen and the transmit talk channels they are usually the same Talking and listening is now possible on the Ch 4 Applications 341 channel selected Adjust the volume to the desired level by using the volum
399. the buffer Press FLTR ON to enable the post filter This allows viewing only those messages that match the filter parameters set in TMC FILTER 250 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 21 10 05 RECEIVE MESG NO 29 98 02 10 20 09 41 DT IDT EASE 1 REF 97 CA REF SUFFIX 0 Non ISDN DS1 7 DSO 14 CAUSE 16 Normal Clearing PAGE UP PAGE DN HE Figure 129 Release Message Figure 129 provides a sample message as seen when the VIEW F key is pressed in Figure 128 Found in that message is the follow ing information Date and time stamp 98 02 10 20 09 41 Indicates the detec tion date and time of the message Direction of the message RDT lt IDT Indicates whether the message originated from the IDT Integrated Terminal or RDT Remote Terminal Message Type s Setup CSC and TMC Setup Acknowledge CSC only Alerting CSC only Call Proceeding CSC only Notify CSC only Information TMC and CSC Connect TMC and CSC Connect Acknowledge TMC only Disconnect TMC and CSC Release TMC and CSC Release Complete TMC and CSC Status TMC and CSC Status Enquiry TMC and CSC Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 251 CALL REF Identifies the call and customer to which the mes sage applies Note that in many cases the CRV is associated with the LCA Line Circuit Address which is the physical location where the customer s distribution pair is terminated Therefore CRV iden tifies
400. the call did not connect ET Elapsed time is the amount of time since the call connected TxB amp RxB Displays which B channel is currently used PATT Displays the current test pattern in use RATE Displays the current line rate of the data call either 56 k or 64 k The following RESULTS are provided BIT Bit error count BER Bit error rate 160 SunSet T10 p Rev B ES Errored Seconds SES Severely Errored Seconds EFS Error Free Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds AS Available Seconds When the sequential BERT test is finished the screen dis plays a summary of all 23 data calls as shown in Figure 75 21 10 05 EQUENTIAL BE h STATUS BIT PASS 3 PASS 0 PASS 0 PASS 0 PASS 0 17 USER BUSY PASS 0 17 USER BUSY c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 75 Sequential BERT Results For each B channel the following information is provided STATUS Pass indicates that the call successfully connected If the call did not connect the cause value number and decode are provided In Figure 75 the calls for B channels 6 and 8 have failed and the release message contained cause value 17 User Busy For successful calls the summary screen provides the BIT ES and UAS as defined earlier in this section The following table lists the possible Q 931 cause values Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 161 162 SunSet T10 p Rev B Class Normal Event Cause i
401. the customer CRV values can range from 1 2048 CALL REF SUFFIX Identifies the particular call that applies to the message The possible values are Non ISDN or LT only supports one call at a time B channel 1 ISDN BRI B channel 2 ISDN BRI DS1 Identifies the DS1 line used for the call This number can range from 1 28 DSO st Identifies the DSO channel used for the call This number can range from 1 24 CAUSE Displays diagnostic information to the RDT or IDT as to why the call failed For a listing of the possible GR 303 cause values and their meanings refer to Table 15 Cause Values in section 8 1 2 TMC Filter 2110205 RECEIVE MESG NO 161 98 02 10 20 15 23 RDT gt IDT SETUP CALL e REF 146 ALL REF SUFFIX O0 Non ISDN DS1 DSO Figure 130 Setup Message The following F Keys are available in Setup Message 252 SunSet T10 Rev B F keys PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 HEX F3 INFO F4 PAGE UP Scrolls to the previous message PAGE DN Scrolls to the next message HEX Displays the message in hexadecimal format INFO Displays a full decoding of any extra information elements contained in the message The INFO F key is not always dis played Figure 129 Release Message does not contain any other info elements hence the INFO F key is not present The Setup Message screen shown in Figure 130 indicates extra information elements Pressing
402. the message in hexadecimal for mat If an informational element is present an InfoElm F key appears Refer to the D Channel Information Element Decoding section and Figure 87 D Channel Information Element Decoding The SunSet T10 provides D channel decoding of the informa tion elements contained in each message If the message con tains an information element the InfoElm F4 F key appears Pressing this F key brings up a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 87 21 10 05 INFORMATION ELEMENT AT amp T Info Element Protocol BEA ER CAPABILITY 04h R CODING STANDARD Oh CCITT Standardized coding INFO TRANSFER CAP 00h Speech TRANSFER MODE 0h Circuit mode INFO TRANSFER RATE 10h 64 kbit s USER INFO LAYER 1 PROTOCOL 02h E UP PAGE DN RETURN Figure 87 Information Element The Information Element screen displays the decoded ele ments Press the RETURN F4 F key to return to the normal summary screen If more than one page is available the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 F keys appear Use them to scroll through the various pages Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when finished viewing 176 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 6 7 7 Other Parameters The OTHER PARAMETERS menu allows setup of additional specifications for ISDN analysis Refer to Figure 88 21 10505 OTHER PARAMETE Line 1 D chnl L2 Bkup D chnl Layer 2 SAPI ayer 2
403. tion con t Tx INSERT 65 TYPE 67 XMTCLK 66 T1 Technology ACD 434 AIS 435 444 451 AMI 437 ANSI T1 102 1987 437 ANSI T1 403 437 446 B8ZS 437 Central office repeaters 436 Channelized 434 class 5 switches 436 CSU 435 D4 channel banks 436 DCS 436 DS1 434 DS1 framing 435 DS3 436 DTMF 443 FDL 446 internally timed 443 loop timing 442 m Law Encoding 440 M13 multiplexes 436 master slave 442 MF 443 NIU 435 Nyquist theorem 440 ORB 436 PBX 434 436 PCM 440 pipes 434 plesiochronous 441 PRM 446 pulse dialing 443 receive timing 442 Regenerative repeaters 435 robbed bit signaling 443 SONET 437 Standard Framing ESF 438 SF 438 SLC 96 438 T1 434 Index 491 T1 Technology con t toll switches 436 Troubleshooting and Fault Sectionalization 447 Twisted pair 435 Yellow alarm 451 yellow alarms 444 T1 MUX mode 129 T1DUAL Test Mode CODING 60 FRAMING 59 LBO 1 amp 2 64 Rx DROP 57 RxLVL 1 amp 2 57 TEST RATE 62 Tx SOURCE 59 TX INSERT 57 XMT CLOCK 60 Tables 01 Switch Settings for SS118B C amp D Printers 40 02 Inband Codes 74 03 ESF DL Codes 75 04 Bridge Tab Test Patterns 140 05 DDS Control Codes 149 06 Q 931 Cause Values 162 07 TUP Heading Codes 186 08 ISUP Message Types 188 09 SCCP Message Types 190 10 Subsystem Numbers 191 11 SNM Heading Codes 193 12 SNT Heading Codes 194 13 TCAP Package Type Identifiers 201 14 TCAP Component Type Identifiers
404. tions 157 MY PHONE NUMBER Use the SHIFT key and keypad to enter the phone number F1 Enters in the star symbol F2 Enters in the pound symbol SELF CALL Options OFF F1 ON F2 call F3 Determine if the SunSet T10 will place a self call ON This places a self call during the test In this case the SunSet T10 will call the number entered in CALLER NUMBER OFF If not needed select OFF In this case the SunSet T10 will call the number entered as DIAL NUMBER Refer to DIAL NUM BER for the procedure CALL TYPE Options VOICE F1 DATA 56 F2 DATA 64 and 3 1k AUD F4 Determine the type of call to place e VOICE Select to place voice calls during the test e DATA 56 Select to place data calls at a 56 kbps rate DATA 64 Select to place data calls at a 64 kbps rate e 3 1k AUD Select to use the 3 1 kHz audio bearer service for voice analog data DIAL NUMBER If a self call is not needed this will be the number called To enter a number use this procedure 1 Pressthe SHIFT key onthe keypad the SHIFT indicator will appear 2 Enterthe numbers directly from the keypad if a mistake is made A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator B Usethe arrow keys on the keypad to select the incorrect entry C Press the SHIFT key on the keypad and enter the correct number directly from the keypad 47 3 Use the F keys to enter the and symbols 4 Pre
405. to clearthe performance history that the SunSet T10 has gathered Note If the results are notto be printed then delete those results when entering this menu in order to retrieve current results The following are definitions of the displayed data PM PERIOD This is the month day hour of the period observed ACCUM PRD This is the period of time that the data was col lected either 1 hour or 1 day DIRECT This is the measured direction AZ is from the central office to the customer premises ZA is from the customer pre mises to the central office CVL coding violation line BPV CVP coding violation path CRC 6 or SF error ESL errored second line ESP errored second path SESL severely errored second line SESP severely errored second path UASL unavailable second line UASP unavailable second path PDVS pulse density violation second B8ZS a second in which a B8ZS was observed MSEC number of measured seconds STAT coded status message 90 SunSet T10 p Rev B 3 6 2 Retrieve PM Report This menu item allows retrieval of performance information from a single period 1 Refertothe previous procedure and definitions in section 3 6 1 Specify the month date hour and direction of transmission that is to be polled 2 Pressthe SHIFT key onthe keypad to display the SHIFT indicator and type in the desired numbers for the day date and hour 3 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad again to enter the accumu lation pe
406. to display traffic on Line 1 PAUSE Figure 208 GSM Monitor Screen 398 SunSet T10 7 Rev B Displayed in Figure 208 are all 24 timeslots The top row con tains timeslots 1 6 the second row has 7 12 and so on Also shown in this screen are the 4 sub channels contained within each timeslot This screen shows the timeslots on LINE 2 alternately press the LINE 1 F1 F key to view the activity on LINE 1 Use this screen to monitor for the following TRAU frames on each sub channel S Speech This refers to the uplink direction D Data Idle speech idle Unknown The arrow below the S speech symbol indicates the direction uplink direction user to network v downlink direction network to user 4 An S in one of the sub channels indicates speech this 13k GSM encoded speech can be dropped to the SunSet T1O s speaker to monitor voice quality To do so A Select a sub channel displaying speech B Press the D amp l F2 F key to drop the sub channel to the speaker Ch 4 Applications 399 6 3 Transmitting a GSM Encoded Voice Message 1 Select MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and configure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING as specified by the circuit Tx CODING as specified by the circuit Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 2 Connect the SunSet T
407. to rain Using the supplied equipment in a manner not specified by Sunrise Telecom may impair the protection provided by the equipment SunSet T10 Rev B Chapter1 Initial Setup 1 0 Unpacking the Test Set Use the following procedures for unpacking and testing a new SunSet T10 1 2 3 4 5 Remove the packing list from the shipping container Remove the SunSet T10 and accessories from the shipping container Inspect all items and immediately report any damage to both the carrier and Sunrise Telecom Verify that all parts specified on the packing list were received Complete the Warranty Registration Card and return it immedi ately to Sunrise Telecom Note Sunrise Telecom must receive the Warranty Registration Card in order to provide updated software releases 6 Ensure the software cartridge is fully seated in its slot Refer to Figures 1 and 2 SUNRISE TELECOM Software Card 2 mb 5 5 10 55150 Stem OP c SUNRISE TELECOM P Figure1 Cartridge Installation Ch 1 Initial Set up 13 A Figure 2 shows the cartridge after installation Be sure that the top of the cartridge is in line with the top of the ejector button to the left Make sure that the software card is pushed in flush with the top of the ejector button SunSet T10 SS150 Serial Number 22 Great Oaks Blvd gt Son Jose CA 95119 000 sunrisete
408. to select FORMAT Choose either BINARY F1 or HEX F2 The binary input is often simpler for entering short patterns BINARY mode valid entries are 1 and 0 HEX mode valid entries are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F Pressthedownarrow key onthe keypadto move to the pattern entry area Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 101 A Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to display the SHIFT indicator B Using the keypad enter upto 2048 binary characters or 512 hexadecimal characters to create the desired pattern C Press the SHIFT key onthe keypad and the SHIFT indicator no longer appears on screen Press the ENTER key on the keypad to store the pattern and return to USER TEST PATTERN Displayed within this screen is the new code Selectthe new pattern and press the ENTER key on the keypad to transmit it 4 4 Correcting a Mistake in the Label 1 From step 2 of Programming User Defined Patterns press the TOGGLE F3 F key to exit the character grid and return to the LABEL line Press the left arrow key on the keypad to select the unwanted character Press the DELETE F2 F key to remove the character repeat as necessary Whenthe characters are removed move the cursor to the right of the last character If the LABEL is now correct press the ENTER key on the keypad If morecharacters are needed for the label press the TOGGLE F3 F key to return to the character
409. to the received pattern updates the framing in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen updates the test pattern in the SEND TEST PATTERN and MEASUREMENT RESULTS screens Note that other operations cannot be performed while the SunSet T10 is searching for the framing and pattern VOL UP amp VOLDN To adjust the speaker volume when using VF Channel Ac cess use the VOL UP and VOL DN keys Upon pressing these keys a volume indicator will appear at the top right corner of the Screen HISTORY Use the HISTORY key to turn off flashing LEDs LEDs flash to indicate an error or alarm that has occurred but is no longer present Ch 2 Product Description 31 ENTER The ENTER key performs two functions 1 When a menu item is highlighted and the ENTER key is pressed the screen displays the new screen indicated by the menu choice 2 The ENTER key is also used in a few screens to invoke an operation after the user is finished entering all data in a given screen Pressing the ENTER key causes the SunSet T1O to carry out those specified inputs This happens in just a few cases like DTMFdialing and manual A B C D bit entry Inalmost all of the high usage functions it is not necessary to press the ENTER key to invoke the operation f the operation does not seem to be occurring press the ENTER key When the ENTER key is used to invoke the operation the ESCAPE key may need to be pressed to return to the previous menu once the operation
410. tomatically selected A Press the ENTER key on the keypad and the control sequence will start Whenthe maintenance switch is ready reposition the cables on the span and then press the ENTER key again to release the protection switch Notes A loopback must be in place to perform the switch or release commands If going directly from a switch to a release the SunSet T10 at the switch will connect into the control unit and then at the release into the NIU The CCU will automatically loop up when entering into the Teltrend MSS menu However when plugging into the NIU to perform the release command exit from the Teltrend MSS menu and re enter it as in step 1 to reestablish a loopback at the NIU Consult the Westell Maintenance Switch System practices manual for more information on the operation of the switch Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 93 3 6 7 MSS Ramp Access This command sends the necessary control codes to retrieve the performance information from the desired NIU The advantage of this form of information retrieval is that the line remains in service while the information is polled Figure 38 shows the MSS Ramp Access screen 21 10 05 MSS RAMP ACCESS ACTION NOMBRE LINE ACTIVAT DEACTIV Figure 38 MSS Ramp Access Configure the following items in the MSS Ramp Access screen ACTION Options ACTIVAT F1 DEACTIV F2 Select ACTIVAT to activate this command and retrieve the performance inf
411. ts Internal Timing Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 61 MASTER L1 Rx L1 Tx T10 TEST CONFIGURATION SX Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT TE XMT CLK INTERN A SLAVE L L1 Rx Back m L1 Tx T10 TEST CONFIGURATION TXIINSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT Bl XMT CLK INTERN Figure 25 Internal Timing TEST RATE Options 1 544M F1 Nx56K F2 Nx64K F3 1 544M Used for normal T1 and 051 testing Nx56K Use where the fractional circuit is any number 1 24 of 56 kbps channels within the DS1 In this case the SunSet T10 will transmit a 1 in the eighth least significant bit of each fractional T1 channel Nx64K Use for fractional T1 testing where the fractional circuit is any number 1 24 of 64 kbps channels within the DS1 If choosing one of the fractional settings the screen shown in Figure 26 appears Note If 1 544 is selected the Fractional T1 screen is not needed Move the cursor off TEST RATE or press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Pressing the ENTER key on the keypad while the cursor is on TEST RATE will auto matically bring up the T10 Time Slot screen 62 SunSet T10 p Rev B T10 TIME SLOT RECEIVE 06 07 D 11 12 14 035 BI 2 TRANSMIT BEP 1 DEP os 07 os 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 ED UN SEL CLR A
412. ts press the RESTART F1 F Key Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad when testing is complete 218 SunSet T10 P4 Rev B 6 10 4 TELEOS Call Monitor This feature allows the technician to observe a Teleos call setup in process monitoring both directions in sequence Refer to Figure 109 21 10 05 TELEOS CALL MONITOR CALLING SIDE CALL DIGIT No 01 press ENTER to start Figure 109 Teleos Call Monitor Setup Screen To set up the Teleos call monitor 1 Selectthe CALLING SIDE Choose either Line 1 F1 or Line2 F2 2 Selectthe CALL DIGIT No by using the NEXT F1 and PREV F2 F keys select a value between 1 and 40 3 Press the ENTER key on the keypad to start monitoring Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 219 7 0 VF Channel Access 21 10 05 VF CHANNEL ACCESS VE MEASUREMENTS PERVISION RVIS SETUP ECEIVE CALLS DP ANALYSIS NOISE ANALYSIS MF TRACER SIGNALING ANALYSIS Figure 110 VF Channel Access Menu Notes VF CHANNEL ACCESS will not function properly if the SF ESF or SLC 96 LED is not on One of these three LEDs indicate thatthe framing found on the received signal matches the framing selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu It is impossible to talk listen or perform other channelized functions in the absence of frame synchronization since channels can be identified only within a framed signal n VF CHA
413. tself off after the specified amount of time has passed The default is for a continuous backlight GRAPHIC The graphic key presents a picture of the current circuit con figuration The graphic can be invoked during basic menus and basic operations such as Test Configuration Send Test Pattern Measurement Results and LPBK amp Span Control Use the GRAPHIC key upon completing TEST CONFIGURATION to con firm the settings 30 SunSet T10 49 Rev B Graphics are also included as a basic part of several advanced features such as CSU NI emulation looping repeater menus DATACOM and PULSE MASK ANALYSIS In these advanced menus additional graphics are not available if the GRAPHIC key is pressed ERR INJ Use the ERR INJ error injection key to inject errors on the SunSet TIO s transmitted signal Errors will be injected according to the configuration in OTHER FEATURES ERROR INJECTION Whenthe ERR INJ key is pressed andthe error injection MODE is setfor RATE errors will be injected atthe specified rate and type selected in the OTHER FEATURES ERROR INJEC TION menu Anetrror inject indicator will be at the top of the display to the right of the MEAS indicator and will display the type of error Thetypes oferrors are BPV LOGIC LOG BPV and FRAME AUTO The AUTO key automatically synchronizes framing and test patterns It also restarts the test in progress and clears any history indicators changes the transmit pattern
414. ttern Hence the Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 109 measurement covers transmission performance over the entire service not just the local span or section As a result this is the preferred measurement for out of service testing and service ac ceptance tests The measurement is often performed in conjunc tion with a loopback device at the far end BER This is the average bit error rate since the beginning of the test BER displays N A when the SunSet T10 cannot synchronize on a pattern Usage BER is used instead of a count when testing for a longer period 10 is a typical maintenance limit for voice trans mission and 10 is a common acceptance limit for voice trans mission Many data customers require 10 or better FBE This is a count of the number of framing bit errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test FBE displays N A when the SunSet T10 cannot synchronize on a pattern Usage Used for in service testing on SF D4 circuits where the customer is transmitting an unknown data stream The advan tage of this measurement is that the framing stays intact as it passes through various network elements except fractional T1 circuits hence it depicts the overall transmission quality from the far end of the circuit to the SunSet T10 Adrawback with this measurement is that it only measures 1 out of every 193 bits and so it gives only a sampling of the true transmission performance Another drawback with this measure ment
415. ttern This pattern is often used to make sure that clear channel lines are properly provisioned for B8ZS during circuit turn up If a portion of the circuit is AMI pattern synch and or signal will be lost The follow ing is the actual pattern 0000 ALT10 ALT 10 is the industry standard alternating ones and zeroes pattern The pattern is frame aligned with f showing the location of the framing bit The following is the actual pattern f0101 0101 63 63 is the industry standard 63 bit code used for DDS applications T1 1 This 72 octet pattern is used for stress testing T1 circuits and network elements The following is the actual pattern with f showing the locations of the framing bit f 01 01 01 01 80 00 80 80 80 CO 01 80 01 80 80 01 80 44 00 04 44 00 04 55 f 55 55 55 55 AA AA AA AA 55 55 55 55 AA 55 55 AA AA AA 01 01 FF FF FF FF f FF FF FF 7F FF FF 24 92 49 11 11 11 08 42 10 84 21 04 10 41 02 04 08 01 Ch 5 Reference 413 T1 2 This 96 octet pattern is used for stress testing T1 circuits and network elements The pattern can cause framing problems and should not be used with SF framing The following is the ac tual pattern with f showing the locations of the framing bit fFF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF f FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
416. tterns may not be available depending on the test rate If a pattern is not available a message will appear atthe bottom of the display screen 5 Pressthe ESCAPE onthe keypadtoreturnto the MAIN MENU 6 Select DATACOM INTERFACE and refer to Figure 189 MEAS 2141005 DATACOM INT MODE DTE TRANSMIT RTS GM DTR ON RL OFF LL ON Figure 189 Datacom Interface Screen 7 Check that the transmit leads RTS and DTR are turned on If not select the lead and press the ON F1 F key A Try turning these signals ON or OFF to test whether the modem is receiving the SunSet T10 s signal 8 Select LL local loop and press the ON F1 F key This will activate a loop on the modem 9 Examine the received information TXCLK RxCLK and DATA should all show LIVE 10 Press the ESCAPE key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 11 Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS The RCV and XMT patterns should be the same The PAT SYNC LED should be green If not press the RESYNC key on the keypad If the PAT SYNC LED still is not green the modem may have a problem regenerating the pattern RxHz should be the same as the transmitted rate If there is a discrepancy the modem may have a problem retransmit ting the clock Ch 4 Applications 365 12 Test the validity of the loop by injecting errors and confirming that they come back Do this by pressing the ERR INJ key
417. twork ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network SCP Service Control Point services PLMN Public Land Mobile Network and Operations administration and Main tenance of networks 8 4 SS7 Network Architecture The SS7 network is comprised of signaling points SPs con nected together by dedicated circuits identified as signaling links There are three types of SPs Service Switching Point SSP Signaling Transfer Point STP and Service Control Point SCP Depicted in Figure 234 is a typical SS7 network The primary purpose of the SSP is to originate and process requests for trunks In addition it originates requests for network services Every SSP is connected to a pair of STPs for load sharing and backup purposes The primary purpose of a STP is to route signaling messages between different SSPs in the net work Usually there are two levels of hierarchy in arranging STPs local level and regional level The local level STP pair routes sig naling traffic within a specified local area While regional level STPs route traffic between the specified local areas SCP s pri mary function is to process database query messages for ad vanced network services such as 800 numbers and alternative billing SCPs are paired to protect the SS7 against loss of data in case of SCP failure Each SCP is connected to the regional STP thus providing regional service Ch 5 Reference 453 Regional STP STP STP Kn m CQ TP S nk
418. u Descriptions 163 CALLER No Specifying a CALLER No is optional This is the telephone number that the ISDN switch uses to identify the caller on the network If a number is not needed press the NONE F4 F key To enter a number use the same procedure as in CALLED No B CHANNEL Options 1 24 except for the selected D channel in the in the OTHER PARAMETERS screen Channel24 used normally as the D channel e Specify the B channel to place the call Use the NEXT F1 or PREV F2 F keys to change the channel number e If placing a 46B 2D call or a 47B D call the CHNL LINE must be specified This selection specifies the PRI line used to place the call Press the Line 1 F1 or Line 2 F2 F keys NSF CODE Options 0 31 Specify the NSF Network Specific Facilities CODE using the NONE F1 or NEXT F2 F keys e Ifan NSF CODE isto be entered it can range from 0 31 This code specifies the invoked network facilities e Normally forthe TE mode NSF is set to NONE For NT mode NSF is set to 2 Toview NSF options as specified by either AT amp T or Northern Telecom press the TABLE F3 F key This table gives the NSF CODE for certain options NSF TYPE Options SERVICE F1 FEATURE F2 TABLE F4 Specify the NSF type this can be either FEATURE F2 or SERVICE F1 Toview the NSF Type options as specified by either AT amp T or Northern Telecom press the TABLE F3 F key This table gives t
419. ues Upon selecting MANUAL the SAPI and TEI filter settings appear Se lect any value by pressing INC 1 F1 and DEC 1 F2 Refer to the following table SAPI TEI Valid Combinations for a list of valid SAPI TEI combinations SAPI TEI Data Link Function 1 EOC Path Switching Operations RDT Provisioning Memory Administrative OS RDT Maintenance Surveillance OS RDT Testing OS RDT IDT RDT Test System Controller 1 RDT Test System Controller 2 RDT Test System Controller 3 8 11 User Assignable 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Table 16 Valid Combinations SELECT Allows filtering by link path The SunSet T1O provides a listing of all Data Link paths as specified by their SAPI TEI com bination Upon pressing SELECT F2 the screen displays the EOC Filter Selection screen as shown in Figure 136 260 SunSet T10 Rev B 21 10 05 FILTER SELECTION EOC PATH SWITCH RDT ADMIN OS RDT MAINT OS RDT TEST OS RDT TEST SYST 1 RDT TEST SYST 2 RDT TEST SYST 3 Figure 136 EOC Filter Selection EOC FILTER SELECTION Use the up down arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired selection Pressing the ENTER key on the keypad saves this selection and returns to the setup screen where the new selection is displayed in the FILTER ON field The SunSetT10will now capture only the messages
420. ur design Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU Ch 4 Applications 327 3 Connect the SunSet T10 to the circuit as shown in Figure 177 Use one SunSet T10 as shown in the diagram or two SunSet T10s if the two pieces of equipment are not located close to each other Find a point on either side of the DSX to connect SunSet T10 Make sure that the circuit is open at each point so that the SunSet T10 is not bridge tapped onto the existing circuit Once connected to the circuit press the HISTORY key on the keypad to clear the blinking LEDs 4 Verify that the SunSet TTO s PAT SYNC LED is green The BIT ERROR and ERRORS LEDs are off This indicates that the circuit is properly wired through the DSX 5 Press the ERR INJ key on the keypad Verify that the BIT ERROR and ERRORS LEDs turn on and then blink This assumes that the SunSet T10 is configured to inject 1 BPV and 1 LOGIC error This verifies that the SunSet T10 did not synchronize to a signal source on another circuit 6 Repeat the procedure for the other direction of the circuit 7 When finished disconnect the SunSet T10 from the circuit 328 SunSet T10 p Rev 1 10 Observing Network Codes or Channel Data 21 10 05 VIEW RECEIVED DATA 01 BINARY EX ASCII 10111111 11101111 1 11111011 11111110 11111111 10111111 11101111 11111011
421. ure 1 Select the desired message Do this by using the F keys for predefined messages or by typing in the desired numbers To type in the message A Selectthe desired position and enter the 1s and Os using the SHIFT key and numbers on the keypad B The cursor can be positioned only between the 10th and 15th bits ofthe message The rest of the 16 bit message is fixed The following are the predefined messages YEL ALM sends the ESF datalink yellow alarm PLPK UP sends the CSU payload loop up command PLPK DN sends the CSU payload loop down command LLPK UP sends the CSU line loop up command LLPK DN sends the CSU line loop down command NLPK UP sends the NIU loop up command NLPK DN sends the NIU loop down command After selecting a message select REPETITION To send the message continuously choose CONTINU F2 A To send the message for a certain number of repetitions press the NUMBER F1 F key Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 305 B Press the SHIFT key onthe keypad and enter in the number of repetitions between 01 and 99 using the keypad numbers C Press the SHIFT key again when finished 3 Pressthe ENTER key the keypad to sendthe pattern on the data link The SunSetT10 will automatically exit from the SEND T1 403 BOM screen and start sending the desired message If selected CONTINU will send the message continuously while in the DATA LINK CONTROL ESF screen Exiting the menu or moving into a sub menu wil
422. urrent data on the T1 line to easily observe the pattern Resume continues the live pre sentation of data STORE F4 This saves the current received pattern in the USER TEST PATTERN screen Pressing the STORE F4 F key a mes sage will appear at the bottom of the screen giving the label of the received pattern View this pattern at any time by using the follow ing procedure Select MAIN MENU SEND TEST PATTERN Press the USER F1 F key Select the desired label and press the VIEW F1 F key The pattern can be deleted edited or the label can be edited For more details on these procedures refer to Section 4 6 Editing a User Test Pattern gt Note In order to store a pattern there must be an empty space in the User Test Pattern screen 132 SunSet T10 7 Rev B 6 2 Propagation Delay 21 10 05 PROPAGATION DELAY RND TRIP DELAY 334 RND TRIP TIME 216 ONE WAY DIST 84 ASSUMING 500 ft PI Figure 56 Propagation Delay Use PROPAGATION DELAY only in T1 SINGL T1DUAL modes The PROPAGATION DELAY screen shown in Figure 56 displays the propagation delay on a looped back signal Use this procedure to measure propagation delay 1 From the MAIN MENU enter the TEST CONFIGURATION screen Configure as follows TEST MODE T1 SINGL or T1 DUAL TEST RATE 1 544M Press the ESCAPE key to return to the MAIN MENU when finished 2 Select amp SPANCONTROL gt CSU amp NI CONTRO
423. us message from the network it reports the LINK OK 402 SunSet T10 7 Rev B B Upon entering LMI ANALYSIS wait approximately 30 seconds depending on the parameters If the SunSet T1O received a proper response form the network it displays LINK OK If the SunSet T1O does not receive a proper response from the network it displays LINK ERROR 7 Press the PVC F1 F key to see the DLCI activity on the permanent virtual circuit This screen reports all configured PVOs and gives a status for each active or idle 8 Press the LMI F3 F key to return to the LMI analysis screen 9 The link between the SunSet T10 and the network UNI Interface is now verified Ch 4 Applications 403 404 SunSet T10 7 Rev B Chapter 5 Reference 1 0 Abbreviations A ACK Acknowledge is a control character signaling that the receiver is ready to accept the next block AFBER Average Framing Bit Error Rate AIS Alarm Indication Signal indicates an all ones signalon the active receive jack AISS Alarm Indication Signal Seconds is a count of the number of seconds in which AIS was detected ALM Alarm AMI Alternate Mark Inversion is a method of transmitting binary digits in which successive marks are of alternating polarity but of equal amplitude A space designates zero amplitude ANSI American National Standards Institute is the principal standards development organization in the US ARM INB Arm Inband A
424. ving terminal sends back the FSN and the FIB Forward Indicator Bit retains its value If there is an error in this message the receiving terminal rejects the message sending back the FSN of the last correctly received signal as well as an inverted FIB FISU LSSU Options ON F1 OFF F2 FISU Fill In Signal Unit is an idle signal used for error sur veillance LSSU Link Status Signal Unit is used at start up or when an error is found on the line Note FISU LSSU can be turned ON F1 only when one of the above filters BSN BIB FSN FIB has been set to 0 or 1 If NONE has been selected for all these filters then FISU LSSU cannot be selected Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 195 6 8 2 2 Start Tracer Access the START TRACER feature through the MSU MONI TOR screen This feature begins the tracing process based on the filter values specified in the SETUP FILTER screen The tracer screen updates twice per second and can capture 50 messages per second This screen has three function keys to choose from e RESTART F1 Causes the SunSet T10 to restart the trace process e PAUSE RESUME F2 PAUSE freezes the display to allow observation of the data Measurements are still occurring but the counts are updated only in memory and notonthe display RESUME will update all data to their current values DECODE HEX F3 Displays the message contents for analysis 196 SunSet T10 p Rev B 6 8 2 3 View Print Tracer VIEW PRINT TR
425. wing in the LED indicators If there is no valid framing put proper framing on the T1 signal Make sure that the timeslot number is not confused with the channel number Make sure the received channel and the transmit channel are correct Ch 6 Troubleshooting amp Customer Information 463 2 0 Calibration The SunSet T10 is self calibrating It requires no adjustments and does not need to be returned to Sunrise Telecom for calibration If required to perform a periodic calibration on the SunSet T10 use this procedure 1 Switch the SunSet T10 on 2 Verify that all LEDs blinkin sequence and that each LED lights properly The POWER LED should always be green and the LOW BATT LED should light only when the battery is nearly discharged Verify that there are no errors listed at the completion of the self test Connectasingle bantamto single bantam cord from LINE 1 TX to LINE 1 RX Fromthe MAIN MENU gt TEST CONFIGURATION and config ure as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 TERM FRAMING ESF Tx CODING B8ZS Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 0 dB When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU If necessary press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any flashing history LEDs Verify that the PULSES ESF and PAT SYNC LEDs are green The B8ZS LED maybe on depending on the test pattern transmitted Select MEASUREMENT RESUL
426. y that the RxHz line is equivalent to the test rate If there is a Ch 4 Applications 367 discrepancy the modem will have a problem retransmitting the clock 7 Checkthat the RCV and XMT patterns are the same 8 The PAT SYNC LED should be green A If not press the RESYNC key on the keypad B If the LED is still red the modem may have a problem regenerating the pattern 9 Testthe validity ofthe loop by pressing the ERR INJ key on the keypad A Verify that these errors come back B The BIT ERROR LED should be red and a bit error should be recorded in MEASUREMENT RESULTS 9 Ifthe previous steps have been completed successfully then the local modem is not at fault A Return to the DATACOM INTERFACE screen and turn off the LL local loop line 10 Now that the local modem is ruled out the far end modem will need to be tested using a remote loopback 11 Totestthe remote loopback checkthatthe far end modem has aloopback capability atthe interface the modem must be able to loop TxDATA to the RxDATA It also must loop TxCLK RxCLK and TCLK to TXDATA 12 To use the modem it may be necessary to connect a PC to dial out Once the connection is in place disconnect the PC and replace it with the SunSet T10 datacom connector Note It may also be necessary to set the DTR to be always on by using the PC so that the line is not dropped when switching from the PC to SunSet T1O datacom connector 18 Select MAIN MENU DATACOM
427. y a few Nx64 timeslots have been selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen expect to see the datacom pattern on all timeslots 14 Verified in the previous steps the SunSet T10 is receiving a proper signal on both T1 Line receive jacks as well as on the multiport A Verify that the SunSet T10 is inserting the datacom s signal on the selected timeslots OnLine 1 the SunSet TIO transmits the signal received on L1 Rx butit inserts the signal received on the multiport into the Nx64K timeslots selected in the TEST CONFIGURA TION screen For this reason TE 2 is the best place to check the SunSet T10 s insert capability TE 2 should receive the datacom s pattern here 511 on the selected timeslots and TE 1 s pattern here all zeros on all the other timeslots 15 If TE 2 is not capable of displaying its received data plug a second SunSet T10 into the monitor jack Turn the second SunSet T10 on and in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen configure the second SunSet T10 as follows TEST MODE T1SINGL RxLVL 1 DSXMON FRAMING as required Tx CODING as required Tx SOURCE NORMAL XMT CLOCK INTERN TEST RATE 1 544M LBO 1 as required When done press the ENTER key on the keypad to return to the MAIN MENU 16 Connect Line 1 Rx to the MON jack of TE 2 17 Press the HISTORY key on the keypad to acknowledge any blinking LEDs 18 Select OTHER MEASUREMENTS gt VIEW RECEIVED DATA and verify that the datacom s pattern is on the sel
428. y enter the four idle supervision bits with the keypad numbers 1 and 0 Press the SHIFT key on the keypad to remove the SHIFT indicator 228 SunSet T10 Rev B 7 4 Place Receive Calls 211005 E CALLS ON HOOK 14542321 01 SOT REO A OFFHOOK Figure 114 Place Receive Calls Menu The Place Receive Calls menu configures a number of dial ing functions Place a DTMF MF or DP call Receive a DTMF MF or DP call Control the transmitted supervision and observe the received supervision e Speed dial a stored number Record a number with a label for future dialing Edit or delete speed dial numbers The following selections are provided in the Place Receive Calls Menu METHOD Options MF F1 DTMF F2 DP F3 MF Multi Frequency is an addressing technique used for interof fice signaling in a telephone network It uses a group of frequen cies in pairs to form a single address tone MF supports the digits 0 through 9 as well as many other control codes When selecting MF these control codes appear at the bottom of the screen DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency is the most commonly used ad dressing method on today s phones Like MF it uses pairs of tones to send a digit Unlike MF it uses two separate groups of tones DTMF supports 16 digits 0 through 9 and Athrough D DP Dial Pulse is the oldest addressing technique With pulse dialing the pho
429. y supplementary services available A refers to the VLR each time a MS receives or makes a call A security register called the AUC Authentication Center validates a SIM and performs a mathematical calculation on the same secret information stored in SIM Another security register is the EIR Equipment Identity Register Using a list of three categories the EIR ensures that all MEs used are valid and au thorized to function on the PLMN Public Land Mobile Network Together the MSC HLR VLR AUC and EIR make up the Net work Subsystem that connects the GSM network to a fixed net work Ch 5 Reference 431 6 2 TRAU Frames A TRAU may be located at the BTS BSC or MSC Figure 220 shows the different placements of transcoders A bis BSC A Interface MS TRAU 16 kbps 64 kbps BTS A Interface 64 kbps A bis MS BTS 16 MSC MSC MS BTS LE Figure 220 TRAU Locations When positioning the transcoder remotely to the BTS i e at the BSC the CCU Channel Codec Unit in the BTS controls some of the functions of the remote TRAU at the BSC In band signaling performs this remote control These signaling bits are known as C bits C bits control shift between data and speech frames rate adaptation for data calls downlink time framing for speech frames transfer DTX information 432 SunSet T1O 8 Rev B 6
430. ys the following results PINGS Number of PINGS to send during the test SENT Number of PINGS currently sent STATUS Current transmission status i e sending a PING RECEIVE Number of echo PINGS received UNREACH Number of circuits not reached or the number of PINGS not responded to ERROR Number of echo PINGS received containing an error ROUND TRIP TIME in milliseconds CUR This is the round trip time of the current PING AVG Average round trip time of all PINGS MAX Maximum round trip time of all PINGS MIN Minimum round trip time of all PINGS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 273 9 4 PING Response Enter the PING RESPONSE screen to respond to incoming PING messages Configure the local IP setting in the PING CON FIGURATION screen 21 10 05 ECHO PING ST 21 09 05 ET 000 01 00 PR ANSI617 IP 110 001 001 10 ECHOED IPS NO 1 PAGE 1 1 TIME PING FROM TOTAL 09 57 26 001 000 010 2 E DN PAUSE Figure 145 PING Response Screen The following F keys are within the PING Response screen PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 Allows the user to page up or down through the available information PAUSE START F3 Pauses the ET clock and test Starts the test without resetting the ET clock Shown in Figure 145 are the following results ECHOED IPS NO Number of IP addresses which sent PINGS to the SunSet T10 PAGE Lists the number of screens available 1 1 in the sample figure TIME This is
431. zero constrained This pattern contains up to 19 zeroes in a row and violates standards for consecutive zeroes in AMI coded transmission The QRSS pattern is derived from 2e20 511 511 is the industry standard 511 bit code used for DDS applications 1 16 The industry standard 1 in 16 pattern is used for over stress ing AMI lines It violates industry standards for pulse density therefore an AMI circuit that fails this test could still be a good circuit The pattern is frame aligned f is the framing bit as shown in its binary form f0100 0000 0000 0000 ALL 1 The industry standard all 1s pattern is used for stress testing AMI and B8ZS lines If sending the pattern unframed it is inter preted as an AIS Alarm Indication Signal The ALL 1 pattern is shown in its binary form as follows 1111 412 SunSet T1O Rev B 2e15 2e15 is the industry standard 2 1 pseudo random bit se quence This signal is formed from a 15 stage shift register and is not zero constrained This pattern contains up to 14 zeroes in a row and does not violate standards for consecutive zeroes in AMI coded transmission 127 127 isthe industry standard 127 bit code used for DDS appli cations 3 24 The industry standard 3 in 24 pattern is used for stress test ing AMI lines The pattern is frame aligned f is the framing bit as shown in its binary form f 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0100 ALLO ALL 0 is the industry standard all zeroes pa

00 Cover & Table of Contents - Advanced Test Equipment Rentals

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

00 Cover &amp; Table of Contents - Advanced Test Equipment Rentals

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

00 Cover & Table of Contents - Advanced Test Equipment Rentals